TWI637859B - Cartridge and printing material supply system - Google Patents

Abstract

A liquid supply system includes an adapter having one of conductive terminals coupled to an electrical device, the terminals being configured to make contact with a contact forming member at a contact portion of the terminals when the supply system supplies liquid to a printing device And receiving elastic force from the contact forming members. The contact portions of the terminals are substantially arranged in a contact portion plane that is neither parallel to nor perpendicular to a plane defined by the leading edge. A first restricting portion is provided on the front of one of the adapters adapted to be engaged with the engaging portion of the lever to restrict movement of the adapter in a direction opposite to the installation direction. The first restricting portion is positioned adjacent to a plane of the contact portion.

Description

Casing and printing material supply system (Cross-reference to related applications)

This application claims the priority of each of the following applications: Japanese Patent Application No. 2012-003694 filed on January 12, 2012; Japanese Patent Application No. 2012-003698 filed on January 12, 2012; Japanese Patent Application No. 2012-003653 filed on January 12, 2012; and Japanese Patent Application No. 2012-003652 filed on January 12, 2012; Japanese Patent Filed on August 30, 2012 Application No. 2012-189836; US Patent Application No. 13/410461 filed on March 02, 2012; US Patent Application No. 13/410478 filed on March 02, 2012; March 2012 U.S. Patent Application No. 13/410528 filed on 02; and PCT Patent Application No. PCT / JP2012 / 001395 filed on March 01, 2012, the entire content of each of these applications is Incorporated herein by reference.

The invention relates to a box, a combination of a box and a printing device (or a part thereof), and / or a printing material supply system including the box and a printing device.

Various mechanisms have been proposed for attachment and detachment of a cassette to a printing device. It has been published in U.S. Publication No. 2005/0151811 (which corresponds to JP-A-2007-230249), U.S. Patent No. 7,008,053 (which corresponds to JP-A-2005-022345), and U.S. Patent No. 6,276,780 (which corresponds to JP-A-2002-019142), US Patent No. 6,955,422, US Patent No. 6,074,042, and US Patent No. 7,018,030 disclose several examples of these mechanisms.

US Publication No. 2005/0151811 discloses a case having a latch lever 3 and an electrical contact terminal pad 102. The lever 3 contains an anchoring portion 6 for engaging the printing press. The anchoring portion 6 is disposed away from the contact pad 102. Since the anchoring portion 6 is far away from the box terminal, the engagement with the printing machine can only make a limited contribution to the accuracy and stability of the positioning of the box terminal relative to the respective printing machine terminal.

In addition, the lever 3 in US Publication No. 2005/0151811 needs to be long enough to reach a position accessible to the user so that the user can operate the lever. The lever also protrudes away from the side wall of the box. This large lever leads to the creation of a larger box, which can also lead to the creation of a large printing press (the box is attached to and removed from it), and a bulky package for the transportation and distribution of the box. It also increases transportation and parts costs.

Moreover, the box structure connecting the rivet portion 6 to the box-side terminal includes a flexible section of the lever 3. Even if the rivet portion 6 can be firmly engaged with the printing machine, the vibration generated during the printing operation can be transmitted to the box terminal through the flexible section of the lever 3, and thus the positioning of the box terminal relative to the terminal of the printing machine can be affected. For ink cartridges of the on-carriage type, such as those disclosed in US Publication No. 2005/0151811, this is particularly a problem because these ink cartridge systems are mounted on the print head to which they are attached. On the carriage of a printing press. In a carriage-on-press, the carriage is scanned back and forth over the print medium during a printing operation. In addition to other vibrations generated during the printing operation, the ink cartridge in the carriage is also subjected to a large acceleration force each time the scanning direction is changed.

The lever in US Publication No. 2005/0151811 is formed with the box body and is elastically deformed. With this configuration, the material used to make the box is limited to one of the following materials: it has sufficient moldability to make this configuration, and it also has the need to elastically deform the lever during engagement and disengagement with the printing press Sufficient flexibility and durability.

The lever can be plastically deformed by the user. This plastic deformation of the lever can cause misalignment of the positions between the box-side terminals and the printer terminals, which can lead to poor electrical communication. Plastic deformation also reduces the durability of the lever. Moreover, it must be collected during the packaging of the box. Special measures, such as those disclosed in U.S. Patent No. 7,018,030, are taken to avoid the latent deformation of the lever when the box is packaged, especially when the box is packaged in a vacuum package.

US Patent No. 6,276,780 discloses a case that does not have any memory or electrical terminals. Since this type of box does not require electrical connection with the printing press, it does not need to include a structure or configuration for maintaining stable positioning and alignment of the box terminal and the printing terminal.

In addition, the case is attached to the printing press by a latch mechanism 132 (in FIGS. 9A to 16 of US Pat. No. 6,276,780) placed on the printing press. The cartridge-side latch clip 220 that engages the latch mechanism 132 is away from the pivot of the latch mechanism 132 in a direction in which the cartridge is removed from the printing press. As a result, a force (indicated by arrow X in FIG. 12 in U.S. Patent No. 6,276,780) is applied to a cassette by a resilient member 156 or a compressive force seal 152 in the direction in which the cassette is removed from the printing press. At this time, this force can be easily converted into a force that releases the engagement of the stopper portion 134 with the cassette latch clip 220 so that the cassette can become detached from the printing press during use of the printing press. Because the meshing configuration disclosed in U.S. Patent No. 6,276,780 includes the inherent risk of the cartridge becoming detached from the printing press, it is not suitable for use with the configuration disclosed in U.S. Publication No. 2005/0151811 (which requires the box terminals and Correct contact between the terminals of the printing press). In addition, in the configuration of US Publication No. 2005/0151811, the contact between the box terminal and the printer terminal applies a force from the terminal of the printer to the box in a lateral direction, so that the box can be in the lateral direction mobile. The latching mechanism 132 of U.S. Patent No. 6,276,780 is unsuitable for use in the cassette of U.S. Publication No. 2005/0151811 for at least the following reasons: The latching mechanism 132 may not match the lateral movement of the cassette, and therefore the latching mechanism 132 It becomes detachable from the case.

U.S. Patent 6,074,042 discloses an ink cartridge having an electrical contact 54. As shown in its FIGS. 12A to 13B, the electrical contact 54 is at the leading edge of the direction through which the cartridge is mounted in the printing press. With this configuration, when the cartridge is installed in the printing press, the electrical contact 54 of the cartridge flattens the spring-biased electrical contact 104 of the printing press. Outside of metal electrical contact 54 Metal oxidation, oil or other non-conductive substances on the surface can become sandwiched between the conductive metal of the box electrical contacts and the printed electromechanical contacts, which may prevent the electrical communication between the box and the printing machine.

US Patent No. 6,955,422 discloses (for example, in its FIGS. 2a to 2d) a cassette 1 having a memory device 7 with electrodes 7a. The electrodes 7a are aligned substantially parallel to the direction in which the cassette is inserted into the printer. With this configuration, the printing machine electrode 106 slides a long distance across the surface of the circuit board on which the electrode 7a is formed. The surface of the circuit board is usually covered with an electrically insulating resin material. When the printing press electrode 106 is scratched against the circuit board, it can damage the insulation portion so that the debris of the insulation portion peels off from the circuit board. Insulation debris can get stuck between the printer electrode 106 and the box electrode 7a, and becomes a cause of poor or (otherwise) unreliable electrical communication between the printer and the box.

As shown in Figures 5A to 6B of U.S. Patent No. 6,955,422, the printing press is provided with a spring plate 103 which applies a propulsive force to press the printing press electrode 106 against the memory when the cartridge is installed in the printing press. The surface of the body device 7 and move the case body 1 upward when the case body is pulled out of the printing press.

US Patent No. 7,008,053 discloses in Fig. 5A one of the elastic members 40 provided on a printing press. When the case is completely installed in the printing press, the lower end 40a of the elastic member 40 abuts a flat surface 12a at the upper portion of the protruding portion 12 on which the electrode 14 is located. The abutment between the lower end 40b and the flat surface 12a restricts upward movement of the protruding portion 12. However, the configuration of US Pat. No. 7,008,053 does not include any member located near the protruding portion 12 for restricting downward movement of the protruding portion 12. As a result, the protruding portion 12 vibrates vertically quite freely during the operation of the printing press and thus the electrodes may become misaligned or cut off from the printing press terminals.

Although various mechanisms have emerged for attachment and removal, there is still a need to reduce the overall size of a printing press for better usability and ease of installation. To reduce the size of a printing press, it is often necessary to reduce the size of the large number of components that form the printing press and related components. These components and Related components include a cassette attached to a printer and a cassette mounting structure for the cassette.

For the purpose of improving the use of printing presses, information on the printing materials contained in the box is usually displayed on the monitor of the printing press (for example, information about the remaining amount of printing materials). The cartridge attached to the printing press will have a circuit board with a memory for storing information about printed materials. The circuit board has terminals (box-side terminals) for sending and receiving information to and from the printer. Information about printed materials is transmitted between the memory and a controller of the printing press through the contact between these box-side terminals and the terminals on the printing press (device-side terminals). Therefore, it is necessary to maintain a stable electrical connection between the box-side terminals and the equipment-side terminals.

As will be explained below, there are no known institutions that meet these requirements in a completely acceptable manner.

This problem is not limited to a cartridge containing ink for printing, but is also common in printing equipment and / or cartridges configured to supply or spray various other printing materials (for example, toner) and inks. In any of them.

Therefore, it is necessary to ensure a stable electrical connection between the box-side terminal and the device-side terminal. There is also a need to achieve a reduction in the size of a cassette, a printing press, and a printing material supply system including a cassette attached to the printing press.

In order to more appropriately achieve at least part of the above content, the present invention provides various aspects and embodiments described below.

The first aspect:

A cartridge removably attached to a printing device, the printing device including a cartridge mounting structure configured to have: (i) a device-side bottom wall member; (ii) a first A device side wall part which can be tied to the front of one of the box mounting structures and provided to traverse the device side bottom wall part; and (iii) a second device side side wall part A piece, which can be tied behind one of the box mounting structures, is provided to traverse the device-side bottom wall member and oppose the first device-side sidewall member. The device may include a printed material supply structure, which may be in the form of a tube, structured to have a base end provided on the bottom wall part on the side of the device and connected to the box and configured to hold the box in the box. A containing printing material is supplied to a peripheral end of a printing head. The device preferably includes a plurality of device-side electrical contact terminals, which can be provided in a device-side corner section in which the device-side bottom wall member traverses one of the first (front) device-side side wall members. The device may also include a lever provided in a rotatable manner on the side wall member of the first (front) device for attachment of the cartridge to the printing device and disassembly from the printing device. Here, a Z-axis represents an axis parallel to a central axis C of a printing material supply tube, and an X-axis represents an axis in which a printing material supply tube and a device-side terminal are arrayed and which is orthogonal to the Z-axis, and a The Y axis represents an axis orthogonal to both the Z axis and the X axis. A + Z-axis direction indicates a direction from the base end to the peripheral end of the printing material supply pipe along the Z-axis, which may be an upward direction. -The -Z axis direction means one of the + Z axis directions in the opposite direction. A + X-axis direction indicates a direction from the printing material supply tube toward the device-side terminal along the X-axis, which can be a forward direction. -The -X-axis direction means one of the + X-axis directions in the opposite direction. A + Y-axis direction indicates a direction along the Y-axis to one end, which can be a side direction, and a -Y-axis direction indicates a direction along the Y-axis to the other end. The device may be configured such that the device-side terminal is in contact with the case to attach a force in a specified direction including a + Z-axis component in the attached state of one of the case-to-case mounting structure (which can be tied back Elastic force or elastic force) to the case. The lever may have an operating member at the + Z-axis direction end (which may be the top end) and a -Z-axis direction end (which may be the bottom end) of the first device-side restricting element to lock the case. Therefore, the movement of the box body in the + Z axis direction is restricted. The lever may be configured to rotate as a rotation axis around a specified position between the operation member and the first device-side restricting element. Here, the X-axis, Y-axis, and Z-axis with respect to the box in the attached state correspond to one of the X-axis, a Y-axis, and a Z-axis of the box, respectively. The box may include a first surface on the −Z axis direction side and a second surface on the + Z axis direction side, as two opposite sides in the Z axis direction. One surface; one third surface on the + X axis direction side and one fourth surface on the -X axis direction side, as two surfaces facing each other in the X axis direction and crossing the first surface and the second surface ; Configured to connect a corner section of one of the first and third faces; an inclined surface provided to form a portion of the corner section and inclined along a specific direction including one of the + X-axis direction component and the -Z-axis direction component surface. A printing material supply structure may be provided on the first side to be connected with the printing material supply pipe. The plurality of box-side terminals may be provided corresponding to the respective device-side terminals and located on the inclined surface to receive a force from the device-side terminal in a specified direction including one of the + Z-axis direction components. Due to the slope at the contact area, the force can also have a -X axis direction component. The case may also include a first case-side restriction portion that is configured to be locked by the first device-side restriction element and thus restricts movement of the case in the + Z axis direction.

The above configuration may be provided with either or both of the two features of the following two embodiments. In one embodiment, the added feature is to provide the first box-side restricting portion at a specific position near a third surface of a crossing portion, wherein the third surface crosses the inclined surface. In another embodiment, the box-side terminal includes: a first terminal including a first external portion located at the most + Y-axis direction end; and a second terminal including a most-Y-axis direction end One of the second outer portions, wherein the first box-side restricting portion is located on the inner side of the range between the first outer portion and the second outer portion along the Y-axis direction instead of the outer side.

A cartridge according to a first aspect of the present invention has a first cartridge-side restricting portion that is engaged with a lever of a printing device. Since the lever is not integrated with the box, the material used to make the box may be different from the material used to make the lever. Moreover, less attention can be paid to flexibility and durability requirements and more attention to other properties such as ink resistance to select the material of the box. Therefore, different plastics, thermoplastics, and resins can be used to make different components.

Moreover, since the lever is not on the box, no special care is required to prevent the creep deformation of the lever when the box is packaged for transportation and distribution. This simplifies packaging requirements and improves user convenience.

Since the lever is not an integral part of the case, the case can be made smaller. this The size of the packaging materials (such as paper or boxes) used to package the boxes for transportation or distribution is further allowed, thereby advantageously reducing transportation costs and parts costs.

Because the lever is not integrated with the box body, the first box-side restricting portion can have a small size and a simple structure, and has higher rigidity than the structure described in US Publication No. 2005/0151811. This leads to a significant reduction in the possibility of plastic deformation of the restriction portion on the side of the first case. In the attached state, the box can be maintained at the correct position in the box mounting structure, which maintains normal or good contact between the box-side terminals and the device-side terminals and reduces the possibility of bad connections. In the case of the first aspect, because the first-side restriction portion of the case may have a small size and a simple structure, it is different from the case of US Publication No. 2005/0151811. No special care is required in the packaging of transportation and distribution to prevent the creep deformation of the lever. This improves the user experience and ease of use.

In the case of the first embodiment according to the first aspect, the first case-side restricting portion may be provided on the -Z axis direction side of the rotation axis of the lever. This lever is used to limit the movement of the box in the + Z axis even when a force is applied from the device-side terminal in a direction containing a + Z axis component to move the box in the + Z axis direction. This reduces the possibility that the first case-side restricting portion becomes unlocked or disengaged from the first device-side restricting element, thereby ensuring a stable electrical connection between the case-side terminal and the device-side terminal and reducing the possibility of bad connections. When a force is applied from the device-side terminal to the mounted box along the -X axis direction, the first device-side restricting element can move around the rotation axis of the lever as the box moves in the -X axis direction. This reduces the possibility that the first cassette-side restriction portion is decoupled from the first device-side restriction element.

In the case according to the first aspect, the first case-side restricting portion is provided at a specific position near the third surface of the crossing portion. The box can thus be fixed to the box mounting structure at a position close to one of the contacts between the box-side terminal and the device-side terminal. This reduces the possibility of misalignment of the box-side terminals with respect to the device-side terminals, and reduces bad connections between the box-side terminals and the device-side terminals. In the case where the case is dropped, the first case-side restriction prevents the case-side terminal from directly hitting (for example) the floor surface and therefore Helps protect the box-side terminals from damage. Especially when the box-side terminal is mounted on a circuit board having a memory unit, this protects the fragile memory unit from damage and strengthens the impact resistance effect. Providing the first box-side restricting portion at a position close to the crossing portion enables the lever of the box mounting structure to be located closer to the first surface. This achieves a reduction in the size of the box and the printing device along the Z-axis direction.

Second aspect:

According to the case of the first aspect, the first case-side restricting portion is provided at a specific position near a crossing portion where the third surface crosses one of the inclined surfaces.

In the case according to the second aspect, the first case-side restricting portion is provided at a specific position close to the crossing portion. The case can thus be fixed to the case mounting structure at a position close to the contact between the case-side terminal and the device-side terminal. The first case-side restricting portion prevents the position of the case-side terminal from being misaligned with respect to the device-side terminal. Therefore, the first case-side restricting portion reduces the possibility of a bad connection between the case-side terminal and the device-side terminal. In the case where the case is dropped, the first case-side restricting portion reduces the possibility that the case-side terminal directly hits, for example, a floor surface and thus helps protect the case-side terminal from damage. Especially when the box-side terminal is mounted on a circuit board having a memory unit, this protects the fragile memory unit from damage and strengthens the impact resistance effect. When the first box-side restricting portion is formed as a protruding portion, the impact resistance effect is further enhanced. Providing the first box-side restricting portion at a position close to the crossing portion enables the lever of the box mounting structure to be located closer to the first surface. This achieves a reduction in the size of the box and the printing device along the Z-axis direction.

Third aspect:

The box according to any one of the first aspect and / or the second aspect, wherein the first box-side restricting portion is provided at a position crossing a plane (plane Yc), the plane passing through the box The center of one of the body's width or length in the Y axis direction is parallel to the Z and X axes.

When the cassette system is in the press in the attached state, the cassette body A direction including a + Z-axis direction component receives a force, and presses the first box-side restricting portion against the first device-side restricting portion of the lever by the force. By providing the first box-side restricting portion at a position traversed by the plane Yc, even if the box will be moved about the X-axis or Z-axis by applying an external force, The portion of the first box-side restricting portion in the vicinity will still be almost completely immovable. It should be noted that the first box-side restricting portion is disposed at a position crossing the portion, the edge of the circuit board, or one of the two. By providing the first case-side restricting portion which is hardly moved at a position close to one of the case-side terminals, the electrical connection between the case-side terminal and the device-side terminal can be stabilized.

Fourth aspect:

The fourth aspect is the embodiment described above, wherein the box-side terminal includes: a first terminal including a first external portion located at an end in the most + Y-axis direction; and a second terminal including A second outer portion located at the extreme end of the -Y axis direction, wherein at least part of the first box-side restricting portion is located between the first outer portion and the second outer portion along the Y axis direction, and as mentioned above And, it can be implemented independently of or in conjunction with the above-mentioned embodiment in the first aspect proposed above.

In the case according to the fourth aspect, at least part of the first case-side restricting portion is located between the first outer portion and the second outer portion. This locates the first box-side limiting portion with almost no movement at a position very close to the box-side terminals, thus ensuring a stable electrical connection between the box-side terminals and the contact mechanism.

Fifth aspect:

According to the case of the fourth aspect, the first case-side restricting portion is located at an inner side rather than an outer side of a range between the first outer portion and the second outer portion in the Y-axis direction.

Some device-side terminals can protrude farther than others. In the example shown in FIG. 31, the terminal 731 protrudes farther outward. When the box is installed in the printing machine, the box-side terminal will receive a force with a + Z-axis component from the device-side terminal. If the case is held too firmly, some of the terminals on the device side (the end in the example in Figure 31 Sub-734) may not be appropriate. By completely positioning the first box-side restricting portion to the inside of the terminal in the width direction, the box can be fully inclined to adjust the direction of the inclined surface facing so that the electrical connection between the box-side terminal and the device-side terminal can be Even more stable. These benefits are also related to the configuration of the embodiments presented above.

Sixth aspect:

The case according to any one of the first aspect to the fifth aspect, further comprising a second case-side restriction portion configured to be provided on the second device side A second device-side restricting element on the side wall member is locked and thus restricts the movement of the box in the + Z axis direction, and the second box-side restricting portion is provided on the fourth surface.

According to the sixth aspect, the box has a second box-side restriction portion on the fourth surface to restrict the movement of the box in the + Z axis direction, and to restrict the box from the + X axis direction end and the -X axis direction end + Z-axis motion. This further prevents misalignment of the positions of the respective box-side terminals with respect to the box mounting structure, and further ensures a stable electrical connection between the box-side terminals and the device-side terminals.

Seventh aspect:

According to the case of the sixth aspect, the second case-side restricting portion is to be inserted into a protruding portion of the second device-side restricting element formed as a recess or a through hole.

In the case according to the seventh aspect, inserting the second case-side restriction portion to the second device-side restriction element provides a rotation pivot point to rotate the case around the vicinity of the second case-side restriction portion. This facilitates attaching and detaching the cassette to and from the cassette mounting structure.

Eighth aspect:

According to the cartridge of any one of the first aspect to the seventh aspect, the first cartridge-side restricting portion is located on a -X-axis direction side of the rotation axis of the lever.

In the case according to the eighth aspect, in the attached state, the first case-side restricting portion generates a rotational torque to the lever to rotate the lever about the axis of rotation of the lever in a direction opposite to the unlocking direction. This reduces the possibility that the first box-side restriction portion can be unlocked from the first device-side restriction element. Performance, and further ensure a stable electrical connection between the box-side terminals and the device-side terminals. Even when the case receives a force in the -X axis direction from the device-side terminal to move in the -X axis direction, the first device-side restricting element moves in the -X axis direction along with the movement of the case. This movement reduces the possibility that the first cassette-side restriction portion becomes unlocked from the first device-side restriction element.

Ninth aspect:

According to an eighth aspect of the case, the first case-side restricting portion has: a first abutting portion which abuts a first portion of one of the first device-side restricting elements to restrict the movement of the case in the + Z axis direction; and A second abutting portion is adjacent to a second portion of the first device-side restricting element to restrict the movement of the box in the + X axis direction.

In the case according to the ninth aspect, the first case-side restricting portion has a first abutting portion and a second abutting portion, and thus it is ensured that a rotational moment is generated on the lever to rotate around the axis of rotation of the lever in a direction opposite to the unlocking direction. Turn the lever. This further reduces the possibility that the first case-side restriction portion is unlocked from the first device-side restriction element and more effectively prevents a bad connection between the case-side terminal and the device-side terminal.

Tenth aspect:

According to the cartridge of any one of the first aspect to the ninth aspect, it further includes a protrusion configured to abut the operating member of the lever and at the case attached to the case mounting structure. During the disassembly of the box mounting structure, a force including a component in the + Z axis direction is received, and the protrusion is provided on the + Z axis direction side of the first box side restriction portion on the third surface.

The case according to the tenth aspect further has a protruding portion. The cassette can be easily removed from the cassette mounting structure by using the lever's operating members and protrusions.

Eleventh aspect:

The box according to any one of the first aspect to the tenth aspect, wherein the corner section has a step extending from the first surface in the + Z axis direction, and the step is located on the -X axis direction side of the inclined surface and- On the Z-axis direction side, and the step has one The three device-side limiting elements contact one of the third box-side limiting elements to limit the movement of the box along the Y-axis direction.

In the case according to the eleventh aspect, the third case-side restricting element for restricting the movement of the case in the Y-axis direction is provided with a case-side terminal in a corner section. This restricts the movement of the third surface side of the box in the Y-axis direction in the attached state of the box.

Twelfth aspect:

According to the eleventh aspect of the case, wherein the third case-side restricting element includes a pair of protruding parts configured to receive a third device-side restricting element protruding from the bottom wall part of the apparatus side in the + Z axis direction, And the pair of protruding members protrude from the step along the + X axis direction.

In the case according to the twelfth aspect, the simple structure of providing the pair of protruding members protruding from the step in the + X axis direction is effectively restricted to the third side of the case in the attached state of the case Movement along the Y axis.

Thirteenth aspect:

The box according to any one of the eleventh aspect and the twelfth aspect, wherein when the box is viewed from the first side in the + Z axis direction, a part of the third box-side restricting element overlaps the inclined surface .

In the case according to the thirteenth aspect, the third case-side restricting element and the inclined surface are positioned to partially overlap each other. This further restricts the movement of the third surface side of the box body around the printing material supply tube in the Y-axis direction.

Fourteenth aspect:

The cartridge according to any one of the first aspect to the thirteenth aspect, wherein the ink supply structure is provided at a specific position on the first side closer to the fourth side than to the third side.

The cartridge according to the fourteenth aspect has an ink supply structure located closer to the fourth side than to the third side. Compared with a structure in which the ink supply structure is located closer to the third side than to the fourth side, this structure reduces the possibility of adhesion of the printing material to the case-side terminals. This reduces bad connections between the box-side terminals and the device-side terminals.

Fifteenth aspect:

The box according to any one of the first aspect to the fourteenth aspect, wherein the first box-side restricting portion is a protruding portion.

According to the case of the fourteenth aspect, the first case-side restricting portion is provided as a protrusion, which can be of a small size and a simple structure.

Sixteenth aspect:

The case according to any one of the first aspect to the fifteenth aspect, wherein the case-side terminal includes one of the case-side ground terminals that is in contact with one of the equipment-side ground terminals, and the equipment-side ground terminal and A ground wire is connected, and the box-side ground terminal is provided at the center of the width of the box or the length in the Y-axis direction and is configured to be on the side of any other box during the process of attaching the box to the box mounting structure Before the terminal is in contact with a corresponding device-side terminal, it is in contact with the device-side ground terminal.

In the case according to the sixteenth aspect, the force first applied from the case mounting structure to the case-side terminals is generated at the substantial center of the width of the case or the length in the Y-axis direction. This prevents the force applied to the box-side terminals from acting so that the box is inclined in the Y-axis direction, thereby ensuring a stable electrical connection between the box-side terminals and the device-side terminals. Before the other box-side terminals are in contact with the corresponding device-side terminals, the box-side ground terminal is in contact with the corresponding device-side ground terminal. The grounding function of the box-side ground terminal beneficially prevents or reduces failures and damage caused by high voltage, even when an unexpected high voltage is applied to the box.

Seventeenth aspect:

According to the sixteenth aspect of the case, the length in the Z-axis direction of one of the case-side ground terminals is longer than the length in the Z-axis direction of the other case-side terminal.

The case according to the seventeenth aspect ensures the contact between the box-side ground terminal and the equipment-side ground terminal.

Eighteenth aspect:

A cartridge detachably attached to a printing device, the printing device comprising: a Box mounting structure configured to allow attachment and detachment of the box; a printed material supply tube structured to have a base end provided on one bottom of the box mounting structure and connected to the box And configured to supply a printing material contained in the case to a peripheral end of a printing head; a plurality of device-side terminals provided to contact the case; and a lever provided to be used for Attachment and disassembly of the box, one of the Z-axis represents an axis parallel to a central axis C of the printing material supply tube, and the X-axis represents the printing material supply tube and the equipment side terminal arrayed along the array and is orthogonal to Z One of the axes, and a Y-axis represents an axis orthogonal to both the Z-axis and the X-axis, where a + Z-axis direction represents a direction from the base end of the printing material supply tube to the peripheral end along the Z-axis, and- The Z-axis direction indicates one of the opposite directions of the + Z-axis direction, a + X-axis direction indicates one of the directions from the printing material supply pipe to the device-side terminal along the X-axis, and the -X-axis direction indicates one of the + X-axis directions. , A + Y direction indicates a direction along the Y axis leading to one end, and a -Y direction Shows one of the directions along the Y axis leading to the other end, where the device-side terminal is in contact with the case to apply a force in a specified direction containing one of the + Z-axis components when one of the case-to-case mounting structures is attached To the box, and the lever has an operating member at the + Z-axis direction end and a -Z-axis direction end with a first device-side restriction element to lock the box and therefore limit the box's movement in the + Z-axis direction, The lever rotates around a specified position between the operating member and the first device-side restriction element as a rotation axis, wherein the X-axis, Y-axis, and Z-axis correspond to the box in the attached state, respectively. One of the boxes is an X-axis, a Y-axis and a Z-axis. The cartridge body includes: an ink supply structure which is located at the end of the cartridge body in the -Z axis direction to be connected with a printing material supply tube; a circuit board which is located on the + X axis direction side of the ink supply structure and has a length along the + X axis. One of the axis-direction component and the -Z-axis direction component is inclined in a specified direction; a plurality of box-side terminals corresponding to the respective device-side terminals provided on the surface of the circuit board and including + Z from the device-side terminals along the One of the axial direction components receives a force in a specified direction; and a first case-side restricting portion configured to be locked by the first device-side restricting element and thus restricting the movement of the case in the + Z axis direction, and it The + X-axis direction side of the printing material supply pipe.

The above configuration may be provided with either or both of the features of the following two embodiments. In one embodiment, the added feature is that the first box-side limiting portion is provided at a specific position close to a board end which is located on the + Z-axis side of the surface of the circuit board. In another embodiment, the box-side terminal includes: a first terminal including a first external portion located at the most + Y-axis direction end; and a second terminal including a most-Y-axis direction end One of the second outer portions, wherein the first box-side restricting portion is located on the inner side of the range between the first outer portion and the second outer portion along the Y-axis direction instead of the outer side.

The case according to the eighteenth aspect has a first case-side restricting portion locked by a lever of the printing device. The first case-side restricting portion is located on the -Z axis direction side of the rotation axis of the lever. This structure does not require any engaging member (such as the case according to the above-mentioned first aspect) between the rotating shaft and the operating member of the lever and has advantageous effects similar to those of the case according to the first aspect. For example, the box according to the eighteenth aspect shortens the distance between the lever and the box, thus allowing the size reduction along the X-axis direction of the printing device and the entire printing material supply system including the box and the printing device.

In the case according to the eighteenth aspect, the first case-side restricting portion is provided on the -Z axis direction side of the rotation axis of the lever. This achieves the restriction of the movement of the box in the + Z axis direction by the lever (such as the box according to the first aspect), and has similar advantageous effects as those of the box according to the first aspect. For example, this ensures a more stable electrical connection between the box-side terminals and the device-side terminals and reduces bad connections.

According to the implementation, the box-side terminal includes a first terminal including a first external portion at the end in the + Y-axis direction and a second terminal including a second external portion at the end in the -Y-axis direction. For example, the first box-side restricting portion is located at the inner side rather than the outer side of a range between the first outer portion and the second outer portion along the Y-axis direction, and the first box-side restricting portion is located at the first outer portion and the first outer portion. The range between the two outer parts is inside, not outside. This achieves fine adjustment of the direction of the beveled surface on which the box-side terminals are provided, As in the case according to the first embodiment. This fine adjustment of the direction of the beveled surface ensures that the distance between the box-side terminal and the device-side terminal even when the position of each of the device-side terminals or the slope of the first box-side restricted portion changes due to manufacturing errors. Stable electrical connection.

According to the embodiment in which the first box-side restricting portion is provided at a specific position close to a board end, the board end is located on the + Z-axis direction side of the surface of the circuit board, and the first box-side restricting portion is provided near At the position of the plate end on the + Z axis direction side. In other words, the first case-side restricting portion is arranged as close as possible to the case-side terminal. Since the first box-side limiting portion is locked by a lever, the periphery of the first box-side limiting portion does not substantially have a position shift caused by applying an external force to the box. Providing box-side terminals at positions with minimal position shift effectively prevents misalignment of the respective box-side terminals with respect to the box mounting structure, thus maintaining a stable electrical connection between the box-side terminals and the device-side terminals .

Nineteenth aspect:

A printing material supply system including: a printing device; and a cartridge according to any one of the first aspect to the eighteenth aspect, the printing device including a cartridge installation configured to have one of the following Structure: (i) a device-side bottom wall part; (ii) a first device-side side wall part that is provided to traverse the device-side bottom wall part; and (iii) a second device-side side wall part that is provided To cross the equipment-side bottom wall part and be opposite to the first equipment-side side wall part; a printing material supply tube structured to have a base end provided on the equipment-side bottom wall part and connected to the box body and To supply one of the printing materials contained in the box to one of the peripheral ends of a print head; a plurality of device-side terminals provided on the device side in which the device-side bottom wall member crosses one of the first device-side sidewall members In the corner section; and a lever, which is provided on the side wall part of the first device in a rotatable manner for attachment of the box to the printing device and disassembly from the printing device, wherein a Z axis represents parallel to Printing material supply tube A central axis C, an X axis represents an axis along which an array of printed material supply tubes and equipment-side terminals are arrayed and is orthogonal to the Z axis, and a Y axis represents orthogonal On one of the Z and X axes, one of the + Z directions indicates a direction from the base end of the printing material supply pipe to the peripheral end along the Z axis, and one -Z direction indicates one of the + Z directions. -A + X direction indicates one of the directions from the printing material supply tube to the device side terminal along the X axis, a -X axis direction indicates a reverse direction of the + X axis direction, and a + Y axis direction indicates the direction along the Y axis. One direction at one end, and one -Y axis direction indicates one direction along the Y axis leading to the other end, in which the device-side terminal is in contact with the box body to include + when one of the box-to-box mounting structures is attached One of the Z-axis direction components applies a force to the box in a specified direction, and the lever has an operating member at the + Z-axis direction end and a -Z-axis end at the first device-side restricting element to lock the box. As a result, the movement of the box body in the + Z axis direction is restricted, and the lever rotates around a specified position between the operation member and the first device-side restriction element as a rotation axis.

The printing material supply system according to the nineteenth aspect includes a case according to any one of the first aspect to the eighteenth aspect to allow the size reduction of the printing material supply system in both the X-axis direction and the Z-axis direction. It is small and reduces the possibility that the first device-side restricting element is unlocked from the first case-side restricting portion. This ensures a stable electrical connection between the box-side terminals and the device-side terminals and reduces bad connections.

As will be understood by those skilled in the art, the embodiments of the present invention are directed to an ink cartridge, a combination of an ink cartridge and a printing device, or a part of a printing device, wherein the ink cartridge is installed in an The ink is supplied to the equipment and system of a printing equipment, wherein the system includes the printing equipment (or a part thereof) and / or wherein the system does not include the printing equipment.

In one embodiment of the present invention, an ink cartridge adapted to be removably mounted on an inkjet printing device is disclosed, wherein the inkjet printing device having the ink cartridge mounted thereon includes an One of the levers. The printing device preferably includes a plurality of device-side contact forming members that are structured and configured to press the ink cartridge against the device sides after the cartridge is mounted on the printing device. Pick up An elastic force is applied to the ink cartridge when the forming member is touched. The ink cartridge body preferably includes a cartridge body including a front surface or a first surface, a rear surface or a second surface, a top surface or a third surface, and a bottom surface or a fourth surface. One surface and the back or second surface are opposite each other and the top or third surface and the bottom or fourth surface are opposite each other. The ink cartridge includes an ink chamber for storing ink. The ink cartridge preferably also includes an electrical device. The ink cartridge body also includes an ink supply structure positioned at the bottom or fourth surface of the cartridge body and having a leading edge defining a mounting direction of a plane of the ink cartridge body, wherein the ink supply structure is adapted and configured. To supply ink from an ink chamber to an inkjet printing apparatus. The ink cartridge body may also include a terminal carrying structure located near the front face or the first surface of the body of the cartridge, the terminal carrying structure having a plurality of conductive terminals coupled to the electrical device therein. These terminals are adapted and disposed on the terminal bearing structure to make contact with the contact forming member and receive elastic force from the contact forming member when the ink cartridge is mounted on the printing device. The terminals are substantially arranged in a terminal plane that is neither parallel to nor perpendicular to a plane defined by the leading edge. The ink cartridge body preferably includes a first restricting portion adapted to be engaged with the engaging portion of the lever to restrict the ink cartridge body from moving in a direction opposite to the installation direction. The engaging portion of the first restricting portion is preferably located adjacent to the terminal carrying structure.

In one embodiment, the terminal plane is at an angle between about 20 and 50 degrees, preferably from about 25 and 40 degrees, with the plane defined by the leading edge.

The crossing between the terminal bearing structure and the printing equipment is important for the correct installation of the box. As described herein, by pairing at an angle, the box can receive both upward and backward forces. These forces help to hold the box in place.

In one embodiment, when the front surface or the first surface of the case body is viewed downward with the ink supply structure facing downward, the engaging portion of the first restricting portion is located on the left side of the right edge of one of the rightmost terminals among the plurality of terminals and One of the plurality of terminals is to the right of the left edge of one of the leftmost terminals.

In one embodiment, the terminals are adapted and arranged on the terminal carrying structure to make contact with the contact forming member at the contact portion of the terminal and receive elastic force from the contact forming member. The contact portions are substantially arranged in a contact portion plane. In this embodiment, when the front surface or the first surface of the case main body is viewed downward with the ink supply structure facing downward, the engaging portion of the first restricting portion may be located to the left of the rightmost contact portion of the plurality of terminals and the plurality of terminals. The right side of the leftmost contact portion in the terminal. In one embodiment, the contact portion plane forms an angle between about 25 and 40 degrees with a plane defined by the leading edge.

In one embodiment, the ink cartridge further includes a second restricting portion on the rear surface or the second surface of the ink cartridge. The second limiting portion is preferably adapted and configured to engage a respective portion of an inkjet printing device. In this embodiment, when the distance is measured in a direction orthogonal to one of the planes defined by the leading edge, the distance between the engaging portion of the second restricting portion and the plane defined by the leading edge is greater than the engaging of the first restricting portion. The distance between the section and the plane defined by the leading edge.

In one embodiment, when the ink cartridge is viewed from the side where the engaging portion of the first restricting portion is on the right side and the ink supply structure faces downward, the ink cartridge is measured in a direction orthogonal to a plane defined by the leading edge. In the case of distance, the distance between the engaging portion of the first restricting portion and the plane defined by the leading edge when the box is installed is smaller than the distance between a pivot point of the lever and the plane defined by the leading edge. The lever may also have two ends, with the pivot point being intermediate the two ends.

In one embodiment, when the ink cartridge is viewed from the side where the engaging portion of the first restricting portion is on the right side and the ink supply structure faces downward, the engaging portion of the first restricting portion is on the lever when the cartridge is installed. One pivot point to the left.

In one embodiment, when the front surface or the first surface of the cartridge main body is viewed downward with the ink supply structure facing downward, at least a part of the engaging portion of the first restricting portion is located at substantially the widthwise center of the ink cartridge.

In a preferred embodiment, the plane defined by the leading edge is below the bottom or fourth surface square. In other embodiments, it is substantially flush with the bottom. In yet other embodiments, it may be recessed above the bottom or fourth surface.

In one embodiment, an ink supply system adapted to supply ink to an inkjet printing device is disclosed, wherein the inkjet printing device includes a plurality of device-side contact forming members. The ink supply system preferably includes: an ink chamber for storing ink; and an ink supply structure adapted and configured to supply ink from the ink chamber to the inkjet printing equipment. The ink supply structure has a leading edge defining an installation direction of a plane. The ink supply system preferably includes an electrical device. The ink supply system may also include a terminal bearing structure having one of a plurality of conductive terminals, the terminals being adapted and arranged on the terminal bearing structure to be at contact portions of the terminals when the ink supply system supplies ink to a printing device. Make contact with the contact forming member and receive elastic force from the contact forming member. The ink supply system may also include a first restricting portion adapted to engage with an engaging portion of a lever on a printing device to restrict the terminal bearing structure and the terminals thereon in a direction opposite to the installation direction Mobile. The engaging portion of the first restricting portion is preferably positioned adjacent to the terminal bearing structure. When the ink supply system supplies ink to the printing equipment, the terminals may be substantially disposed in a terminal plane that is neither parallel to nor perpendicular to a plane defined by the leading edge. Alternatively, the plane is determined by the terminal bearing structure, and / or the plane is defined by the terminals in contact with the respective structures on the printing device.

In one embodiment of the system, when the ink supply system supplies ink to the printing equipment, the terminal plane is between about 20 degrees and 50 degrees with the plane defined by the leading edge, preferably from about 25 degrees and 40 degrees. A corner between degrees.

In one embodiment of the system, when the ink supply system is in place to supply ink to the printing device, the engaging portion of the first restricting portion is located on the left side of the right edge of one of the rightmost terminals among the plurality of terminals and One of the plurality of terminals is to the right of the left edge of one of the leftmost terminals.

In one embodiment of the system, the terminals are adapted and configured in a terminal bearing It is structurally in contact with the contact forming member at the contact portion of the terminal and receives elastic force from the contact forming member. The contact portions are substantially arranged in a contact portion plane. When the ink supply system is in place to supply ink to the printing equipment, the engaging portion of the first restricting portion may be located to the left of the rightmost contact portion of the plurality of terminals and to the right of the leftmost contact portion of the plurality of terminals. . The contact portions may define a plane that forms an angle greater than 0 degrees and less than 90 degrees with the plane defined by the leading edge. When the ink supply system supplies ink to the printing equipment, the plane defined by the contact portion is preferably greater than 20 degrees and less than 50 degrees with the plane defined by the leading edge.

In one embodiment, the ink supply system also includes a main body including a front or first surface and a rear or second surface, the front or first surface and the rear or second surface being opposite to each other. The ink supply system may also include a restricting portion (referred to as a second restricting portion) close to the rear surface or the second surface of the main body, and the terminal bearing structure is close to the front surface or the first surface of the main body. The second limiting portion may include an engaging portion adapted and configured to engage a respective portion of an inkjet printing device. When measuring the distance in a direction orthogonal to one of the planes defined by the leading edge, the distance between the engaging portion of the second restricting portion and the plane defined by the leading edge is greater than the engaging portion of the first restricting portion and the leading edge. The distance between the planes.

In one embodiment, the second restricting portion may be close to the rear surface or the second surface of the main body, the terminal bearing structure is close to the first surface or the front surface of the main body, and the second restricting portion is adapted and configured to match the inkjet printing device One of the respective portions engages, wherein when the distance is measured in a direction orthogonal to one of the planes defined by the leading edge, the distance between the engaging portion of the second restricting portion and the plane defined by the leading edge is greater than the first restricting portion The distance between the engaging part and the plane defined by the leading edge.

In one embodiment, when the distance is measured in a direction orthogonal to one of the planes defined by the leading edge, when the ink supply system supplies the ink to the printing device, the engaging portion of the first restricting portion is defined by the leading edge. The distance between the planes is less than one of the pivot points of the lever and the front The distance between the planes defined by the edges.

In one embodiment, when the ink supply system supplies ink to the printing equipment, the engagement portion of the first restriction portion is on the right side and the ink supply structure faces downward, the engagement portion of the first restriction portion is at a pivot point of one of the levers. Left.

In one embodiment, the ink supply system includes a main body near the terminal carrying structure, and when the ink supply system supplies the ink to the printing equipment, at least a part of the engaging portion of the first restricting portion is located in the center of the width direction of the main body. Office.

In one embodiment, the ink supply system may include an adapter, wherein the ink supply structure, the terminal bearing structure, and the first restriction portion are positioned on the adapter and the ink chamber is adapted and configured to interface with the adapter. Device pairing. In another embodiment, the system may include an adapter, wherein the terminal bearing structure and the first limiting portion are positioned on the adapter, the ink supply structure is positioned on the ink chamber, and the ink chamber is adapted and configured to Pair with the adapter. Alternatively, the system may include an adapter, an ink tank outside the inkjet printing equipment, a tube, and an auxiliary adapter, wherein the ink supply structure is positioned on the auxiliary adapter, and the terminal bearing structure And the first restricting portion is positioned on the adapter, and the tube supplies the ink from the external storage tank to the auxiliary adapter when the ink supply system supplies the ink to the printing equipment.

In one embodiment, the ink supply system includes a main body including a top and a bottom, the top and the bottom being opposite to each other, wherein a plane defined by the leading edge is substantially flush with the bottom.

The present invention is not limited to the combination of the cartridge, ink cartridge and printing equipment or printing material supply system described above, but can be implemented in various other aspects, such as a liquid cartridge, a A liquid container, a printed material container, a box adapter, a circuit board, a printing device, a liquid ejection device, and a liquid supply system including a liquid ejection device and a liquid box. The present invention is not limited to the above aspects, but various changes and modifications can be made to these aspects without departing from the scope of the present invention. When proposing an ink cartridge in combination with a printing device and / or an inkjet printing device, it should be understood that the ink cartridge The system is attached or installed on the printing equipment.

10‧‧‧Printing material supply system

20‧‧‧ Cassette / Ink Cassette

20b‧‧‧box

20c‧‧‧Box

20d‧‧‧Box

20e‧‧‧Box

20f‧‧‧Box

20g‧‧‧Box

20h‧‧‧Box

20i‧‧‧Box

20j‧‧‧Box

20k‧‧‧box

20l‧‧‧box

20m‧‧‧box

22‧‧‧body / box body

22i‧‧‧shell

22j‧‧‧shell

22k‧‧‧shell

40‧‧‧Circuit Board

40c‧‧‧Circuit Board

40d‧‧‧Circuit Board

40e‧‧‧Circuit Board

40j‧‧‧Circuit Board

50‧‧‧Printing Machine / Printing Equipment / Inkjet Printing Equipment

70‧‧‧ Contact agency

70j‧‧‧Contact agency

80‧‧‧ Leverage

80a‧‧‧ Leverage

90‧‧‧ Printed Media

110p‧‧‧plane

200‧‧‧Ink Room

200i‧‧‧ container assembly

200j‧‧‧ container assembly

200k‧‧‧ container assembly

200L‧‧‧tube

200S‧‧‧Auxiliary adapter

200T‧‧‧External Storage Tank

201‧‧‧First wall / bottom / first side / bottom side / bottom wall / fourth surface

201i‧‧‧First side

201j‧‧‧First side

202‧‧‧Second wall / top / second side / third surface / top side / top wall

202i‧‧‧Second Side

202j‧‧‧Second Side

203‧‧‧third wall / front / third side / front wall / first surface

203i‧‧‧ Third Side

203j‧‧‧ third side

203P‧‧‧Midpoint

204‧‧‧ fourth wall / back / fourth face / rear wall / second surface

204i‧‧‧ Fourth side

204j‧‧‧ Fourth side

205‧‧‧Fifth wall / Fifth side / Left side / Left wall

206‧‧‧ Sixth Wall / Sixth Side / Right Side / Right

206i‧‧‧ sixth side

206j‧‧‧ sixth side

207‧‧‧Seventh Wall / Seventh Face / Step

207i‧‧‧ Seventh

207j‧‧ Seventh

208‧‧‧ Eighth Wall / Eighth Side

208i‧‧‧ Eighth

208j‧‧‧ Eighth

208T‧‧‧board mounting parts

209‧‧‧Connecting wall / connecting surface

210a‧‧‧The first box side restriction part

211‧‧‧First cassette side locking surface / First cassette side restricting portion / First cassette side restricting element

211a‧‧‧Slim Parts

212‧‧‧Part I / Meshing Part

213‧‧‧Second cassette side locking surface / second abutting portion

214‧‧‧Part Two

215‧‧‧Part III

220‧‧‧Second box side restriction part / second restriction element / second restriction part

222‧‧‧Limited locking surface / engaging part

224‧‧‧ beveled surface

226‧‧‧First restriction side

228‧‧‧ Second restriction side

250‧‧‧ The third box-side restriction element / a pair of protruding parts / restriction wall

250X‧‧‧The X-axis range of the third box-side limiting element

260‧‧‧ protrusion

265‧‧‧Corner section / outer surface

280‧‧‧Ink supply structure / Printing material supply structure

280k‧‧‧Ink supply structure

282‧‧‧Printing material flow path

284‧‧‧resin foam

288‧‧‧Leading edge / open surface

290‧‧‧first side / other side

291‧‧‧second side / side / crossing

295‧‧‧Crossing section / Crossing section / First crossing

299‧‧‧ adapter

299j‧‧‧Adapter

299k‧‧‧ adapter

400‧‧‧Box side terminal / terminal / conducting terminal

400P‧‧‧First Zone

400T‧‧‧Second Zone

401‧‧‧wheel groove

402‧‧‧Wheel Hub

405‧‧‧board end

408‧‧‧Terminal bearing structure / Slope terminal bearing structure

X-axis range of 408X‧‧‧ bevel terminal bearing structure

After 409‧‧‧

420‧‧‧Memory Unit

431‧‧‧contact part / attachment detection terminal / third terminal / terminal / box side terminal

431P‧‧‧third external part

432‧‧‧contact part / reset terminal / box-side terminal / terminal / memory terminal

433‧‧‧contact part / clock terminal / box side terminal / terminal / memory terminal

434‧‧‧contact part / attachment detection terminal / fourth terminal / box side terminal / terminal

434P‧‧‧ Fourth external part

435‧‧‧contact section / attachment detection terminal / first terminal / box side terminal / terminal / leftmost contact section

435P‧‧‧First external part

435PL‧‧‧First imaginary line / extension line

436‧‧‧contact part / power terminal / box-side terminal / memory terminal / terminal

437‧‧‧contact part / ground terminal / box-side ground terminal / memory terminal / terminal

438‧‧‧contact part / data terminal / box terminal / memory terminal / terminal

439‧‧‧contact part / attachment detection terminal / second terminal / box side terminal / terminal

439P‧‧‧Second External Part

439PL‧‧‧Second imaginary line / extension line

517‧‧‧flexible cable

520‧‧‧carriage

522‧‧‧carriage motor

524‧‧‧Drive Belt

532‧‧‧Feed motor

534‧‧‧ roller

540‧‧‧Print head

550‧‧‧ secondary control circuit

551‧‧‧Memory control circuit

552‧‧‧ attached detection circuit

570‧‧‧main control circuit

571‧‧‧Central Processing Unit

572‧‧‧Memory

580‧‧‧Power Circuit

581‧‧‧First Power

582‧‧‧Second Power Supply

590‧‧‧display panel

600‧‧‧ chamber forming wall parts

600C‧‧‧corner section / equipment side corner section

601‧‧‧Equipment-side bottom wall part / wall part / bottom wall part / chamber forming wall part

602‧‧‧ Concave Box Room

603‧‧‧The first equipment side wall member / wall member / chamber forming wall member

603t‧‧‧ protrusion

603W‧‧‧outer wall

604‧‧‧Second equipment side wall member / wall member / side wall member / chamber forming wall member

605‧‧‧Third equipment side wall member / wall member / chamber forming wall member

606‧‧‧ Fourth device side wall member / wall member / chamber forming wall member

607‧‧‧ dividing wall

620‧‧‧Restriction element / parts on the second device side

620L‧‧‧Second lock position

622‧‧‧Locking surface on the device side

624‧‧‧ + X-axis end

636‧‧‧Protrusion / Third Device Side Restriction Element

640‧‧‧Printing material supply tube

642‧‧‧peripheral end / connection end

644‧‧‧ porous filter

645‧‧‧ basal end

648‧‧‧Elastic parts

650‧‧‧First holder part

651‧‧‧Upright section

654‧‧‧bearing element

656‧‧‧Matching hole

658‧‧‧through hole

670‧‧‧space

680‧‧‧Second retainer part

681‧‧‧ upright section

682‧‧‧Elastic parts

684‧‧‧ blocking surface

686‧‧‧ meshing protrusion

688‧‧‧through hole

690‧‧‧ retainer

690a‧‧‧Retainer

700‧‧‧Equipment side terminal

708‧‧‧Slope surface of equipment side

709‧‧‧Terminal base

731‧‧‧Device-side contact forming part / device-side terminal / attachment detection terminal / contact forming part / third terminal

732‧‧‧‧Equipment-side contact forming part / device-side terminal / attachment detection terminal / contact forming part / reset terminal

733‧‧‧Device-side contact forming part / device-side terminal / attachment detection terminal / contact forming part / clock terminal

734‧‧‧Device-side contact forming part / device-side terminal / attachment detection terminal / contact forming part / fourth terminal

735‧‧‧Device-side contact forming part / device-side terminal / attachment detection terminal / contact forming part / first terminal

736‧‧‧Device-side contact forming part / device-side terminal / attachment detection terminal / contact forming part / power terminal

737‧‧‧Device-side contact forming part / ground terminal / device-side terminal / attachment detection terminal / contact forming part / device-side ground terminal

738‧‧‧Device-side contact forming part / device-side terminal / attachment detection terminal / contact forming part / data terminal

739‧‧‧Device-side contact forming part / device-side terminal / contact forming part / attachment detection terminal / second terminal

800c‧‧‧rotation axis / pivot center / pivot point

810‧‧‧Restriction element / engaging part on the first device side

810L‧‧‧Locked Position / First Locked Position

811‧‧‧First device-side locking surface / first device-side restricting element

811t‧‧‧first device side locking surface

813‧‧‧Second device side locking surface / second part / second device side restricting element

815‧‧‧groove

820‧‧‧Guide parts

821‧‧‧ Guide bottom wall

830‧‧‧operation parts

831‧‧‧ Opposite surface of operating parts

835‧‧‧Operating surface

850‧‧‧Shaft body

850a‧‧‧First shaft body / shaft body

850b‧‧‧Second shaft body / shaft body

852‧‧‧Inner curved surface / first curved surface / shaft body

854‧‧‧outer curved surface / second curved surface

856‧‧‧Radial side / face

858‧‧‧Radial side / face

860‧‧‧Guide wall

860a‧‧‧first guide wall / guide wall

860b‧‧‧Second guide wall / guide wall

870‧‧‧groove

880‧‧‧ behind the mesh

890‧‧‧arm parts

891‧‧‧outer surface / side

893‧‧‧outer surface / side

BP‧‧‧Plane

C‧‧‧center axis

cp‧‧‧contact

Dz‧‧‧distance

F10‧‧‧Arrow direction

F1r‧‧‧A vector component along the radial direction of arc RT1

F1t‧‧‧A vector component along the tangent direction of arc RT1

F2r‧‧‧A vector component along the radial direction of arc RT2

F2t‧‧‧A vector component along the tangent direction of arc RT2

F9‧‧‧Arrow direction

M‧‧‧rotation torque

Pr‧‧‧ Operating Force

Ps‧‧‧Pressing pressure

Pt‧‧‧Pressing pressure

R1‧‧‧First terminal row / lower line

R2‧‧‧Second terminal row / upper line

RD‧‧‧Direction opposite to installation direction

RST‧‧‧Reset signal

RT1‧‧‧arc

RT2‧‧‧arc

SCK‧‧‧Clock Signal

SD‧‧‧Installation direction

SDA‧‧‧Data Signal

TP‧‧‧Plane

VDD‧‧‧ supply voltage

VHV‧‧‧ Power supply voltage

VSS‧‧‧ ground voltage

Y22‧‧‧Arrow direction

Y27‧‧‧Arrow direction

Y32‧‧‧arrow direction

Yc‧‧‧plane

Yh‧‧‧ direction

YR1‧‧‧Arrow direction

YR2‧‧‧Arrow direction

YR3‧‧‧Arrow direction

Φ‧‧‧Tilt angle

The foregoing description of the invention and the following description of the embodiments will be better understood when read in conjunction with the accompanying drawings. The same component symbols in the drawings refer to the same components. For the purpose of illustrating the equipment of this application, certain embodiments are shown in the drawings. However, it should be understood that the present application is not limited to the precise configurations, structures, features, embodiments, aspects, and equipment shown, and the configurations, structures, features, embodiments, aspects, and equipment shown may be used alone or in combination Other configurations, structures, features, embodiments, aspects and equipment are used.

The drawings are not necessarily drawn to scale and are not intended to limit the scope of the invention in any way, but are only intended to illustrate a single illustrated embodiment of the invention. In the drawings: FIG. 1 is a perspective view illustrating a configuration of a printing material supply system; FIG. 2 is a perspective view illustrating a holder to which one of the holders is attached; FIG. 3 is a schematic view illustrating A perspective view of one of the holders to which the cartridge is attached; FIG. 4 is a top view illustrating one of the holders to which the cartridge is attached; FIG. 5A is a view taken on line F4-F4 in FIG. 4 A cross-sectional view; FIG. 5B is a cross-sectional view illustrating the attachment of a box to one of its holders; FIGS. 6A and 6B show how to apply a force from the box to a lever; A perspective view; FIG. 8 is a bottom view of one of the boxes; FIG. 9A is a cross-sectional view taken on line F8-F8 in FIG. 8; and FIG. 9B shows the box and the lever when the box is in its installed position A view; FIGS. 10A and 10B illustrate the detailed structure of a circuit board; FIG. 11 is a rear view of one of the boxes; FIG. 12 is a front view of one of the boxes; FIG. 13 is a left side view of one of the boxes; A perspective view illustrating the structure of the holder; FIG. 15 is a perspective view illustrating a structure of the holder; FIG. 16 is a plan view illustrating a structure of the holder; FIG. 17 is a cross-sectional view taken on line F16-F16 in FIG. 16; and FIG. 18 is a contact A perspective view of one of the mechanisms; FIG. 19 is a perspective view illustrating the appearance of a lever; FIG. 20 illustrates a cross-section of a shaft main body of the lever taken on a plane parallel to the X axis and the Z axis; FIG. 21 Figure 22 is a sectional view of a lever; Figure 22 is an exploded perspective view of a retainer and a perspective view of a lever; Figure 23 is a sectional view showing a peripheral structure of the lever in a state where one of the box and the holder is attached; 24 shows the procedure for attachment of the cassette to the holder; FIG. 25 shows the procedure for attachment of the cassette to the holder; FIG. 26 shows the procedure for attachment of the cassette to the holder; FIG. 27A shows Procedure for attachment of the case to the holder; FIG. 27B is a close-up view of one of the cases attached to the holder; FIG. 27C is a close-up view of one of the cases attached to the holder; FIG. 28 is a diagrammatic illustration A block diagram of the electrical structure; Figure 29 illustrates the circuit board and an attachment detection Figure 30 shows the external force applied to the box in the attached state; Figure 31 shows the fine adjustment of the direction of a beveled surface; Figures 32A to 32F show an example of an advantageous effect; Figures 33 illustrates a printing press according to a second embodiment; FIG. 34 is a perspective view illustrating the appearance of a case according to a third embodiment; FIGS. 35A to 35J are views showing a case according to other embodiments The concept of external shapes Figure 36 is a perspective view illustrating a structure of a box having an adapter according to one embodiment; Figure 37A is a view illustrating a structure of a box having an adapter according to another embodiment A perspective view; FIG. 37B is a perspective view showing a box composed of an adapter and a container assembly; FIG. 38 is a diagram illustrating a structure of a box having an adapter according to another embodiment A perspective view; Figures 39A and 39B illustrate the structure of a lever according to a modification; Figure 40 illustrates the attachment of a cassette to a holder according to a modification; Figures 41A to 41C show modifications to the shape of the terminal Figure 42A is a graph showing the relationship between the wiping amount of a board terminal and the tilt angle Φ of a board; Figure 42B shows the wiping amount of a board terminal; Figure 43A shows the upward force of a ground terminal on the equipment side tilting to a board Fig. 43B shows the upward force of the ground terminal on the equipment side; Fig. 44 is a diagram showing another relationship between the wiping amount of the terminal on the board and the tilt angle Φ of a board; and Fig. 45 shows the equipment side The upward force of the ground terminal on the inclination angle of a plate Φ One chart a relationship.

In order to further clarify the configuration and operation of the present invention, some embodiments of the present invention are described below with reference to the drawings.

A. First embodiment

A-1. General configuration of printing material supply system

FIG. 1 is a perspective view illustrating a configuration of a printing material supply system 10. XYZ axes orthogonal to each other are shown in FIG. 1. The XYZ axis in FIG. 1 corresponds to the XYZ axis in other drawings. In subsequent drawings, the XYZ axis is shown when needed. The printing material supply system 10 includes a magazine 20 and a printing machine 50 serving as a printing device. In the printed material supply system 10, the magazine 20 is removably attached to a holder 60 of the printing press 50 by a user.

Each of the cartridges 20 in the printing material supply system 10 contains ink as a printing material. The ink contained in the cartridge 20 as a printing material is supplied to a printing head 540 through an ink supply structure and a printing material supply pipe (described later). According to this embodiment, the plurality of cassettes 20 are removably attached to the holder 60 of the printing press 50. More specifically, six cartridges 20 each containing six inks of different colors (ie, black, yellow, magenta, light magenta, cyan, light cyan) are attached to the holder 60. Those skilled in the art will understand that, although the descriptions herein refer to inks, it is conceivable that any substance used for printing can be used as described in more detail in conjunction with the disclosed cartridges, combinations, and / or supply systems, and the present invention is not Should be limited to this.

According to other embodiments, the number of cassettes attached to the holder 60 is not limited to six, but may be greater than six or less than six. According to other embodiments, the number of different color inks is not limited to six colors but may be greater than six colors or less than six colors. According to other embodiments, two or more cassettes 20 attached to the holder 60 may contain one ink of the same color. The detailed structure of the case 20 and the holder 60 will be described later.

The printing machine 50 of the printing material supply system 10 shown in FIG. 1 is a compact inkjet printer for personal use. In addition to the holder 60, the printer 50 also has a controller 510 and a bracket 520 including the holder 60. The carriage 520 also includes a print head 540. The printing machine 50 supplies ink from a cartridge 20 attached to the holder 60 to a printing head 540 through a printing material supply tube (explained later), and ejects ink from the printing head 540 to a printing medium 90 such as a printing sheet or Labels) to print information such as strings, numbers, and images on On the print medium 90. Although an inkjet printer has been described, those skilled in the art will understand the applicability of the invention to other printer types and printing material supply systems described in more detail below, and the invention should not be limited to this.

The controller 510 of the printing press 50 is used to control the operation of each part of the printing press 50. A carriage 520 of the printing press 50 is configured to scan the print head 540 back and forth across the printing medium 90. The print head 540 of the printing press 50 has an ink ejection mechanism configured to eject ink from the cartridge 20 attached to the holder 60 onto the printing medium 90. The controller 510 and the bracket 520 are electrically connected via a flexible cable 517. The ink ejection mechanism of the print head 540 is operated by a control signal from the controller 510.

According to this embodiment, the carriage 520 has a print head 540 and a holder 60. Such a printer 50 having a cassette 20 attached to a holder 60 on a carriage 520 for moving the print head 540 is referred to as a "on-carriage" printer. According to another embodiment, a stationary holder 60 may be provided at a position different from the bracket 520, and ink may be self-attached to each of the cases 20 of the stationary holder 60 through a flexible tube. The print head 540 is supplied to the carriage 520. This type of printer is called a "carriage-out" printer.

According to this embodiment, the printing press 50 has a main scanning feeding mechanism and a pair of scanning feeding mechanisms to move the carriage 520 and the printing medium 90 relative to each other and perform printing on the printing medium 90. The main scanning feed mechanism of the printing press 50 includes a carriage motor 522 and a driving belt 524, and is used to transmit the power of the carriage motor 522 to the carriage 520 by the driving belt 524 to reciprocate the carriage in a main scanning direction. 520. The sub-scanning feeding mechanism of the printing machine 50 includes a feeding motor 532 and a cylinder 534 and is used to transmit the power of the feeding motor 532 to the cylinder 534 to feed the printing medium 90 in a sub-scanning direction orthogonal to the main scanning direction. The carriage motor 522 of the main scan feed mechanism and the feed motor 532 of the sub scan feed mechanism are operated by a control signal from the controller 510.

According to this embodiment, when the printing material supply system 10 is oriented in a direction generally used for use, the X-axis represents the direction along the sub-scanning direction (front-back direction) through which the printing medium 90 is fed. axis. The Y-axis represents the axis of the main scanning direction (left-right or lateral direction when the system 10 is viewed from the front) by reciprocating the carriage 520. The Z axis represents an axis in the direction of gravity (vertical direction). The use state of the printing material supply system 10 means a state of the printing material supply system 10 placed on a horizontal plane. In this embodiment, the horizontal plane is a plane parallel to the X-axis and the Y-axis (ie, the XY plane).

According to this embodiment, the + X-axis direction indicates the sub-scanning direction (forward direction), the -X-axis direction indicates the reverse direction (backward direction), and the + Z-axis direction indicates self-printing in the direction opposite to the direction of gravity (upward direction) The direction from the bottom to the top of the material supply system 10, and the -Z axis direction indicates the direction opposite to the + Z axis, that is, the direction of gravity (downward direction). In this embodiment, the + Z-axis direction side (front side) is the front surface of the printing material supply system 10. According to this embodiment, the + Y axis direction indicates a direction (leftward direction) from the right side surface to the left side surface of the printing material supply system 10, and the -Y axis direction indicates the opposite direction (rightward direction). In this embodiment, a plurality of cassettes 20 attached to the holder 60 are arrayed in a direction along a Y-axis (left-right or lateral direction) called a “Y-axis direction”. Similarly, the directions along the X-axis (front-rear direction) and the directions along the Z-axis (vertical direction) are referred to as "X-axis direction" and "Z-axis direction".

A-2. Structure for attaching the case 20 to the holder 60

2 and 3 are perspective views illustrating a holder 60 having a case 20 attached thereto. FIG. 4 illustrates a top view of one of the holders 60 with the cassette 20 attached thereto. In the state illustrated in FIGS. 2 to 4, one cassette 20 is correctly attached at one of the designed attachment positions of the holder 60. The state of "correctly attached at a designed attachment position" and an "installed" position means that the case 20 is attached (or in other words, installed) such that the case-side terminals are located separately from the printing machine 50. A contact mechanism (explained later) is included at a position where the corresponding device-side terminal contacts.

As shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, the holder 60 of the printing press 50 has five wall members 601, 603, 604, 605, and 606. A recess formed by the five wall members is used as a box chamber or a box mounting structure 602. The box chamber 602 is separated into a plurality of slots by a partition wall 607 (Installation space) to receive each cassette 20. The partition wall 607 is used as a guide to insert the box body 20 into each slot, but it may be omitted as appropriate. Each slot has a printing material supply tube 640, a contact mechanism 70, a lever 80, a second equipment-side restricting element 620, and a protrusion 636 serving as a third equipment-side restricting element. One side (+ Z-axis-direction side, top surface) of each slot is open, and the box body 20 is attached to the holder 60 and detached from the holder 60 through the open side (open top surface).

The cassette body 20 is attached to the holder 60 in a state where the cassette body 20 is locked by the lever 80 and the second device-side restriction member 620 and the ink supply structure (described later) is connected to the printing material supply pipe 640. This state is referred to as the "attached state of the case 20 to the holder 60", and is simply referred to as the "attached" state or, alternatively, the "installed" state. The ink supply structure connecting the printing material supply pipe 640 and the cartridge 20 enables ink to be supplied to the print head 540 as the printing material contained in the cartridge 20 (FIG. 1). The printing material supply pipe 640 has a peripheral end 642 (also referred to as a "connection end") on the + Z-axis direction side and a base end 645 on the -Z-axis connection side. The base end 645 is provided on the bottom wall member 601, and the peripheral end 642 is connected to the ink supply structure of the cartridge 20. The printing material supply pipe 640 has a central axis C parallel to one of the Z axes. The direction from the base end 645 to the peripheral end 642 along the central axis C is the + Z axis direction.

As shown in FIG. 2, an elastic member 648 is provided around the printing material supply pipe 640 to seal the periphery of the ink supply structure of the cartridge 20 in the attached state to prevent ink from leaking from the ink supply structure to the periphery. In the attached state, the elastic member 648 applies a pressing force including one of the + Z-axis direction components to the case 20.

In the attached (installed) state, electrical connections are provided between the terminals on a circuit board (explained later) of the box 20 and the terminals of the contact mechanism 70 in each slot of the holder 60 Various information is allowed to be transmitted between the case 20 and the printing machine 50.

5A is a cross-sectional view taken on line F4-F4 of FIG. 4. The projection 636 is omitted from this illustration. The printing material supply pipe 640 of the printer 50 is connected to one of the ink supply structures 280 of the cartridge 20 so that ink is supplied from the cartridge 20 to the cartridge 20 via a printing material flow path 282. Print head 540 (Figure 1).

According to this embodiment, a porous filter 644 for filtering the ink supplied from the cartridge 20 is provided at the peripheral end 642 of the printing material supply pipe 640. The porous filter 644 may be made of, for example, a stainless steel mesh or a stainless steel fabric. According to another embodiment, the porous filter may not be located at the peripheral end 642 of the printing material supply pipe 640.

The contact mechanism 70 of the printing machine 50 is located on the + X-axis direction side of the printing material supply pipe 640 and is configured to be electrically connectable with a terminal provided on a circuit board 40 of the case 20. In the attached state of the case 20, a pressing force Pt including one of the + Z-axis direction vector components is applied from the terminals of the contact mechanism 70 to the circuit board 40. In the attached state of the cartridge body 20, a pressing force Ps in one of the + Z-axis directions is applied from the elastic member 648 to the ink supply structure 280.

One of the levers 80 for attachment and detachment of the box body 20 has an operating member 830 at an end in the + Z axis direction and an engaging portion 810 at an end in the -Z axis direction. The first device-side restricting element or engaging portion 810 (more specifically, its first device-side locking surface to be described later) is configured to be in a state of attachment with a first locked position 810L and a first The box-side restricting portion 210 is engaged. The first locking position 810L is located on the + Z-axis direction side and the + X-axis direction side of the contact between the terminal provided on the circuit board 40 and the contact mechanism 70. The engaging portion 810 is engaged with the first case-side restricting portion 210 to restrict the movement of the case 20 in the + Z-axis direction.

The lever 80 pivots around a shaft 800c at a position between the operation member 830 and the engaging portion 810. The rotation axis 800c of the lever 80 is located on the + Z-axis direction side and the + X-axis direction side of the first lock position 810L.

The user uses the operating member 830 of the lever 80 to remove the cassette 20 from the holder 60. To remove the box 20, the user presses the operation member 830 in the -X axis direction. This pressing applies a force Pr (referred to as "operation force Pr") to the operation member 830 from the + X-axis direction side toward the -X-axis direction side. This operating force Pr rotates the lever 80 about the axis 800c and moves the engaging portion 810 from the first lock position 810L in the + X-axis direction. This releases the first case-side restricting portion 210 and engages The engagement of the portion 810 enables removal of the cassette 20 from the holder 60.

The second device-side restricting element 620 is provided on the side wall member 604 and is configured to engage with a second box-side restricting portion 220 at a second locking position 620L. According to this embodiment, the second device-side restricting element 620 is a through hole formed in the side wall member 604 of the holder 60. The second lock position 620L is located on the + Z-axis direction side and the -X-axis direction side of the printing material supply pipe 640. The second device-side restricting element 620 is engaged with the second case-side restricting portion 220 (which may also be referred to as the second restricting element 220) to restrict the movement of the case 20 in the + Z axis direction. As described above, the movement of the box body 20 in the + Z-axis direction in the attached state is restricted by both its + X-axis direction end and its -X-axis direction end.

The second locking position 620L (where the second box-side restricting portion 220 is in contact with the second device-side restricting element 620) serves as a pivot point around which the box 20 is rotated to attach the box to the holder 60 And the self-retaining device 60 is disassembled. In other words, the box body 20 is rotated about the second locking position 620L along a plane parallel to the Z-axis and the X-axis for attachment or detachment. The second case-side restricting element 220 and the second device-side restricting element 620 are correspondingly used as the pivot points of the case 20 for attachment or detachment of the case 20. The attachment of the box 20 to the holder 60 and the removal of the holder 20 from the holder 60 will be described in detail later.

As shown in FIG. 5A, in the attached state, the first lock position 810L is located on the -Z axis direction side at a distance Dz from the second lock position 620L. This reduces the possibility of disengaging the first case-side restricting portion 210 from the engaging portion 810 by the pressing forces Ps and Pt applied to the case 20 by the holder 60. The box 20 can thus be stably held at the designed attachment position.

6A and 6B illustrate the force applied from the case 20 to the lever 80 at the first locked position 810L. In the state of FIG. 6A in which the first locking position 810L is located on the -Z axis direction side of the second locking position 620L, a force F1 is applied from the case 20 to the lever 80 at the first locking position 810L. In a state in which the first lock position 810L is located on the + Z axis direction side of the second lock position 620L, FIG. 6B, a force F2 is applied from the case 20 to the lever 80 at the first lock position 810L. The force F1 shown in Figure 6A and the force F2 shown in Figure 6B Have the same magnitude.

6A and 6B schematically show the positional relationship between the first locking position 810L, the second locking position 620L, and the rotation axis 800c (also referred to as "the pivot center 800c") on the X axis and the Z axis. . The difference between the two positional relationships shown in FIGS. 6A and 6B is the difference between the second lock position 620L on the Z axis. An arc RT1 shown in FIG. 6A and FIG. 6B shows the rotation track of the first locked position 810L about the rotation axis 800c. An arc RT2 shown in FIGS. 6A and 6B shows a rotation track of the first locked position 810L around the second locked position 620L.

In the example illustrated in FIG. 6A, the first lock position 810L is located on the -Z axis direction side of the second lock position 620L, so the force F1 applied at the first lock position 810L in the tangential direction of the arc RT2 has a + X-axis direction vector component and ++ Z-axis direction vector component. The force F1 is correspondingly decomposed into a vector component F1t along the tangential direction of the arc RT1 and a vector component F1r along the radial direction of the arc RT1.

In the example illustrated in FIG. 6B, the first lock position 810L is located on the + Z-axis direction side of the second lock position 620L, so the force F2 applied at the first lock position 810L in the tangential direction of the arc RT2 has a − X-axis direction vector component and ++ Z-axis direction vector component. The force F2 is correspondingly decomposed into a vector component F2t along the tangential direction of the arc RT1 and a vector component F2r along the radial direction of the arc RT1.

As clearly understood from the comparison between FIG. 6A and FIG. 6B, when the magnitude of the force F1 is equal to the magnitude of the force F2 (F1 = F2), the first locking position 810L, the second locking position 620L, and the rotation shaft 800c The positional relationship between them results in "F1t <F2t" for the vector component along the tangential direction of the arc RT1, and "F1r> F2r" for the vector component along the radial direction of the arc RT1. Compared with the state illustrated in FIG. 6B, the state in FIG. 6A has a larger force vector component from the box 20 toward the rotation axis 800c of the lever 80, and in a clockwise direction about the rotation axis 800c (i.e., as from + Y-axis direction view) A smaller force vector component in one of the directions of turning the lever 80. In other words, compared to positioning the first lock position 810L on the + Z axis direction side of the second lock position 620L, the first lock position 810L is located on the second lock On the -Z axis direction side of the position 620L, the possibility that the first box-side restricting portion 210 is disengaged from the engaging portion 810 is more effectively reduced. In either state, there is no force acting in the + X axis direction to release the engagement at the first locked position 810L, so both states provide a benefit to reduce the first box-side restriction portion 210 will become The possibility of disengagement from the engaging portion 810.

A-3. Detailed structure of the box

FIG. 7 is a perspective view illustrating the structure of the cassette 20 as an example of a cassette according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 8 is a bottom view of one of the casings 20. FIG. 9A is a cross-sectional view taken on line F8-F8 in FIG. 8. FIG. 10A and 10B illustrate a detailed structure of the circuit board 40. FIG. 10A is a view of a circuit board 40 viewed from a direction indicated by an arrow F9 in FIG. 9A, and FIG. 10B is a view of a circuit board 40 viewed from an arrow F10 in FIG. 10A. According to this embodiment, the X-axis, Y-axis, and Z-axis indicate the axes on the case 20 in the attached state. The + X-axis side in the attached state is the front face of the box body 20. A plane Yc shown in FIG. 8 is a plane that passes through the center of the width of the box 20 or the length in the Y-axis direction and is parallel to the Z-axis and the X-axis (ie, the ZX plane). A plane CX shown in FIG. 8 is a plane that passes through the central axis C and is parallel to the Z axis and the X axis (that is, the ZX plane).

As shown in FIG. 7, the cartridge 20 includes an ink chamber 200 containing ink, a casing 22, an ink supply structure 280, a circuit board 40, and a first cartridge-side restricting portion 210. The box body 20 is attached to the holder 60 along a mounting direction SD, which is the -Z axis direction (in this embodiment, the vertical downward direction). The particular orientation or posture of the cassette 20 is usually not constant during the actual insertion of the cassette 20 into the holder 60. During the attachment process of the box body 20 to the holder 60, the box body 20 may be inclined with respect to the Z axis. However, in the state immediately before the attachment and in the attached state, the ink supply structure 280 receives the printing material supply tube 640 having the central axis C parallel to the Z axis, so that the special orientation of the cartridge 20 is controlled by The printing material supply tube 640 is restricted, and is thus substantially aligned in the Z-axis direction. For this reason, and because the box 20 is generally moved in the -Z axis direction when it is mounted in the holder 60, the -Z axis can be set The direction is regarded as the installation direction of the box body 20. For the same reason, the + Z axis direction can be regarded as a removal direction RD in which one of the cassettes 20 is removed from the holder 60 (FIG. 9B). Since the -Z axis direction is opposite to the + Z axis direction, the mounting direction SD and the removal direction RD can be regarded as opposite directions.

The casing 22 (also referred to as the “casing main body 22”) defines an internal space of one of the ink chambers 200 including the casing 20. The housing 22 also forms at least a portion of the outer wall surface of the box 20, and may be made of a synthetic resin such as polypropylene (PP). The box body 20 is in the shape of a rectangular prism having one of the congruent sides, or in the shape of an approximately rectangular parallelepiped. A part of the case 22 may be made of a resin film.

The box 20 has a length (length in the X-axis direction), a width (length in the Y-axis direction), and a height (length in the Z-axis direction), wherein the length, height, and width decrease in this order. However, the magnitude, width, and height of the box 20 are not limited to this order, but can be determined arbitrarily; for example, the order of height, length, and width can be decreased, or the height, length, and width can be equal to each other .

The housing 22 of the box body 20 includes a first wall or a bottom 201, a second wall or a top 202, a third wall or a front 203, a fourth wall or a rear 204, a fifth wall 205, A sixth wall 206 and a connecting wall 209. The connecting wall 209 includes a seventh wall 207 and an eighth wall 208 (FIG. 9A). The first to eighth walls 201 to 208 define an internal space of the ink chamber 200 including the case 20. In the following description, the symbols 201 to 208 assigned to the first to eighth walls are also used to indicate the outer surfaces of the walls constituting the case 22 of the case 20 (ie, the first surface 201 to the eighth surface 208). ). The outer surfaces 201 to 208 (first to eighth surfaces) of the first to eighth walls are substantially plane. By "substantial plane" it is meant not only a fairly flat surface, but also a plane with some slight irregularities. In other words, the “substantial plane” includes a plane having a part of a slight irregularity but still recognizable as a surface or a wall of the casing 22 of the box 20. The first to eighth surfaces 201 to 208 are rectangular in plan view.

First surface (first wall) 201, second surface (second wall) 202, third surface (third wall) 203, The fourth face (fourth wall) 204, the fifth face (fifth wall) 205, and the sixth face (sixth wall) 206 are also referred to as the bottom face (bottom wall) 201, the top face (top wall) 202, and the front face, respectively. (Front wall) 203, rear (rear wall) 204, left side (left wall) 205, and right side (right wall) 206. The external surfaces of these walls can also be referred to as front 203, back 204, top 202 and bottom 201, or first to fourth surfaces, where the first surface refers to the front 203, the second surface refers to the back 204, the The three surfaces are referred to as the top 202 and the fourth surface is referred to as the bottom 201.

The first surface 201 and the second surface 202 face each other in the Z-axis direction. The first surface 201 is located on the -Z axis direction side, and the second surface 202 is located on the + Z axis direction side. The third surface 203 and the fourth surface 204 face each other in the X-axis direction. The third surface 203 is located on the + X-axis direction side, and the fourth surface 204 is located on the -X-axis direction side. The fifth surface 205 and the sixth surface 206 are opposed to each other in the Y-axis direction. The fifth surface 205 is located on the + Y-axis direction side, and the sixth surface 206 is located on the -Y-axis direction side.

According to this embodiment, the first surface 201 on the -Z axis direction side in the attached state forms a bottom surface. The first surface 201 is an XY plane parallel to the X and Y axes and perpendicular to the Z axis. The first surface 201 is a horizontal plane in the attached state.

The second surface 202 on the + Z-axis direction side in the attached state forms a top surface. The second surface 202 is opposite to and parallel to the first surface 201. The second surface 202 is a plane (XY plane) parallel to the X and Y axes and perpendicular to the Z axis. The second face 202 is a horizontal plane in the attached state.

The third surface 203 on the + X-axis direction side in the attached state forms a side surface. The third surface 203 is perpendicular to the first surface 201 and the second surface 202, and is a plane (YZ plane) parallel to the Y and Z axes and perpendicular to the X axis. Among the sides of the third surface 203, one side 290 located on the most -Z axis direction side is referred to as "first side 290", and one side 291 located on the most + Z axis direction side is referred to as "second side 291" ". In its description, the expression "two faces crossing or crossing each other" means not only a state where the two faces actually cross each other, but also a state where one of the faces extends across the other face and the two faces The state of extension of each other.

The fourth surface 204 on the -X axis direction side in the attached or installed state forms a side surface. The fourth surface 204 is perpendicular to the first surface 201 and the second surface 202. The fourth surface 204 is parallel to the third surface 203. The fourth surface 204 is a plane (YZ plane) parallel to the Y and Z axes and perpendicular to the X axis.

The fifth surface 205 on the + Y-axis direction side and the sixth surface 206 on the -Y-axis direction side form a side surface in the attached state. The fifth surface 205 and the sixth surface 206 are perpendicular to the first surface 201 to the fourth surface 204. The fifth surface 205 and the sixth surface 206 are planes (XZ planes) parallel to the X and Z axes and perpendicular to the Y axis. The sixth surface 206 is parallel to the fifth surface 205.

As shown in FIG. 9A, the connection surface 209 couples the first surface 201 and the third surface 203. The seventh surface 207 of the connection surface 209 is perpendicular to the first surface 201 and is parallel to a plane (YZ plane) of the Y axis and the Z axis. The seventh surface 207 is perpendicular to the first surface 201 and is also called a "step". In other words, the seventh surface 207 extends from the first surface 201 in the + Z axis direction. The seventh surface 207 is located on the −X-axis direction side and the −Z-axis direction side of the eighth surface 208. The eighth surface 208 couples the seventh surface 207 with the third surface 203. The eighth surface 208 is an inclined surface inclined along a direction including a + X-axis direction vector component and a -Z-axis direction vector component. The eighth surface 208 is inclined to the first surface 201 and the third surface 203. The eighth surface 208 is perpendicular to the fifth surface 205 and the sixth surface 206. In other words, the eighth surface 208 is inclined to the XY plane and the YZ plane and is perpendicular to the XZ plane. The eighth surface 208 has a plate mounting member 208T protruding outward from the eighth surface 208.

The relationship between the first surface 201 to the sixth surface 206 indicates that the facing direction of the first surface 201 and the second surface 202 is the Z axis direction, the facing directions of the third surface 203 and the fourth surface 204 are the X axis direction, and the fifth surface 205 The direction of the sixth surface 206 is the Y-axis direction.

As shown in FIG. 7, the circuit board 40 is preferably mounted on the board mounting member 208T of the eighth surface 208. The circuit board 40 has a terminal bearing structure 408 inclined along a direction (for example, the eighth surface 208) including a vector component in the + X-axis direction and a vector component in the -Z-axis direction. In this embodiment, the terminal carrying structure 408 includes a surface of the circuit board 40. The terminal carrying structure 408 is inclined to the first surface 201 and the third surface 203. The terminal carrying structure 408 is perpendicular to the fifth surface 205 and the sixth surface 206. In other words, the terminal carrying structure 408 is inclined to the XY plane and the YZ plane and is perpendicular to the XZ plane. The terminal bearing structure 408 is also referred to as a "slope terminal bearing structure" or "slope surface". Thus, in this embodiment, the surface of the circuit board can be regarded as a “sloping surface”. The terminal carrying structure 408 has a box-side terminal 400 (FIG. 2) that is in contact with the device-side terminal of the contact mechanism 70. The inclination angle is preferably between 0 and 90 degrees, more preferably between 20 and 50 degrees, and most preferably between about 25 and 40 degrees.

42A and 42B show the relationship between the wiping amount of a terminal on the circuit board 40 by a device-side terminal and an inclination angle Φ of the circuit board 40. The inclination angle Φ of the circuit board 40 represents an angle between a plane 110 p extending from the front edge of the ink supply structure 280 in the mounting direction and a plane in which the terminal 400 of the circuit board 40 is arranged. The plane defined by the terminal 400 is neither perpendicular nor parallel to the plane 110p. The inclination angle Φ is usually an acute angle (less than 90 degrees). In this embodiment, the plane 110 p extending from the front edge of the mounting direction is parallel to the bottom surface 201 of the box body 20. Moreover, the plane in which the terminals 400 are arranged is parallel to the board surface of the circuit board 40. Accordingly, in this embodiment, the inclination angle Φ is equal to the angle between the bottom surface 201 of the box body 20 and the board surface of the circuit board 40. In this embodiment, the circuit board 40 is about 0.7 mm thick. The terminal 400 is about 5 micrometers thick and is provided on the circuit board 40. The thickness of the terminal 400 is as small as a negligible degree, so the surface of the circuit board 40 (including the surface of the terminal 400) is substantially flush. Therefore, the terminal carrying structure 408 (in this embodiment, which includes the surface of the circuit board 40) is located in a terminal (contact portion) plane TP that is substantially to be described later. Even if the circuit board 40 is not present, there will only be unevenness equivalent to the thickness of the terminal 400. Therefore, for simplicity, the terminal carrying structure 408 may be used interchangeably with "a plane defined by the terminal" or "terminal plane". When referring to the contact portions cp of the terminals 431 to 439 in conjunction with the terminal bearing structure 408, the terms "plane defined by the contact portion" or "plane of the contact portion" may also be used interchangeably. In the process of attaching or installing the case 20, as shown in FIGS. 24 to 27A, the front surface 203 (first surface) of the case 20 follows slightly on the rear surface 204 (second surface) of the case 20 The pivot rotates and descends. During this process, the circuit board 40 is slightly rotated and 709 makes contact with the device-side contact forming members (device-side terminals) 731 to 739 so that the respective box-side terminals 431 to 439 are wiped by the device-side contact forming members 731 to 739. Wiping the terminals on the circuit board 40 by the corresponding device-side terminals correctly removes the dust or oxides on the surface of the terminals coated on the circuit board 40 to enhance the conductivity (electrical connection).

The curve of FIG. 42A shows that the wipe length (wiping amount) of the terminal on the circuit board 40 by the corresponding device-side contact forming member is used as the vertical coordinate, and the board inclination angle Φ is used as the horizontal coordinate. The calculation is based on the assumption that the distance L0 from the second surface (rear) 204 of the case 20 to the contact portion of the ground terminal 437 in contact with the corresponding equipment-side ground terminal 737 in the X direction is 63 mm. Generally speaking, a large plate inclination angle Φ causes the surface of the plate to be closer to the vertical plane and increases the amount of wiping. In order to sufficiently remove dust or oxides on the surface of the terminals coated on the circuit board 40, the amount of wiping is preferably not less than 1 mm. According to the graph of FIG. 42A, the plate inclination angle Φ is preferably not less than 25 degrees to ensure that the wiping amount is not less than 1 mm.

FIG. 43A shows the relationship between the upward force F of the ground terminal 737 on the equipment side and the plate inclination angle Φ when the half-insertion of the box is prevented. As shown in the calculation of FIG. 42A, the calculation of FIG. 43A is also based on the assumption that the distance L0 is equal to 63 mm. The weight of the box (including the weight of the ink) is assumed to be 30 grams. This value is the standard weight of a cartridge for home-use inkjet printing equipment. The "half insertion of the box" indicates a state in which the engaging portion 810 of the lever 80 is located right next to the elastic member 682 (shown in FIG. 25), that is, a state just before the full engagement. This half-inserted state is also called "semi-engaged". In this half-engaged state, only the equipment-side ground terminal 737 among the plurality of equipment-side contact forming members 731 to 739 will apply an upward force to the circuit board 40. It should be noted that in the printing apparatus shown in FIG. 1, the holder 60 does not have a cover. When the user releases his or her hand in this half-engaged state, the box body 20 can remain in this half-engaged state. The curve of FIG. 43A shows the calculation result of the upward force of the equipment-side ground terminal 737 to prevent the half insertion of the case 20. FIG. 43B shows the relationship between the upward force F and the plate inclination angle Φ.

The upward force of the equipment-side ground terminal 737 is one of the forces applied from the equipment-side ground terminal 737 to the circuit board 40 (and the case 20) in the half-engaged state of FIG. 26 + the vector component in the Z direction (in In this embodiment, the vector component is raised vertically). When the ground terminal 437 of the circuit board 40 is pressed against the equipment-side ground terminal 737, the pressing force of the equipment-side ground terminal 737 is applied to the ground terminal 437 in one of the directions perpendicular to the board surface of the circuit board 40. . The calculation of the upward force in FIG. 43A is based on the following assumption: the pressing force F0 of the ground terminal 737 on the equipment side is 0.2N in a direction perpendicular to the surface of the board. Since the upward force F (= F0 × cosΦ) is the vector component of the + Z direction of the pressing force F0, F = F0 = 0.2N remains unchanged when the plate tilt angle Φ = 0 degrees, as shown by the dotted line in FIG. 43B. The upward force F varies with the plate inclination angle × and changes according to the curve F = F0ΦcosΦ. The curve of FIG. 43A is a curve F = F0 × cosΦ. As one of the plate tilt angles Φ increases (Φ approaches 90 degrees), the surface of the plate approaches the XZ plane and decreases the upward force F. One upward force FB which is balanced with the box 20 having a distance L0 of 63 mm and a weight of 30 grams is approximately 0.15 N (the position of the horizontal solid line in FIG. 43A). This means that an upward force of not less than 0.15N causes the device-side ground terminal 737 to press the case body 20 vertically upward. To ensure that the upward force is not less than 0.15N, the inclination angle Φ of the plate is preferably not more than 40 degrees, as clearly understood from FIG. 43A.

When the user releases his or her hand in the half-engaged state in FIG. 26, the case 20 can be maintained in the half-engaged state. However, in the case where the plate inclination angle Φ is set to not more than 40 degrees (as shown in FIG. 43A), when the user releases his or her hand in the half-engaged state, the device-side ground terminal 737 is in the + Z direction (upward) (Direction) Press the front surface 203 of the case 20. This significantly detaches the case from the engaging portion 810 of the lever 80 and facilitates the user to find the failed attachment. In this connection, it is preferable to set the plate inclination angle Φ to not more than 40 degrees.

FIG. 44 and FIG. 45 show the characteristics of a box having a larger size in the X direction compared with the box sizes in FIGS. 42 and 43A. Given that the case is assumed to have a distance L0 = 63 mm in FIGS. 42 and 43A, it is assumed to have a distance L0 = 80 mm in FIGS. 44 and 45. The calculation of the upward force in FIG. 45 is based on the following assumptions: F0 = 0.2N and the weight of the box (including the weight of the ink) is 30g, as shown in the calculation of FIG. 43A. As is clear from the results of FIG. 44, as shown in the results of FIG. 42A, in order to ensure that the wiping amount is not less than 1 mm, the plate inclination angle Φ is preferably not less than 25 degrees. Although it is relative to 63 mm in the calculation of FIG. 43A, the calculation in FIG. 45 The middle distance L0 is 80 mm, but the upward force FB balanced with the box 20 having a weight of 30 grams is almost equal to the upward force of FIG. 43 and is approximately 0.15 N (the position of the horizontal solid line in FIG. 45). As clearly understood from the results of FIG. 45 and the results of FIG. 43A, in order to prevent the half-engagement of the box body, the plate inclination angle Φ is preferably not more than 40 degrees.

By considering the characteristics of FIGS. 42 to 45 discussed above, it is preferable to set the plate inclination angle Φ to be not less than 25 degrees and not more than 40 degrees.

The increased pressing force of the equipment-side ground terminal 737 ensures a sufficient upward force even at a large plate inclination angle Φ. In this case, when the user releases his or her hand in the case 20 in the half-engaged state, it is preferable to set the pressing force of the ground terminal 737 on the device side and the plate inclination angle Φ so that the case 20 is pressed upward and The box 20 is changed from the semi-engaged state to the disengaged state by the pressing force of the equipment-side ground terminal 737.

The seventh surface 207 and the terminal carrying structure 408 form a part of the outer surface of the box body 20. More specifically, the seventh surface 207 and the terminal carrying structure 408 form a part of a corner section 265, and a part of the corner section 265 is coupled to the first surface 201 and the third surface 203 forming a part of the outer surface of the box 20. For a better understanding, the corner section 265 is shown by a solid line in FIG. 9A. In the attached state of the holder 20 to the holder 60 (as explained later), the third surface 203 and the corner section 265 are opposed to the first device-side side wall member 603 (FIG. 14) of the holder 60. The third face 203 and the corner section 265 are therefore referred to as "first opposite outer wall surfaces". In the attached state as explained later, the fourth face 204 is opposed to the second device-side sidewall member 604 (FIG. 15) of the holder 60. The fourth face 204 is therefore referred to as a "second opposite outer wall surface".

As shown in FIG. 10A, the circuit board 40 has a hub groove 401 at a + Z axis end and a hub hole 402 at a -Z axis end. The circuit board 40 is fixed to the eighth surface 208 of the case 20 by means of the hub groove 401 and the hub hole 402. According to this embodiment, the hub groove 401 and the hub hole 402 are provided at positions crossing the plane Yc passing through the center of the width (the length in the Y-axis direction) of the case 20. According to another embodiment, the hub groove may be omitted from the circuit board 40 At least one of 401 and the hub hole 402, and the circuit board 40 may be fixed to the eighth surface 208 by an adhesive or an engaging pawl (not shown) provided on the eighth surface 208.

As shown in FIGS. 10A and 10B, the circuit board 40 includes a box-side terminal 400 provided on the terminal carrying structure 408 and a memory unit 420 provided on a rear surface 409. The terminal carrying structure 408 and the rear 409 are planes. In the mounted state of the circuit board 40 on the box body 20, a part or one side of the plane terminal bearing structure 408 located on the side of the most + Z-axis direction is called a board end 405.

The box-side terminal 400 includes nine terminals 431 to 439. The memory unit 420 stores information about the ink of the cartridge 20 (for example, the remaining ink amount and the ink color). The box-side terminal 400 is conductive and can be coupled to an electrical device that is a part of the box 20. As used herein, an electrical device may be referred to as a resistor, sensor, or memory device, or other device that generates electricity or is powered by electricity as will be understood by those skilled in the art.

As shown in FIG. 10A, the nine box-side terminals 431 to 439 are all approximately rectangular in shape and arrayed into two rows substantially perpendicular to the mounting direction SD. The substantially vertical rows extend along the width direction (Y-axis direction) of the box body 20. The first row of the two rows with respect to the mounting direction SD is called the first terminal row R1 (lower line R1), and the second row of the two rows with respect to the mounting direction SD is called the second terminal row R2 (upper line R2). The first terminal row R1 and the second terminal row R2 have different positions along the Z-axis direction. More specifically, the first terminal row R1 is located on the -Z axis direction side of the second terminal row R2. Each of the terminals 431 to 439 has a contact portion cp at its center that is in contact with the contact structure 70. The first terminal row R1 and the second terminal row R2 can be regarded as lines formed by a plurality of contact portions cp.

The terminals 431 to 439 may be referred to by the following names corresponding to their functions or applications. For the differentiation from the terminals on the printing press 50, the wording "box side" may be prefixed to each name. For example, the “ground terminal 437” may be referred to as a “box-side ground terminal 437”.

<First terminal row R1>

(1) Attach the detection terminal (first terminal) 435; (2) power terminal 436; (3) ground terminal 437; (4) data terminal 438; and (5) attachment detection terminal (second terminal) 439.

<Second Terminal Row R2>

(6) Attach detection terminal (third terminal) 431; (7) Reset terminal 432; (8) Clock terminal 433; and (9) Attach detection terminal (fourth terminal) 434.

The contact portions cp of the terminals 435 to 439 on the first terminal row R1 and the contact portions cp of the terminals 431 to 434 on the second terminal row R2 are alternately or more specifically arranged in a zigzag shape.

Four attachment detection terminals 431, 434, 435, and 439 are used to check good / bad electrical contact with the corresponding device-side terminals provided in the contact mechanism 70, so that the printer 50 can detect whether the box 20 is properly attached At the designed attachment position of the holder 60. These four terminals 431, 434, 435, and 439 are collectively referred to as "attachment detection terminals." According to this embodiment, the four box-side terminals 431, 434, 435, and 439 are electrically connected to each other inside the circuit board 40. When the case 20 is attached to the holder 60, these terminals 431, 434, 435, and 439 are electrically connected to one of the ground wires (not shown) on the printing machine 50 via the ground terminal 437. A method of detecting attachment by using four attachment detection terminals 431, 434, 435, and 439 will be described later.

The other five box-side terminals 432, 433, 436, 437, and 438 are terminals for the memory unit 420. These five terminals 432, 433, 436, 437, and 438 are therefore also referred to as "memory terminals."

The reset terminal 432 receives a reset signal RST to be supplied to the memory unit 420. The clock terminal 433 receives a clock signal SCK to be supplied to the memory unit 420. The power terminal 436 receives a power voltage VDD (for example, a rated voltage) to be supplied to the memory unit 420. 3.3V). The ground terminal 437 receives a ground voltage VSS (0V) to be supplied to the memory cell 420. The data terminal 438 receives a data signal SDA to be supplied to the memory unit 420.

The first terminal 435 as one of the attachment detection terminals includes a first outer portion 435P on the most + Y-axis direction side of the case-side terminal 400. The second terminal 439, which is one of the attachment detection terminals, includes a second external portion 439P on the most -Y-axis direction side of the case-side terminal 400. The third terminal 431 as one of the attachment detection terminals includes a third external portion 431P on the most + Y-axis direction side of the second terminal line R. The fourth terminal 434, which is one of the attachment detection terminals, includes a fourth outer portion 434P located on the most -Y-axis direction side of the second terminal line R. In this embodiment, the first to fourth external portions 435P, 439P, 431P, and 434P are substantially straight edges of the corresponding terminals and extend substantially along the Z-axis direction, but this should not be considered as a limitation. For example, the edges may be curved and may extend in a direction that is not parallel to the Z-axis direction, such as shown for terminals 431, 434 in the example of FIGS. 41A and 41B, and the external portions of the terminals remain It can be understood as the outermost part of the edge along the Y-axis direction.

Among the contact portions cp of the box-side terminals 400, the ground terminal 437 having the contact portion cp on the center in the Y-axis direction is provided on a plane Yc crossing the center of the width (length in the Y-axis direction) of the box 20 Location. The contact portions cp of the other terminals 431 to 436, 438, and 439 are configured to be symmetrical with respect to the crossing line of the plane Yc and the ground terminal 437 as an axis. The ground terminal 437 is configured to contact the contact mechanism 70 before the other box-side terminals 431 to 436, 438, and 439 during the attachment process of the case 20 to the holder 60. Therefore, before and after the box is completely installed, a pressing force first applied from the holder 60 to the circuit board 40 is generated at the substantial center of the width of the box 20 or the length in the Y-axis direction. This prevents the pressing force applied to the circuit board 40 from acting such that the case 20 is inclined obliquely in the Y-axis direction, and thus the attachment of the case 20 at the designed attachment position is achieved. This contact of the ground terminal 437 with the contact mechanism 70 of the holder 60 before the other case-side terminals 431 to 436, 438, and 439 advantageously prevents or Reduces failures and damage caused by the high voltage caused by the ground function of the ground terminal 437, even when an unexpected high voltage is applied to the case 20.

According to this embodiment, compared with other case-side terminals 431 to 436, 438, and 439, the ground terminal 437 is formed longer in the Z-axis direction. This ensures contact between the ground terminal 437 and the contact mechanism 70 of the holder 60. According to another embodiment, all the box-side terminals 431 to 439 on the circuit board 40 may be formed in the same size.

As shown in FIG. 9A, the ink supply structure 280 protrudes from the first surface 201 in the −Z axis direction. The ink supply structure 280 communicates with the ink chamber 200 via a printing material flow path 282. The ink supply structure 280 is connected to the printing material supply pipe 640 (FIG. 5A) of the printer 50 to supply the ink contained in the ink chamber 200 to the print head 540 (FIG. 1). In other words, the ink supply structure 280 is opened to the outside to supply the ink contained in the ink chamber 200 to the outside of the cartridge body 20. As can be seen in FIG. 5B, the ink supply structure 280 need not protrude from the first side 201. Instead, in one embodiment, it may be flush or substantially flush with the first face 201. In this embodiment, when the box body 20 is installed, the material supply pipe 640 is raised to approach the first surface.

The ink supply structure 280 is provided on the first surface 201 closer to the fourth surface 204 than the third surface 203. The distance between the outer surface of the ink supply structure 280 and the third surface 203 in the X-axis direction is correspondingly greater than the distance between the outer surface of the ink supply structure 280 and the fourth surface 204.

The ink supply structure 280 has an open peripheral end. The surface at this open peripheral end is called the open surface 288, or (another alternative) a leading edge in the mounting direction, and defines a horizontal plane in the attached state. That is, the open surface 288 is the front edge (XY plane) of the box along the mounting direction SD, and defines an XY axis plane parallel to one of the X axis and the Y axis.

A resin foam 284 is provided at a position on the + Z axis direction side of the open surface 288 inside the ink supply structure 280, or more specifically, at a position in contact with the printing material flow path 282. According to this embodiment, before loading the case 20, A film is a sealing member (not shown) to seal the open surface 288 of the ink supply structure 280. For the attachment of the case 20 to the holder 60, a sealing member (not shown) for sealing the open surface 288 is removed from the case 20.

According to this embodiment, the ink supply structure 280 protrudes in the -Z axis direction, with the center on the central axis C of the printing material supply tube 640. According to another embodiment, the center of the ink supply structure 280 may be offset from the center axis C of the printing material supply tube 640. According to this embodiment, the open surface 288 of the ink supply structure 280 viewed from the -Z axis direction is formed of a line-symmetric casing with respect to the axes parallel to the X-axis and the Y-axis. According to another embodiment, the open surface 288 of the ink supply structure 280 may be formed of an asymmetric housing, and may have a leading edge defining an installation direction of a plane. The open surface 288 viewed from the Z direction according to this embodiment has a rounded rectangular shape, but according to other embodiments, it may also have any other suitable shape, such as a precise circle, oval, oval, square, or rectangle.

As shown in FIG. 9B, the plane BP is a plane formed by the installation direction leading edge of the open surface 288 of the ink supply structure 280. The distance A is the distance between the plane BP and the engaging portion 212 of the first restricting portion 210. The distance B is the distance between the plane BP and an engaging portion of the second restricting element 220. The distance C is the distance between the plane BP and the pivot point of the lever 80 about the axis 800c. As can be seen in FIG. 9B, when measured in a direction orthogonal to the plane BP, the distance B between the plane BP and an engaging portion of the second restriction element 220 is greater than the distance between the plane BP and the first restriction portion 210. The distance A between the engaging portions 212. When measured in a direction orthogonal to the plane BP, the distance A between the plane BP and the engaging portion 212 of the first restricting portion 210 is smaller than the distance C between the plane BP and the pivot point of the lever 80 around the axis 800c. . In addition, as can be seen in FIG. 9B, the plane TP is a plane formed by the beveled terminal bearing structure 408, which is parallel to the beveled bearing structure 408 itself in this embodiment, and therefore the terminal bearing structure 408 may be Used to refer to flat TP. The plane TP is neither parallel to nor perpendicular to the plane BP. The terminal carrying structure 408 has a box-side terminal 400 (FIG. 2) that is in contact with the device-side terminal of the contact mechanism 70.

As shown in FIG. 7, the first box-side restricting portion 210 is provided on the third surface 203. The first cartridge-side restricting portion 210 is located on the + Z-axis direction side and the + X-axis direction side of the ink supply structure 280 and the circuit board 40. The first case-side restricting portion 210 is locked by a lever 80 (FIG. 2) to restrict the movement of the case 20 in the attached state. The first box-side restricting portion 210 is structured as a protruding portion protruding from the third surface 203 in the + X axis direction (outward). The first box-side restricting portion 210 is located closer to the first side 290 than the second side 291 in the Z-axis direction. According to this embodiment, the first box-side restricting portion 210 is located adjacent to the first side 290.

The first case-side restricting portion 210 includes a first portion 212 extending in the Y-axis direction (width direction), a second portion 214 extending from the first portion 212 in the + Z-axis direction (vertical upward direction), and a first portion 212 One of the third portions 215 extends in the -Z axis direction (vertical downward direction). As described above, the + Z-axis direction (vertical upward direction) is generally the removal direction RD and is opposite to the -Z-axis direction (vertical downward direction), which is generally the mounting direction SD. The first or engaging portion 212 cooperates with one of the engaging portions 810 of the lever 80 to restrict the movement of the case 20 in the attached state. The second portion 214 is provided to lock the first portion 212 by the intended portion of the lever 80 in the attachment of the cassette 20 to the holder 60.

The first portion 212 includes a first box-side locking surface 211 as a first abutting portion and a second box-side locking surface 213 as a second abutting portion. The first case-side locking surface 211 faces the + Z axis direction. The second case-side locking surface 213 faces the + X-axis direction. The third portion 215 is in contact with the first portion 212 and the first side 290.

The box 20 further includes a second box-side restricting portion 220 provided on the fourth surface 204, a protruding portion 260 provided on the third surface 203, and a third box side provided on the seventh surface 207. Limiting element 250.

The second box-side restricting portion 220 is structured as a protruding portion protruding from the fourth surface 204 in the −X axis direction. The second box-side restricting portion 220 is inserted into the second device-side restricting element 620 in the form of a through hole of the holder 60 (FIG. 3). User in box 20 to holder The attachment of 60 or the removal of the holder 60 rotates the case 20 around the second case-side restriction portion 220 (FIG. 3) inserted in the second device-side restriction element 620. In other words, the second device-side restricting element 620 is used as a guide for attaching or detaching the case 20 to the holder 60. This facilitates the attachment of the box 20 to the holder 60 and the disassembly of the holder 60. In the attached state of the case 20, the second case-side restriction portion 220 is locked by the second device-side restriction element 620 to restrict the movement of the case 20 in the attached state. The second cartridge-side restricting portion 220 is located on the + Z axis direction side and the −X axis direction side of the ink supply structure 280 and the circuit board 40.

The protruding portion 260 on the third surface 203 is located on the + Z-axis direction side of the first box-side restricting portion 210. According to this embodiment, the protruding portion 260 is located at the most + Z-axis direction position (upmost position), and includes the second side 291 on the third surface 203.

The third box-side restricting element 250 is structured as a pair of protruding members (restricting walls) protruding from the two Y-axis direction sides of the seventh surface 207 in the + X-axis direction. The pair of protruding members 250 receives a protruding portion 636 (FIG. 2) interposed therebetween and cooperates with the protruding portion 636 to restrict the movement of the box body 20 in the Y-axis direction in the attached state.

FIG. 11 is a rear view of one of the casings 20. The second case-side restricting portion 220 is explained in detail with reference to FIG. 11. The second box-side restricting portion 220 includes a restricting locking surface 222 as a restricting locking element, an inclined surface 224, a first restricting side 226, and a second restricting side 228.

The restriction lock surface 222 faces the + Z axis direction and forms a horizontal plane in the attached state. The restriction lock surface 222 is in contact with the second device-side restriction member 620 (FIG. 3) to serve as a rotation pivot point when the case 20 is rotated to be detached from the holder 60.

The restricting locking surface 222 is locked by the second device-side restricting element 620 in the attached state to restrict the movement of the case 20 in the + Z axis direction in the attached state. The restriction locking surface 222 is provided at a position crossing the plane Yc passing through the center of the width (length in the Y-axis direction) of the box 20 and perpendicular to the plane Yc. As shown in FIG. 5A, the case 20 is attached In the state, the box body 20 receives the pressing forces Ps and Pt including the vector component in the + Z axis direction from the holder 60. By these pressing forces Ps and Pt, the restriction lock surface 222 is pressed against the second device-side restriction element 620. The second device-side restricting element 620 is thus in contact with the restricting locking surface 222 parallel to the Y-axis direction. This reduces the possibility of the box body 20 being tilted about the X axis in the attached state.

The inclined surface 224 is connected to the restriction locking surface 222 and is inclined to a direction including a + Z-axis direction vector component and a -X-axis direction vector component. This allows the restriction locking surface 222 to be smoothly guided to the second device-side restriction element 620 in the attachment of the case 20 to the holder 60.

The first restricting side surface 226 forms one of the second box-side restricting portions 220-a side surface in the Y-axis direction. The second restricting side surface 228 forms one of the second box-side restricting portions 220 + a side surface in the Y-axis direction. The first restricting side surface 226 faces a plane in the -Y axis direction, and the second restricting side surface 228 faces a plane in the + Y axis direction. The first limiting side surface 226 and the second limiting side surface 228 are planes parallel to the X-axis direction and the Z-axis direction, respectively. The first restricting side 226 and the second restricting side 228 hinder the second device-side restricting element 620 to restrict the movement of the case 20 in the Y-axis direction in the attached state of the case 20.

FIG. 12 is a front view of one of the casings 20. The first case-side restricting portion 210 is explained in more detail with reference to FIG. 12. The first box-side restricting portion 210 is provided at a position crossing the plane Yc. The first box-side locking surface 211 is provided at a position crossing the plane Yc and perpendicular to the plane Yc.

When the case 20 is viewed in the -X direction from the third surface 203 side, the first case-side locking surface 211 is located between the first outer portion 435P and the second outer portion 439P in the Y-axis direction (width direction). A range 40Y is inside, not outside. According to this embodiment, the first box-side restricting portion 210 including the first box-side locking surface 211 is located inside the range 40Y instead of the outside. In other words, the first box-side restricting portion 210 is located inside an area defined by a first imaginary line 435PL including one of the first outer portions 435P and a second imaginary line 439PL including a second outer portion 439P. The first imaginary line 435PL and the second imaginary line 439PL are straight lines extending in the Z-axis direction.

FIG. 13 is a left side view of one of the casings 20. The positional relationship of the respective components of the box 20 will be explained with reference to FIG. 13. Where the third surface 203 crosses one of the beveled terminal bearing structures 408, it is referred to as a "crossing portion 295". According to the above description of the term “crossing place”, the crossing of the third surface 203 across the inclined terminal bearing structure 408 includes not only the crossing of the actual surface 203 and the terminal bearing structure 408 but also the surface 203 and the terminal bearing structure. A crossing of one of 408 and an extension of one of the face 203 and the terminal carrying structure 408 or an extension of both of the face 203 and the terminal carrying structure 408. The crossing portion 295 is a line parallel to the Y-axis direction. According to this embodiment, the crossing portion 295 is located on a plane extending from the third surface 203 in the -Z axis direction. The crossing portion 295 is located on the -Z axis direction side of the third surface 203 accordingly. The midpoint of the length of the third surface 203 along the Z axis (or more specifically, the intersection of the third surface 203 with one of the contact portion planes TP and the intersection of the second surface 202 with the third surface 203 (Midpoint) is called midpoint 203P.

The first box-side restricting portion 210 is located near the crossing portion 295. The first box-side restricting portion 210 can also be regarded as being located adjacent to the terminal carrying structure 408 and close to the plate end 405. This means that the first case-side restricting portion 210 can be sufficiently closer to the case-side terminal 400, or more precisely, that the portion of the restricting portion 210 that engages with the device-side lever can be located more than the top surface 202 and the front 203. A crossing is closer to a position of the contact portion cp. The first case-side restricting portion 210 is preferably provided on a specific portion of the third surface 203 closer to the first side 290 than the second side 291, or more precisely, a restricting portion that engages with the lever on the equipment side The part 210 is located closer to one of the crossing parts 295 than the crossing of the top face 202 and the front face 203, and the position is in the range from the midpoint 203P to the first side 290. It is particularly preferable to provide the first case-side restricting portion 210 at a position sufficiently close to or close to the first side 290. As used herein, "close to" can mean "close to", "close to", or "on". As described above, the portion of the restricting portion 210 that is engaged with the device-side lever is located closer to one of the crossing portion 295 and / or the releasing portion cp than the crossing of the top surface 202 and the front surface 203. Although the top face 202 is in this embodiment The intersection with the front 203 is at the position indicated by 291 in FIG. 13 (as mentioned above), but the crossing need not be where the two surfaces actually cross each other, but can be tied by one surface Where one of the other faces extends or where the extensions of the two faces cross each other, as indicated by the dashed lines in the embodiments of FIGS. 35A and 35D. In this embodiment, a distance between the crossing of the third surface 203 and one of the contact planes TP and the crossing of the second surface 202 and the third surface 203 is about 20 mm. The distance between the first box-side locking surface 211 of the first box-side restricting portion 210 and the crossing of the second surface 202 and the third surface 203 is about 16 mm.

An effective portion of the first case-side restricting portion 210 (specifically, for restricting the position of the case-side terminal 400) is the first case-side locking surface 211. Therefore, the first case-side locking surface 211 is preferably positioned as close as possible to the case-side terminal 400. Omitting the third portion 215 of the first box-side restricting portion 210 and positioning the first portion 212 in contact with the first side 290 makes the first box-side locking surface 211 closer to the crossing portion 295 or the plate end 405.

FIG. 13 also shows an X-axis direction range 250X of one of the third box-side restricting elements 250 and an X-axis direction range 408X of the inclined terminal bearing structure 408. As clearly understood from the drawings, when the box body 20 is viewed from the first surface 201 side in the + Z axis direction, a portion of the third box side restriction element 250 and the inclined terminal bearing structure 408 overlap in the X axis direction.

A-4. Detailed structure of the holder 60:

A-4-1. The general structure of the holder 60:

14 and 15 are perspective views illustrating the structure of the holder 60. FIG. 16 is a plan view illustrating one structure of the holder 60. FIG. 17 is a sectional view taken on line F16-F16 in FIG. 16. FIG. The projection 636 shown in FIGS. 14 to 16 is omitted from the illustration of FIG. 17.

As described above, the holder 60 of the printing press 50 has five wall members 601, 603, 604, 605, and 606 to form a concave box chamber 602 for receiving the box 20. The five wall members 601, 603, 604, 605, and 606 are collectively referred to as "chamber-forming wall member 600." According to this embodiment, five wall members 601, 603, 604, 605, and 606 are resin plate members and are composed of one Resin (more specifically, modified polyphenylene ether (m-PPE)).

The wall member 601 forms a bottom surface of the concave box chamber 602. The wall members 603, 604, 605, and 606 form the sides of the concave box chamber 602. The wall member 601, the wall member 603, the wall member 604, the wall member 605, and the wall member 606 are referred to as "device-side bottom wall member 601", "first device-side side wall member 603", and "second device-side side wall member 604" "" Third device-side sidewall member 605 "and" fourth device-side sidewall member 606 ".

Each of the printed material supply tubes 640 and each of the contact mechanisms 70 including the device-side terminals are arrayed on the wall member 601 in the X-axis direction. The printing material supply pipe 640 is located on the side of the wall member 604, and the contact mechanism 70 is located on the side of the wall member 603. In other words, the printing material supply pipe 640 is provided closer to the wall member 604 than the wall member 603. The contact mechanism 70 is provided closer to the wall member 603 than the printing material supply pipe 640.

An elastic member 648 is provided on the wall member 601 around the printing material supply tube 640. As described above with reference to FIG. 5A, the elastic member 648 seals the periphery of the ink supply structure 280 of the case 20 and thus prevents ink from leaking from the ink supply structure 280 to the periphery in the attached state of the case 20 to the holder 60. The elastic member 648 generates a pressing force Ps in a direction (along the + Z axis direction) in which the ink supply structure 280 of the cartridge 20 is pressed back in the attached state of the cartridge 20 to the holder 60 (FIG. 5A).

As shown in FIGS. 14 to 16, the holder 60 has an opening OP on the upper side opposite to the wall member 601 and opposite to the wall member 601. The cassette 20 passes through the opening Op when the cassette 20 is attached to or detached from the retainer 60.

The wall member 603 makes an angle perpendicular to the wall member 601 on the + X-axis direction side of the wall member 601. According to this embodiment, an outer wall 603W is formed on the most + X-axis direction side of the wall member 603. In the use posture of the printing press 50, the outer wall 603W forms the front surface of the holder 60. The outer wall 603W extends along the direction (Y-axis direction) of the array of the plurality of cassettes 20. In the wall A lever 80 is provided on the component 603 for attachment and detachment of the case 20. A lever 80 is fixed to the wall member 603 in a movable manner or more precisely a rotatable manner via a holder 690. In other words, the lever 80 is fixed to the holder 690 that forms a part of the wall member 603. A rotation axis of one of the levers 80 is parallel to the Y-axis direction.

A retainer 690 is provided at a corner section (device side corner section) 600C (FIG. 17) in which the side wall member 603 crosses one of the bottom wall members 601.

As shown in FIG. 5A, an operation member 830 is provided on the + Z-axis direction end of the lever 80. When the user presses the operation member 830 from the + X-axis direction side toward the -X-axis direction side (that is, when the user applies the operation force Pr to the operation member 830), the lever 80 is turned counterclockwise around the rotation axis ( Seen from the + Y axis direction) Turn. Accordingly, the lever 80 rotates on an XZ plane parallel to the X-axis direction and the Z-axis direction.

The lever 80 is provided as a separate member from the chamber forming wall members 601, 603, 604, 605, and 606. According to this embodiment, the lever 80 is made of a synthetic resin (more specifically, polyacetal (POM)). The lever 80 has a certain rigidity level sufficient to lock the case 20. More specifically, the lever 80 preferably has a stiffness that does not cause substantial deformation of the lever 80 by applying a force (for example, a force of 14.4N) from the case 20 in the attached state. For example, the deformation of the lever 80 caused by applying an external force 14.4N from the case 20 is preferably not more than about 0.5 mm. The lever 80 preferably does not have any elastically deformed portion. This reduces the possibility of significantly deforming the lever 80 by the force applied from the case 20 in the attached state of the case 20, and ensures the stability between the case-side terminal 400 and the device-side terminal of the contact mechanism 70 Electrical connection. Providing the lever 80 separately from the chamber forming wall members 601, 603, 604, 605, and 606 advantageously increases the degree of freedom in the material selection of the lever 80.

Referring back to FIGS. 14 to 17, the wall member 604 makes an angle perpendicular to the wall member 601 on the -X axis direction side of the wall member 601. The wall member 604 faces the wall member 603 across the cassette chamber 602. According to this embodiment, the wall member 604 forms the rear surface of the holder 60 in the use posture of the printing press 50. The wall member 604 extends in the direction (Y-axis direction) of the array of the plurality of cassettes 20. The second device-side restricting element 620 is provided on the wall member 604. The second device-side restricting element 620 passes through a through hole in the X-axis direction (FIG. 17). According to another embodiment, the second device-side restricting element 620 may be a recess that is open to the cassette chamber 602.

As described above with reference to FIG. 5A, the second device-side restricting element 620 is configured to engage the second cassette-side restricting portion 220. The second device-side restricting element 620 is used as a guide for attaching the case body 20 to the holder 60 and disassembling it from the holder 60. The second device-side restricting element 620 locks the second box-side restricting portion 220 in the attached state of the case 20 to the holder 60. More specifically, the second device-side restricting member 620 locks the second cassette-side restricting portion 220 at the second locking position 620L on the + Z-axis direction side and the -X-axis direction side of the printing material supply pipe 640. According to this embodiment, the second device-side restricting element 620 is structured as a through hole having a size to receive the second box-side restricting portion 220 and has a device-side locking surface 622. The device-side locking surface 622 is a restriction locking surface 222 (FIG. 11) that faces a plane in the -Z axis direction and locks the second case-side restriction portion 220. One of the device-side locking surfaces 622 + X-axis direction end 624 is in contact with the second case-side restricting portion 220 and is used as a pivot point for the removal of the case 20 from the holder 60.

As shown in FIG. 17, the second device-side sidewall member 604 of the holder 60 has a space 670 provided on the + Z-axis direction side of the second device-side restricting element 620. The space 670 provides a space to allow the case 20 to rotate around the vicinity of the second device-side restricting element 620 as a rotation pivot point when the case 20 is attached to or detached from the holder 60. According to this embodiment, the space 670 is formed by a step that is gradually recessed from the second device-side sidewall member 604 in the + Z axis direction in the −X axis direction. According to another embodiment, the space 670 may be formed by an inclined surface of one of the wall members 604 that is gradually lowered in the + X-axis direction in the + Z-axis direction.

As shown in FIGS. 14 to 16, the wall member 605 makes an angle perpendicular to the wall member 601 on the -Y axis direction side of the wall member 601. According to this embodiment, the wall member 605 forms the right side of the holder 60 in the use posture of the printing press 50. The wall member 605 is connected to the wall members 603 and 604. The wall member 605 extends in the X-axis direction and is in the direction of the array of the plurality of cassettes 20 (Y-axis Direction) cross.

The wall member 606 makes an angle perpendicular to the wall member 601 on the + Y-axis direction side of the wall member 601. The wall member 606 is opposed to the wall member 605 across the cassette chamber 602. According to this embodiment, the wall member 606 forms the left side of the holder 60 in the use posture of the printing press 50. The wall member 606 is connected to the wall members 603 and 604. The wall member 606 extends in the X-axis direction and crosses the direction (Y-axis direction) of the array of the plurality of cassettes 20.

According to the positional relationship of the wall members 601 and 603 to 606 described above, the wall member 601 is perpendicular to the Z axis direction; the wall member 603 and the wall member 604 are opposed to each other along the X axis direction; the wall member 605 and the wall member 606 are along the Y axis The directions face each other; and the wall member 601 and the opening OP face each other in the Z-axis direction.

The contact mechanism 70 is provided at a corner section 600C where the wall member 601 crosses the wall member 603 of the holder 60. The contact mechanism 70 is located closer to the wall member 603 than the printing material supply pipe 640. The contact mechanism 70 includes a plurality of device-side terminals corresponding to the respective terminals 431 to 439 (FIG. 10) of the box-side terminal 400 and in contact with the terminals, and a terminal base on which the plurality of device-side terminals are located.

A-4-2. Detailed structure of contact mechanism 70:

FIG. 18 is a perspective view of a contact mechanism 70 removed from the holder 60.

The contact mechanism 70 includes a terminal substrate 709 and device-side terminals or contact forming members 731 to 739 on the terminal substrate 709. Each of the device-side terminals 731 to 739 is an elastic member having conductivity, and has a portion protruding from a device-side inclined surface 708, and the protruding portion can be displaced by an external force. In the attached state of the case 20 to the holder 60 (FIG. 5A), the device-side terminals 731 to 739 are pressed in the direction of pressing the circuit board 40 back to the case 20 (including the + Z axis vector component and the -X axis direction). The vector component) generates a pressing or elastic force (pressing force) Pt. When the case body 20 presses the device-side terminals 731 to 739 protruding from the device-side inclined surface 708 toward the device-side inclined surface 708, an elastic force (pressing force) Pt is generated as a reaction force. The vector component of the elastic force Pt generated by the device-side terminals 731 to 739 is removed along the The cartridge 20 is advanced toward RD, and the removal direction RD is a direction opposite to the mounting direction SD described above.

Nine device-side terminals 731 to 739 are provided at positions corresponding to the nine box-side terminals 431 to 439. The device-side terminal 731 is called "attachment detection terminal (third terminal) 731". The device-side terminal 732 is called a "reset terminal 732". The device-side terminal 733 is called a "clock terminal 733". The device-side terminal 734 is called "attachment detection terminal (fourth terminal) 734". The device-side terminal 735 is called "attachment detection terminal (first terminal) 735". The device-side terminal 736 is referred to as a "power terminal 736". The device-side terminal 737 is called "ground terminal 737". The device-side terminal 738 is called a "data terminal 738". The device-side terminal 739 is called "attachment detection terminal (second terminal) 739". For the differentiation of the box-side terminals, the wording "device side" can be prefixed to each name. For example, the “ground terminal 737” may be referred to as a “device-side ground terminal 737”. The nine device-side terminals 731 to 739 are collectively referred to as a device-side terminal 700.

The nine device-side terminals 731 to 739 are arrayed along a first device-side terminal line and a second device-side terminal line having different positions in the Z-axis direction. The first device-side terminal line includes five device-side terminals 735 to 739, and the second device-side terminal line includes four device-side terminals 731 to 734. The first device-side terminal line is located on the -Z axis direction side of the second device-side terminal line. The number of device-side terminals is not limited to nine, but may be changed to any desired number greater than nine or less than nine depending on the structure of the circuit board 40.

Among the nine device-side terminals 731 to 739, the device-side ground terminal 737 located at a substantially center in the Y-axis direction is electrically connected to a ground line (not shown). The height of the equipment-side ground terminal 737 protruding from the equipment-side inclined surface 708 is greater than the heights of the other equipment-side terminals 731 to 736, 738, and 739. The equipment-side ground terminal 737 is thus in contact with the circuit board 40 of the case 20 before the other equipment-side terminals 731 to 736, 738, and 739.

According to this embodiment, in order to accelerate the assembly of the printing machine, the device-side terminals 731 to 739 are located on the terminal base 709 and are unified as a contact mechanism 70 incorporated in the holder 60. However, the unified contact mechanism 70 using the terminal substrate 709 is not necessary. According to another embodiment, One suitable structure for receiving one of the equipment-side terminals 731 to 739 may be formed with the bottom wall member 601 or the outer wall 603W of the holder 60, and the equipment-side terminals 731 to 739 may be incorporated into the structure. Therefore, the terminal substrate 709 is not necessary.

A-4-3. Detailed structure of leverage 80:

FIG. 19 is a perspective view illustrating the appearance of the lever 80. FIG. 20 illustrates a cross section of a shaft body 850 taken on a plane (XZ plane, plane perpendicular to the Y axis) parallel to the X and Z axes. FIG. 21 illustrates a cross-section of the lever 80 taken on a plane (XZ plane, plane perpendicular to the Y axis) that passes through the center region in the width direction (Y axis direction) of the lever 80 and is parallel to the X and Z axes. . FIG. 21 shows a cross section of the lever 80 in a state where the case 20 is correctly attached at the designed attachment position of the holder 60.

As shown in FIGS. 19 and 21, the lever 80 includes an operation member 830, a pair of shaft body 850, a guide member 820, and an engaging portion 810. The lever 80 has an operation member 830 on one end (+ Z-axis direction end), and an engagement portion 810 on the other side (-Z-axis direction end). The lever 80 has a rotation shaft 800c between the operation member 830 and the engaging portion 810. In other words, the lever 80 pivots around the rotation shaft 800c at a position between the operation member 830 and the engaging portion 810.

The operating member 830 of the lever 80 receives an external force applied by a user. As shown in FIG. 21, the operation member 830 is provided at the + Z-axis direction end of the lever 80. The operation member 830 is located on the + Z-axis direction side of the rotation shaft 800c in the attached state of the case body 20 to the holder 60. The operation member 830 is located on the + Z-axis direction side of the first device-side side wall member 603 of the holder 60 (FIG. 15).

The operation member 830 has an operation surface 835 and an operation member opposite surface 831. The operation surface 835 receives an external force (the force Pr shown in FIG. 5A) applied by the user from the + X-axis direction side to the −X-axis direction side for the removal of the holder 20 from the holder 60. The operation member opposing surface 831 is a surface opposite to the cassette body 20 in the attached state of the cassette body 20 to the holder 60.

As shown in FIG. 19, the pair of shaft body 850 is provided between the ends of the lever 80. In the middle of the mass. The pair of shaft body 850 defines a rotation axis 800 c of the lever 80. The rotation axis 800c is parallel to the Y-axis direction (the array direction of the case 20). One of the pair of shaft body 850 (referred to as "first shaft body 850a") projects from an outer surface 893 on the + Y-axis direction side of the lever 80 in the + Y-axis direction. The other shaft member main body 850b (referred to as a "second shaft member main body 850b") of the pair of shaft member main bodies 850 protrudes from an outer surface 891 on the -Y axis direction side of the lever 80 in the -Y axis direction. The outer surfaces 891 and 893 are also referred to as the sides 891 and 893. The pair of shaft member bodies 850 provided on the lever 80 easily define the rotation shaft 800c by using a retainer as explained later.

According to this embodiment, each of the shaft body 850 has an inner curved surface 852, an outer curved surface 854, and radial sides 856 and 858. The respective faces 852, 854, 856, and 858 form a circumferential surface of the shaft body 850. The inner curved surface 852 and the outer curved surface 854 are referred to as a "first curved surface 852" and a "second curved surface 854", respectively. The centers of the inner curved surface 852 and the outer curved surface 854 correspond to the rotation axis 800c. The inner curved surface 852 is located closer to the second device-side side wall member 604 than the outer curved surface 854 (ie, on the -X axis direction side of the outer curved surface 854).

As shown in FIG. 20, the inner curved surface 852 forms an arc (which has a radius R1a) about the rotation axis 800c on a cross section parallel to the X-axis and the Z-axis. The outer arc-shaped surface 854 forms an arc (which has a radius R2a) about the rotation axis 800c on a cross section parallel to the X-axis and the Z-axis. The radius R1a is smaller than the radius R2a. As described above, as part of the circumferential surface, each shaft member main body 850 has a concentric inner curved surface 852 and an outer curved surface 854, and the inner curved surface 852 is located closer to the second device side than the outer curved surface 854 The side wall member 604 is located. Therefore, the rotating shaft 800c is located closer to the box body 20 in the box body chamber 602 without hindering the box body 20. This enables the engaging portion 212 of the first restricting portion 210 of the box body 20 to be locked by the engaging portion 810 while reducing deviation from one of the first locking positions 810L. If the rotation axis 800c is located away from the case 20, any shift of the lever 80 and the attachment position designed for the correct installation state of the case 20 will cause the engaging portion 810 is significantly displaced along one of the Z-axis directions. Positioning the rotation shaft 800c closer to the box 20 advantageously reduces the engagement portion 810 along Z when the lever 80 is displaced from the standard posture in a state where the box 20 is correctly attached at the designed attachment position. Displacement in the axial direction. That is, this positioning enables the case 20 to be locked by the engaging portion 810 with less deviation from the first locking position 810L. Setting the radius R2a of the outer curved surface 854 to be larger than the radius R1a of the inner curved surface 852 advantageously prevents the strength of the shaft body 850 from being degraded. `` Locking position (first locking position) 810L '' means where a first device-side locking surface 811 (the first portion of the engaging portion 810) abuts when the case 20 is attached at an attachment position set to a desired design position The position of the first cassette-side locking surface 211 (the first abutting portion of the first cassette-side restricting portion 210).

The engaging portion 810 is used to lock the box body 20 and restrict the movement of the box body 20 in the attached state. As shown in FIG. 21, the engaging portion 810 is provided on the −Z-axis direction end of the lever 80. In the attached state of the case body 20 to the holder 60, the engaging portion 810 is located on the -Z axis direction side of the rotation shaft 800c.

As shown in FIG. 21, the engaging portion 810 locks the first case-side restricting portion 210 by two portions (FIG. 5A). The engaging portion 810 includes a first device-side locking surface 811 (first device-side restricting element) as a first portion, a groove 815, and a second device-side locking surface 813 (second device-side restricting element) as one of the second portion. . According to this embodiment, the two device-side locking surfaces 811 and 813 of the engaging portion 810 are positioned to cross each other.

The first device-side locking surface 811 is a curved surface having an arc shape around the rotation axis 800c. The first device-side locking surface 811 therefore has an arc shape around the rotation axis 800c on a cross section parallel to the X and Z axes (ie, a cross section parallel to the XZ plane, that is, a cross section perpendicular to the Y axis). For the attachment of the case 20 to the holder 60, this structure enables the first device-side locking surface 811 to smoothly move to the locked position 810L and lock the case 20. For the removal of the case 20 from the holder 60, this structure enables the first device-side locking surface 811 to smoothly unlock the case 20. This structure therefore ensures a smooth attachment of the box 20 to the holder 60 and Smooth removal of the self-holding device 60.

At the lock position (first lock position) 810L, the first device-side lock surface 811 approaches the rotation axis 800c in the X-axis direction. In other words, according to this embodiment, at the lock position (first lock position) 810L, the first device-side lock surface 811 is located substantially below the rotation axis 800c. More specifically, at the lock position (first lock position) 810L, the first device-side lock surface 811 is located on the slightly-X-axis direction side of the rotation axis 800c. At the locked position 810L, the first device-side locking surface 811 correspondingly defines a plane that traverses the box 20 in the attached state at a substantially right angle to the + Z received from the device-side terminal 700 and the elastic member 648 Axial force. According to this embodiment, the plane in contact with the first device-side locking surface 811 as the curved surface is one of the substantially horizontal planes at the locking position 810L. This reduces the possibility of releasing the engagement between the first cassette-side locking surface 211 and the first device-side locking surface 811 when the cassette 20 is installed in a printing press. The first lock position 810L in the X-axis direction is therefore preferably a position close to the rotation axis 800c and on the −X-axis direction side of the rotation axis 800c. This makes the plane in contact with the first device-side locking surface 811 substantially horizontal, and prevents a + X-axis direction force from being applied to the first device-side locking surface 811 from the case 20 in the attached state. Positioning the first lock position 810L close to the rotation axis 800c in the X-axis direction advantageously reduces one of the lock positions from shifting in the Z-axis direction, even in the first case-side lock surface 211 and the first device-side lock surface 811 This is also true when the actual lock position is slightly deviated from the first lock position 810L. In other words, this reduces the deviation of the case 20 from the holder 60 in the Z-axis direction, and ensures a good electrical connection between the case-side terminal and the device-side terminal 700. For example, on a cross section of the lever 80 taken on a plane parallel to the X-axis and the Z-axis, the first locking position 810L should be positioned so that a straight line and connection passing through the rotation axis 800c and parallel to the Z-axis direction are rotated An angle A between the axis 800c and the straight line of the first lock position 810L is preferably not more than 15 degrees, more preferably not more than 10 degrees, and further preferably not more than 5 degrees. The angle A is also preferably not more than 1 degree.

As shown in FIG. 19, the guide member 820 is provided to the operation member 830 and the engaging portion 810 extends from the + Z-axis direction end to the -Z-axis direction end. The guide member 820 is used to guide the first box-side restricting portion 210 (shown in FIG. 12) to the engaging portion 810, and at the same time restrict the box 20 along the Y axis during the attachment process of the box 20 to the holder 60 Direction of movement. The box 20 can thus be attached correctly at the designed attachment position.

The guide member 820 forms a recessed portion of the guide wall 860 by providing a guide bottom wall 821 in the Y-axis direction and a pair of guide walls 860 that are oriented at an angle perpendicular to the guide bottom wall 821 in the -X axis direction. The guide bottom wall 821 and the pair of guide walls 860 easily form the recess to receive the first box-side restricting portion 210 structured as a protrusion. The pair of guide walls 860 includes a first guide wall 860a provided on the + Y-axis direction side and a second guide wall 860b provided on the -Y-axis direction side. The shaft member main body 850a is located on the outer surface 893 of the first guide wall 860a, and the shaft member main body 850b is located on the outer surface 891 of the second guide wall 860b.

The distance between the two guide walls 860a and 860b (that is, the distance between the inner surfaces of the two guide walls 860a and 860b) is smaller than the length in the Y-axis direction of the box 20, but larger than the first box-side limit The length in the Y-axis direction of the portion 210 (as can be seen in Figure 12). For attachment of the case body 20 to the holder 60, the first case-side restricting portion 210 is received by the guide member 820 and is easily and safely guided to the engaging portion 810, and the pair of guide walls 860a and 860b restrict the case The movement of the body 20 in the Y-axis direction and the guide bottom wall 821 restricts the movement of the box body 20 in the Z-axis direction.

One portion of the guide bottom wall 821 on the side of the engaging portion 810 has a groove 870 (FIG. 12) configured to receive the second portion 214 of the first box-side restricting portion 210. The groove 870 is recessed from the surface of the guide bottom wall 821 in the + X axis direction. The groove 870 extends from the middle to the −Z axis end of the guide bottom wall 821 in the + Z axis direction.

The lever 80 set on the holder 60 is configured to move the first device-side locking surface 811 to the first locking position 810L by its static weight. When the shaft main body 850 is held by the holder 690, the lever 80 is inclined to position the first device-side locking surface 811 on the -X axis direction side of the rotation shaft 800c (Fig. 21). According to one embodiment, the weight of the lever 80 can be adjusted by The center is positioned on the -Z axis direction side and the -X axis direction side of the rotation axis 800c so that the lever 80 is inclined. According to another embodiment, the lever 80 may be tilted by positioning the center of gravity of the lever 80 on the + Z axis direction side and the + X axis direction side of the rotation axis 800c.

A-4-4. Detailed structure of holder 690:

FIG. 22 is an exploded perspective view of one of the retainers 690 and a perspective view of one of the levers 80. The lever 80 is held by the holder 690 to be attached to the holder 60 in a rotatable manner. FIG. 22 shows a part of the structure of a holder 690 for holding the lever 80. The holder 690 is structured by a combination of a first holder member 650 and a second holder member 680. According to this embodiment, the holder 690 is made of a synthetic resin (more specifically, ABS resin (acrylonitrile butadiene styrene)).

The first holder member 650 has a pair of upright portions 651 and a through hole 658. According to this embodiment, the first holder member 650 also has a protrusion 636 serving as a third device-side restriction member.

The pair of upright portions 651 of the first holder member 650 are disposed across a pitch for receiving the lever 80. Each of the upright portions 651 has a load-bearing element 654 to receive a shaft body 850 of the lever 80. According to this embodiment, each of the upright portions 651 also has an engaging hole 656 for engaging the second holder member 680.

The second holder member 680 has a pair of upright portions 681 and a through hole 688. According to this embodiment, the second holder member 680 also has an elastic member 682.

The pair of upright portions 681 of the second holder member 680 are arranged across the same pitch as the pitch between the pair of upright portions 651 of the first holder member 650. Each of the upright portions 681 has a blocking surface 684 to block one of the load-bearing elements 654 in order to prevent the shaft body 850 of the lever 80 from being undesirably uncoupled from the load-bearing element 654. According to this embodiment, each of the upright portions 681 also has an engagement protrusion 686 that fits into one of the engagement holes 656 of the first holder member 650.

For the attachment of the lever 80 to the holder 60, by attaching the respective shaft main bodies of the lever 80 850 is set into the corresponding carrying element 654 of the pair of upright portions 651 of the first holder member 650 such that the lever 80 is located between the pair of upright portions 651. Subsequently, the two retainer members 650 and 680 are assembled such that the load bearing element 654 is blocked by the corresponding blocking surface 684 of the second retainer member 680 together with the shaft body 850 of the lever 80 fitted therein. Subsequently, the first holder member 650 and the second holder member 680 (for example) are fixed to the wall of the holder 60 by screws inserted into the through holes 658 and 688. This attaches the lever 80 to the holder 60 in a rotatable manner.

FIG. 23 is a cross-sectional view showing a peripheral structure of the lever 80 in the attached state of the box body 20 to the holder 60. The relationship between the shaft member main body 852 of the lever 80 and the bearing member 654 of the first holder member 650 is explained with reference to FIG. 23. FIG. 23 shows a cross section of the lever 80 of the locking box 20 taken on a plane that passes through the first device-side locking surface 811 and is parallel to the X and Z axes. The dotted line in FIG. 23 shows the protruding shape of the shaft body 850 of the lever 80, and the double-dot chain line shows the protruding shape of the load bearing element 654 and the blocking surface 684.

As clearly understood from FIG. 23, the rotation axis 800 c of the lever 80 is positioned through the contact between the inner curved surface 852 and the outer curved surface 854 of the shaft body 850 and the bearing element 654. Turning the lever 80 counterclockwise (as viewed from the + Y-axis direction) causes the radial side 856 of the shaft body 850 to abut the bearing element 654. This further restricts the counterclockwise rotation of the lever 80 (as seen from the + Y-axis direction). Turning the lever 80 clockwise (as seen from the + Y-axis direction) causes the radial side 858 of the shaft body 850 to abut the blocking surface 684. This further restricts the clockwise rotation of the lever 80 (as seen from the + Y-axis direction). This ensures stable rotation of the lever 80 and keeps the case 20 at the designed attachment position in a stable state.

During the rotation of the lever 80, the elastic member 682 abuts one of the levers 80 located on the -Z axis direction side of the rotation shaft 800c to engage the rear face 880. The elastic member 682 thus defines the rotatable range of the lever 80 during the attachment of the case 20 to the holder 60 and the removal from the holder 60. In the attachment of the case 20 to the holder 60, the elastic member 682 abuts the engaging rear surface 880 of the lever 80 and is elastically deformed, and presses the engaging rear surface in a direction including a vector component of the -X axis direction 880. This ensures that the engaging portion 810 of the lever 80 is moved to the lock position (first lock position) 810L.

A-5. Attachment of the box 20 to the holder 60 and disassembly of the holder 60:

24 to 27A show a procedure (attachment procedure) for attachment or installation of the case 20 to the holder 60. 24 to 27A are cross-sectional views corresponding to FIGS. 5A and 17 and arranged in time series in this order.

For the attachment of the case 20 to the holder 60, the procedure first inserts the case 20 through the top surface of the holder 60, as shown in FIG. This procedure then moves the magazine 20 in the -Z direction or the installation direction so that the second magazine-side restriction portion 220 side of the magazine 20 first enters into the holder 60, and the second magazine-side restriction portion 220 is inserted into In the second device-side restriction element 620. In the state of FIG. 24, the first case-side restricting portion 210 of the case 20 is located on the + Z axis direction side of the engaging portion 810 of the lever 80 in the holder 60.

The case 20 is pivoted clockwise (as seen from the + Y-axis direction) around the second case-side restricting portion 220 (which is inserted into the second device-side restricting element 620) from the state shown in FIG. The third surface 203 side of the box body 20 is moved toward the bottom wall member 601 of the holder 60. As shown in FIG. 25, the first box-side restricting portion 210 then moves in the -Z axis direction, and the movement of the box 20 in the Y-axis direction and the X-axis direction is controlled by the guide member 820 of the lever 80 (that is, the pair The guide walls 860a and 860b) and the guide bottom wall 821 shown in FIG. 19 are limited.

When the case 20 is further rotated from the state of FIG. 25 to press the third surface 203 side thereof, the first case-side restricting portion 210 is further pressed in the −Z axis direction. As shown in FIG. 26, the lever 80 is then pressed in the −X-axis direction by the first box-side restricting portion 210 to rotate it counterclockwise (as viewed from the + Y-axis direction). The lever 80 abuts the elastic member 682 and receives a pressing force from the elastic member 682 in a direction of pressing the lever 80 clockwise (as seen from the + Y-axis direction). This pressing force system contains an external force of a vector component in the -X axis direction. The rotatable range of the lever 80 is thus defined by the elastic member 682. The state of FIG. 26 (in which the lever 80 abuts on the elastic member 682 and is pressed by the elastic member 682) is maintained until the case 20 is further squeezed and the first case The side restricting portion 210 presses the guide member 820 of the lever 80 so far.

When the box body 20 is further rotated from the state of FIG. 26 to press the third surface 203 side thereof, the first box side restriction portion 210 finally presses the guide member 820 of the lever 80. The lever 80 is then rotated to move the first case-side restricting portion 210 in the -X axis direction, as shown in Fig. 27A. The engaging portion 810 thus moves to the first locking position 810L and locks the first case-side restricting portion 210 at the first locking position 810L. More specifically, as shown in the bottom right corner close-up view, the first device-side locking surface 811 (the first portion) of the engaging portion 810 abuts the first box-side locking surface 211 (the first An adjacent portion) to limit the movement of the box body 20 in the + Z axis direction. The second device-side locking surface 813 (second portion) of the engaging portion 810 also abuts the second box-side locking surface 213 (second abutting portion) of the first box-side restricting portion 210 to restrict the box 20 along + X Movement in the direction of the axis. Although the first cassette-side locking surface 211 and the second cassette-side locking surface 213 are shown as two separate substantially orthogonal surfaces in the close-up view of FIG. 27A, as can be seen in FIG. 27B, the first limitation The first portion 212 of the portion 210 may be formed with a curved surface such that the first box-side locking surface 211 and the second box-side locking surface 213 are configured as separate sections of the same surface. Alternatively, as can be seen in FIG. 27C, the first portion 212 of the first restricting portion 210 may be formed with a flat inclined surface or other shapes, so that the first box-side locking surface 211 and the second box-side locking The surface 213 is configured as a separate section of the same surface. As a part of the installation, while the second cartridge-side restricting portion 220 is engaged with the second device-side restricting element 620 and the first cartridge-side restricting portion 210 is engaged with the engaging portion 810, the ink supply structure 280 of the cartridge 20 is then engaged with The printing material supply pipe 640 is connected. This completes the attachment of the case 20 to the holder 60. The correct attachment of the box 20 at the designed attachment position enables the electrical connection between the box-side terminal 400 and the device-side terminal 700 to allow signal transmission between the box 20 and the printing machine 50.

According to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 23 and 27A, the elastic member 682 is configured not to abut the lever 80 and therefore does not place an external part in the attached state of the case 20 to the holder 60. A force is applied to the lever 80. This reduces the possibility that the lever 80 is plastically deformed by an external force and the possibility that the engaging portion 810 deviates from the first locking portion 810L. This accordingly ensures a stable electrical connection between the box-side terminal 400 and the device-side terminal 700.

According to another embodiment, the elastic member 682 may be designed to abut the lever 80 and thus apply a force to the lever 80 in the attached state of the case 20 to the holder 60 in a direction including a vector component of the -X axis direction. In this application, the elastic member 682 continuously applies a force to the lever 80 in a direction including a vector component of the -X axis direction, regardless of the position of the lever 80. This moves the engaging portion 810 to the first locking portion 810L with sufficient force for the attachment of the case 20 to the holder 60. This gives a violent clicking sound to inform the user to lock the case 20 by the engaging portion 810.

According to another embodiment, the elastic member 682 may be omitted. This application reduces the total number of parts.

The procedure for removing the box body 20 from the holder 60 will be described. To remove the case 20 from the holder 60, the user presses the operation member 830 in the -X axis direction. In other words, the user applies an external force Pr (FIG. 5A) to the operation member 830 in a direction including a vector component in the −X-axis direction. The lever 80 then moves the engaging portion 810 about the rotation axis 800c in a direction including a vector component of the + X-axis direction. At the same time, the first case-side locking surface 211 is rotated and moved in the direction of arrow Y22 shown in FIG. 23. This disengages the first box-side restricting portion 210 from the engaging portion 810 and eliminates the restriction on the movement of the third surface 203 side of the box 20 in the + Z axis direction. Eliminating the restriction on the movement of the box body 20 in the + Z axis direction causes the third surface 203 side of the box body 20 to move in the + Z axis direction by the pressing force Pt from the contact mechanism 70. This moves the case 20 from the state of FIG. 27A to the state of FIG. 26. The box 20 is further rotated counterclockwise (as seen from the + Y-axis direction) around the second box-side restricting portion 220 inserted into the second device-side restricting element 620 to rotate the third of the box 20 The surface 203 side is pulled away from the bottom wall member 601 of the holder 60. This moves the case 20 from the state of FIG. 26 to the state of FIG. 25 and further to the state of FIG. 24. The user can apply a force to the protrusion 260 in a direction including a vector component of the -X axis direction to turn Moving box body 20. This operation rotates the third surface 203 side of the box body 20 counterclockwise (as seen from the + Y axis direction) and moves the third surface 203 side of the box body 20 in the + Z axis direction. The user holds the third surface 203 side of the box 20 and pulls away the second box-side restricting portion 220 from the second device-side restricting element 620 to remove the box 20 from the holder 60.

As shown in the close-up view of FIG. 27A, the operation member 830 of the lever 80 includes an operation member opposite surface 831. For the removal of the case 20 from the holder 60 in the attached state, when the user presses the operation member 830, the operation member opposing surface 831 is in contact with the protruding portion 260. The operating member facing surface 831 is inclined in a direction including a -X axis direction vector component and a + Z axis direction vector component. Rotating the lever 80 about the rotation axis 800c in the direction of the arrow Y27 causes the operating member opposing surface 831 to contact the protrusion 260 and press the protrusion 260 in a direction Yh including one of the -X axis direction vector component and the + Z axis direction vector component. This facilitates the removal of the box body 20 from the holder 60. Even when the case 20 is caught by a part of the holder 60 and is not moved through the + X-axis direction from the first locked position 810L through the first case-side locking surface 211, the case 20 is moved in the + Z-axis direction. The third surface 203 side can also be moved in the + Z axis direction by using the operation member facing surface 831 and the protruding portion 260.

A-6. Attachment detection method using attached detection terminal:

FIG. 28 is a block diagram illustrating the electrical structure of the circuit board 40 and the printer 50 of the cassette 20 according to the first embodiment. The printing machine 50 includes a display panel 590, a power circuit 580, a main control circuit 570, and a sub-control circuit 550. The display panel 590 is used as a display unit to notify the user of various information, such as the operating conditions of the printing press 50 and the attachment state of the cassette 20. The display panel 590 may be provided on an operation unit (not shown) visible from the outside of the printing press 50. The power circuit 580 includes a first power source 581 for generating a first power voltage VDD and a second power source 582 for generating a second power voltage VHV. The first power supply voltage VDD is a general power supply voltage (for example, a rated voltage of 3.3V) for a logic circuit. The second power supply voltage VHV is a high voltage (for example, a rated voltage of 42V) for driving the print head 540 (FIG. 2) for ink ejection. These voltages VDD and VHV are supplied to the secondary controller The control circuit 550 is supplied to other circuits as needed. The main control circuit 570 includes a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 571 and a memory 572. The sub-control circuit 550 includes a memory control circuit 551 and an attachment detection circuit 552. The circuit structure including the main control circuit 570 and the sub-control circuit 550 is called a "control circuit".

Among the nine terminals (FIG. 10) provided on the circuit board 40 of the case 20, the reset terminal 432, the clock terminal 433, the power terminal 436, the ground terminal 437, and the data terminal 438 are electrically connected to the memory unit 420. The memory unit 420 is a non-volatile memory that does not have one address terminal. In the memory unit 420, a memory cell to be accessed is determined based on the number of pulses of the clock signal SCK input from the clock terminal 433 and the command data input from the data terminal 438. The memory unit 420 receives data from the data terminal 438 or sends the data to the data terminal 438 in synchronization with the clock signal SCK. The clock terminal 433 is used to supply the clock signal SCK from the auxiliary control circuit 550 to the memory unit 420. The printer 50 applies a power voltage (for example, a rated voltage of 3.3 V) and a ground voltage (0 V) for driving the memory unit 420 to the power terminal 436 and the ground terminal 437, respectively. The power supply voltage for driving the memory unit 420 may be a first power supply voltage VDD directly applied by the printer 50 or may be generated by the first power supply voltage VDD to be lower than the first power supply voltage VDD. The data terminal 438 is used for transmitting a data signal SDA between the sub-control circuit 550 and the memory unit 420. The reset terminal 432 is used to supply a reset signal RST from the sub-control circuit 550 to the memory unit 420. The four attachment detection terminals 431, 434, 435, and 439 are interconnected by the wiring in the circuit board 40 of the case 20 (FIG. 3) and are all grounded. For example, the attachment detection terminals 431, 434, 435, and 439 are connected to the ground terminal 437 to be grounded. According to another embodiment, the attachment detection terminals 431, 434, 435, and 439 may be grounded through any connection path without using the ground terminal 437. As clearly understood from this description, the attachment detection terminals 431, 434, 435, and 439 can be connected to a part of the memory terminal (or the memory unit 420), but preferably not to the ground terminal 437 or the memory unit Any memory terminals other than 420 are connected. The disconnection of the attachment detection terminal with the memory terminal or the memory unit causes no Any signal or voltage is applied to the attachment detection terminal and therefore ensures accurate attachment detection. The four attachment detection terminals 431, 434, 435, and 439 are interconnected by the wiring in the illustrated example of FIG. 28, but a part of the connection path may be replaced by a resistor.

In FIG. 28, the path names SCK, VDD, SDA, RST, OV1, OV2, DT1, and DT2 are assigned to the respective connection paths connecting the device-side terminals 731 to 739 and the box-side terminals 431 to 439 of the circuit board 40 . The signal names are used for the path names relative to the connection paths to the memory unit 420.

FIG. 29 illustrates a connection between the circuit board 40 and the attachment detection circuit 552. The four attachment detection terminals 431, 434, 435, and 439 of the circuit board 40 are connected to the attachment detection circuit 552 via corresponding device-side terminals 731, 734, 735, and 739. The four attachment detection terminals 431, 434, 435, and 439 of the circuit board 40 are grounded. The connection between the device-side terminals 731, 734, 735, and 739 and the attachment detection circuit 552 are connected to the power supply voltage VDD (the rated voltage is 3.3V) in the sub-control circuit 550 via a pull-up resistor, respectively.

In the illustrated example of FIG. 29, three of the four attachment detection terminals 431, 434, 435, and 439 on the circuit board 40 and the corresponding device-side terminals 731, 734, and 735 have Well connected. However, the attachment detection terminal 439 has a bad connection with the corresponding device-side terminal 739. The voltage level of the connection path of the three device-side terminals 731, 734, and 735 in a good connection state is the L level (ground voltage level), and the voltage of the connection path of the device-side terminal 739 in a poor connection state The level is the H level (the power supply voltage VDD level). The attachment detection circuit 552 can check the voltage levels of these connection paths to identify a good / bad connection state with respect to each of the four attachment detection terminals 731, 734, 735, and 739.

The contact portions cp of the four attachment detection terminals 431, 434, 435, and 439 on the circuit board 40 are located outside a first area 400P, which includes the memory terminals 432, 433, 436, 437, and 438. Contact part cp. The contact portions cp of the four attached detection terminals 431, 434, 435, and 439 are located in the four corners of a quadrangular second area 400T At the corner, the second region 400T includes the first region 400P. The first region 400P is preferably the smallest possible quadrangle of one of the contact portions cp of the five memory terminals 432, 433, 436, 437, and 438. The second area 400T is preferably one of the smallest possible quadrangles of all the contact portions cp including the box-side terminals 431 to 439.

In a good contact state of all four attached detection terminals 431, 434, 435, and 439, the case 20 does not have a significant inclination angle and ensures good contact of the memory terminals 432, 433, 436, 437, and 438. On the other hand, in the bad contact state of any one or more of the four attachment detection terminals 431, 434, 435, and 439, the case 20 has a significant inclination and can cause the memory terminals 432, 433, 436 , 437, and 438 by any one or more of them. According to a preferred embodiment, in a bad contact state of any one or more of the four attachment detection terminals 431, 434, 435, and 439, the attachment detection circuit 552 is displayed on the display panel 590 to indicate detailed attachment Information (string or image) to inform the user of the failed attachment.

The contact portions cp of the attachment detection terminals 431, 434, 435, and 439 are arranged at four corners around the first area 400P for the following reasons, where the first area 400P includes the memory terminals 432, 433, 436, The contact part of 437 and 438 is cp. In the attached state of the box body 20 to the holder 60, there is a certain margin for tilting the box body 20 so that the circuit board 40 of the box body 20 can be tilted relative to the contact mechanism 70 of the holder 60 . For example, the case 20 is inclined so that the terminals 431 to 434 (more specifically, the contact portion) of the upper line R2 (FIG. 10A) on the circuit board 40 are larger than those of the lower line R1 (FIG. 10A). The terminals 435 to 439 (more specifically, the contact portions thereof) being further away from the contact mechanism 70 may cause bad contact with any one of the terminals 431 to 434 in the upper line R2. The case 20 is inclined so that the terminals 435 to 439 (more specifically, the contact portion) of the upper and lower wires R1 of the circuit board 40 are more than the terminals 431 to 434 (more specifically, the contact thereof) of the upper wire R2 Partially) being further away from the contact mechanism 70 may cause bad contact with any one of the terminals 435 to 439 in the lower line R1. Tilt the box 20 so that the left edge (Figure 10A) of the circuit board 40 is farther away from the contact machine than the right edge The structure 70 may cause bad contact with any of the terminals 431, 432, 435, 436, and 437 on the left side of the circuit board 40. Inclining the case 20 such that the right edge of the circuit board 40 is farther away from the contact mechanism 70 than the left edge may cause bad contact of any of the terminals 433, 434, 437, 438, and 439 on the right side of the circuit board 40. The bad contact may cause an error when reading data from or writing data to the memory unit 420. Check all four attachment detection terminals 431, 434 arranged on the four corners outside the first area 400P (including the contact portions cp of the memory terminals 432, 433, 436, 437, and 438) for good / bad contact The contact portions cp of 435, 439 and 439 advantageously prevent bad contact and access errors obtained by one of the memory cells 420 due to this tilting of the case 20.

A-7. Advantages of the embodiments:

A-7-1. Some advantageous effects of this embodiment compared to the structures disclosed in the previously mentioned US Publication No. 2005/0151811 and US Patent No. 6,276,780.

In the printed material supply system 10 according to this embodiment, the lever 80 is provided on the holder 60, and the first box-side restricting portion 210 is provided on the box 20. The box-side restricting portion 210 is located on the -Z axis direction side of the rotation axis 800c of the lever 80. Different from the structure in which the lever is integrated with the case in US Publication No. 2005/0151811, the engaging member for engaging with the holder is not located between the rotating shaft and the operating member of the lever. Therefore, there is no need to have a relatively large distance between the lever and the side of the case. The structure of this embodiment therefore shortens the distance between the lever 80 of the box body 20 and the third surface 203, that is, the size along the X-axis direction, while reducing the length of the lever, that is, the size along the Z-axis direction. This allows a significant reduction in size of the printing press 50 and the entire printing material supply system 10, as well as a reduction in the size of the packaging for transportation and distribution of the cartridge 20, which advantageously reduces transportation costs and separation costs. This advantageous effect is not achieved by providing the lever only on the printing press holder as opposed to the cassette as described in US Patent No. 6,276,780. This advantageous effect is achieved by providing the rotation axis 800c of the lever 80 between the operation member 830 and the engaging portion 810 and positioning the box-side restriction portion 210 on the -Z axis direction side of the rotation axis 800c of the lever 80.

The printed material supply system 10 according to this embodiment includes a relatively short lever 80 and a first case-side restricting portion 210 having a small size and a simple structure (for example, a protrusion). Compared with the structure described in U.S. Publication No. 2005/0151811, this increases the rigidity of the lever 80 and the first case-side restriction portion 210, and allows the lever 80 and the first case-side restriction portion 210 (the case) 20) Choose materials with relatively high stiffness. This leads to a significant reduction in the possibility of plastic deformation or latent deformation of the lever 80 and the first case-side restricting portion 210. In the attached state, the case 20 can be maintained at the correct position in the holder 60, the holder maintains normal or good contact between the box-side terminals 431 to 439 and the device-side terminals 731 to 739 and reduces bad connections . Because the first box-side restricting portion 210 of this embodiment has a small size and a simple structure, it is different from the box of US Publication No. 2005/0151811 in the package for transportation and distribution of the box 20, Especially in vacuum packaging, no special attention is required to prevent plastic deformation of the lever. This improves user convenience. Providing the protrusion as the first case-side restricting portion 210 as described in this embodiment is particularly preferable for this advantageous effect.

In the printing material supply system 10 according to this embodiment, the box-side restricting portion 210 is located on the -Z axis direction side of the rotation axis 800c of the lever 80. As described earlier, the device-side terminals 731 to 739 are pressed back in the direction of the circuit board 40 in the attached state of the case 20 (that is, in a direction including a vector component of the + Z axis direction and a vector component of the -X axis direction). ) Produces a pressing force Pt. It is expected that this pressing force Pt will move the cartridge 20 in the + Z axis direction in the attached state. However, in the printed material supply system 10 of this embodiment, the rotation axis 800c of the lever 80 is located on the -Z axis direction side of the first box-side restricting portion 210, so that the lever 80 restricts the box 20 from the + Z axis direction Side to -Z axis movement.

According to this embodiment, the first case-side restricting portion 210 is located on the -Z axis direction side and the -X axis direction side of the rotation axis 800c of the lever 80. When the box body 20 moves in the + Z axis direction, a rotation moment appears on the lever 80, as shown by the arrow M in FIG. 5A. This moment acts so that the engaging portion 810 strongly presses the first case-side restricting portion 210 in the −X axis direction. This moment also acts to move the engaging portion 810 of the lever 80 in accordance with the X-axis direction vector component of the pressing force Pt in the -X-axis direction. The case 20 in the attached state therefore receives the force to be pressed against the device-side bottom wall member 601 and the second device-side side wall member 604. This structure of this embodiment prevents the cassette 2 from undesirably decoupling from the holder 60, so maintaining normal or good contact between the cassette-side terminals 431 to 439 and the equipment-side terminals 731 to 739 and reducing the possibility of bad connections .

As shown in FIG. 27A, the first box-side restricting portion 210 includes: a first box-side locking surface 211, which abuts the first portion 811 of the engaging portion 810 to restrict the movement of the box 20 in the + Z axis direction; and the second The box-side locking surface 213 abuts the second portion 813 of the engaging portion 810 to restrict the movement of the box 20 in the + X axis direction. This ensures that a rotational torque as shown by the arrow M in FIG. 5A is generated, and the possibility of a bad connection between the box-side terminals 431 to 439 and the device-side terminals 731 to 739 is more effectively reduced.

As shown in FIG. 12, according to this embodiment, the first case-side restricting portion 210 has a second portion 214. The first case-side restricting portion 210 reduces the possibility of locking the first case-side restricting portion 210 at a position on the -Z axis direction side of the engaging portion 810 in the attachment of the case 20 to the holder 60. In the process of attaching the box body 20 to the holder 60, the user can press the box body 20 into the holder 60 in the -Z axis direction deeper than the state of Fig. 27A. Even in this case, the second portion 214 of the first case-side restricting portion 210 abuts the second device-side locking surface 813 of the lever 80 to prevent the first case-side restricting portion 210 from being located on the -Z axis of the engaging portion 810 Direction on the side. This reduces the possibility that the first case-side restricting portion 210 is locked by the engaging portion 810 at an unintended locking position.

A-7-2. Reduction of external force effect in the attached state of the box:

FIG. 30 shows an external force applied to the case 20 in an attached or mounted state. During the printing operation of the printing press 50, the holder 60 and the magazine 20 are moved back and forth in the main scanning direction (the Y-axis direction or the width direction of the magazine 20). The box body 20 is therefore along the width of the holder 60 External acceleration (inertial force) is received during acceleration and deceleration. The cartridge 20 receiving the external force can rotate around the ink supply structure 280 (FIG. 27A) and the printing material supply tube 640 in a rotation direction including a width direction vector component (a Y-axis direction vector component). More specifically, the third surface 203 side of the box body 20 can be rotated in the direction of the arrow YR1, and the fourth surface 204 side of the box body 20 can be rotated in the direction of the arrow YR2. The second surface 202 side of the box body 20 can also be rotated in the direction of the arrow YR3. The direction of the arrow YR1 and the direction of the arrow YR2 are rotation directions around the Z axis, and they include a Y-axis direction vector component (width-direction vector component). The direction of the arrow YR3 is the direction of rotation around the X axis, and it includes a vector component in the Y axis direction (vector component in the width direction).

Moving the box body 20 in the direction of the arrow YR3 causes the fifth surface 205 or the sixth surface 206 of the box body 20 to be pulled up in the + Z axis direction. However, as described previously, this movement of the box body 20 in the + Z axis direction is limited by the lever 80. According to this embodiment, the first box-side restricting portion 210 is close to the crossing portion 295 as shown in FIG. 13. In other words, the first box-side restricting portion 210 is close to the board end 405 of the circuit board 40. The first case-side restricting portion 210 is arranged as close to the case-side terminal 400 as possible. Since the first case-side restricting portion 210 is locked by the lever 80, the periphery of the first case-side restricting portion 210 does not substantially have a position shift caused by an external force. Providing the box-side terminal 400 at a position with a very small position shift effectively prevents the misalignment of the respective terminals 431 to 439 of the box-side terminal 400 with respect to the holder 60, thus maintaining the box-side terminal 400 and the device A stable electrical connection between the side terminals 700. To ensure this advantageous effect, it is preferable (at the time of viewing the cassette 20 from the third surface 203 side along the -X axis direction) that at least a portion of the first cassette-side restricting portion 210 (specifically, the first cassette side The locking surface 211) is positioned between the first outer portion 435P and the second outer portion 439P (FIG. 10A) in the Y-axis direction (width direction).

As shown in FIG. 7, according to this embodiment, the corner section of the box body 20 has a step (seventh surface) 207 extending from the first surface 201 in the + Z axis direction. The seventh surface 207 is located on the −X-axis direction side and the −Z-axis direction side of the inclined surface (eighth surface) 208. The seventh surface 207 has a third box-side restricting element 250. As shown in FIGS. 2 and 14 to 16, the holder 60 has a third device Side restraining element (projection) 636. The third box-side restricting element 250 is in contact with the protruding portion 636. This further restricts the movement of the third surface 203 side of the cartridge 20 around the printing material supply tube 640 and the ink supply structure 280 in the width direction. The third box limiting element 250 is preferably structured as a pair of protruding members protruding from the seventh surface 207 in the + X-axis direction to receive the protruding portion 636 therebetween as described in this embodiment. This simple structure effectively restricts the movement of the third surface 203 side of the cartridge 20 around the printing material supply tube 640 and the ink supply structure 280 in the width direction.

As shown in FIG. 13, according to this embodiment, the terminal carrying structure 408 of the circuit board 40 and the third box-side restricting element 250 are configured to partially overlap each other in the X-axis direction (+ Z from the first surface 201 side When viewing the case 20 in the axial direction). This further effectively restricts the movement of the box body 20 in the direction of the arrow YR1, and thus prevents the box-side terminal 400 from moving (deviation) with respect to the holder 60.

In the above description, the external force applied to the box body 20 in the width direction is an inertial force generated by the movement of the box body 20 in the main scanning direction. However, the external force applied to the case 20 is not limited to this inertial force. For example, in a carriage-type printer, the print head moves in the main scanning direction, but the cassette 20 is attached to a stationary holder and therefore does not move in the main scanning direction. However, in a carriage-type printer, the box 20 can receive an external force. More specifically, an external force (inertial force) may be applied to the case 20 due to, for example, vibrations occurring from the movement of the print head in the main scanning direction.

A-7-3. Reduction of the inclined position of the box 20 in the attached state:

As shown in FIG. 12, according to this embodiment, the first case-side restricting portion 210 is provided to traverse a plane Yc passing through the center of the width (the length in the Y-axis direction) of the case 20. As shown in FIG. 5A, the case 20 in the attached state receives the pressing forces Ps and Pt including the vector component of the + Z axis direction from the holder 60. These pressing forces Ps and Pt press the first case-side restricting portion 210 against the engaging portion 810 of the lever 80. Even when the box 20 in the attached state is shaken about the X-axis or Z-axis by the external force, the first box-side restricting portion 210 still hardly moves in the vicinity of the position crossing the plane Yc.

The first box-side restricting portion 210 is located near the crossing portion 295, that is, near the plate end 405. Providing a first case-side restricting portion 210 that moves very little at a position close to the case-side terminal 400 ensures a stable electrical connection between the case-side terminal 400 and the contact mechanism 70.

Specifically, the effective portion of the first case-side restricting portion 210 for restricting the position of the case-side terminal 400 is the first case-side locking surface 211. Therefore, the first case-side locking surface 211 is preferably as close as possible to the case-side terminal 400. Omitting the third portion 215 of the first box-side restricting portion 210 and positioning the first portion 212 in contact with the first side 290 makes the first box-side locking surface 211 closer to the crossing portion 295 or the plate end 405. This further ensures a stable electrical connection between the box-side terminal 400 and the contact mechanism 70.

According to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10, among the contact portions cp of the respective box-side terminals 400, the ground terminal 437 having the contact portion cp at the center in the Y-axis direction is provided at a position across the plane Yc Office. The contact portions cp of the other terminals 431 to 436, 438, and 439 are configured to be symmetrical with respect to the crossing line of the plane Yc and the ground terminal 437 as an axis. The plane Yc has a particularly small amount of movement because the position of the first box-side restricting portion 210 is fixed. The box-side terminal 400 is provided on or near a plane Yc with little movement. In addition to providing the first box-side limiting portion 210 at a position very close to the box-side terminal 400, positioning the box-side terminal 400 on or near the plane Yc further ensures the box-side terminal 400 and the contact mechanism. 70 stable electrical connection.

A-7-4. Fine adjustment of the inclined box 20 in the attached state:

According to this embodiment, the first case-side restricting portion 210 (more specifically, the first case-side locking surface 211) is located at the first position on the most + Y-axis direction side of the case-side terminal 400 in the Y-axis direction. A range 40Y between an outer portion 435P and a second outer portion 439P on the most -Y-axis direction side of the case-side terminal 400 is at an inner side rather than an outer side. After the case 20 is attached to the holder 60, the case-side terminal 400 receives a force having a + Z-axis direction vector component from the device-side terminal 700 to finely adjust the inclination of the case 20, or more specifically, its Raise The direction of the beveled terminal carrying structure 408 provided with the box-side terminal 400. The manufacturing error may change the position of the respective equipment-side terminals 731 to 739 from the equipment-side inclined surface 708 or the horizontal state of the first cassette-side locking surface 211 of the first cassette-side restricting portion 210. Even in these cases, the fine adjustment of the direction of the beveled terminal bearing structure 408 ensures a stable electrical connection between the box-side terminal 400 and the device-side terminal 700.

FIG. 31 shows the fine adjustment of the direction of the beveled terminal bearing structure 408. The position of the box body 20 after the fine adjustment of the attitude of the box body 20 is shown by a dotted line. In this example, the attachment detection terminal 731 of the device-side terminal 700 protrudes more than the designed amount from the device-side inclined surface 708 in the + Z axis direction (FIG. 18). In this case, the beveled terminal bearing structure 408 receives the force Ph from the attachment detection terminal 731 in a direction including one of the + Z-axis direction vector components. Positioning the first case-side locking surface 211 within the range 40Y allows more rotation of the case 20 around the X axis. In other words, the force Ph is applied to the beveled terminal carrying structure 408 to achieve a fine adjustment of the posture of the box 20. In the illustrated example of FIG. 31, the posture of the box body 20 is finely adjusted to be inclined toward the sixth surface 206 side.

A-7-5. Advantageous effects of the second box-side restricting portion 220:

The box 20 has a second box-side restricting portion 220 (FIG. 27A) on the fourth surface 204, and the second box-side restricting portion is used to restrict the box 20 from the + X axis direction side to the + Z axis direction. motion. This further ensures a stable electrical connection between the box-side terminal 400 and the device-side terminal 700.

According to this embodiment, the second box-side restricting portion 220 is a protruding portion protruding from the fourth surface 204 in the -X axis direction. The second box-side restriction portion 220 is inserted into the second device-side restriction element 620 (FIG. 3) in the form of a through hole of the holder 60. The user rotates the case 20 around the vicinity of the second case-side restriction portion 220 inserted in the second device-side restriction element 620 (FIG. 3) for attachment of the case 20 to the holder 60 and the self-holding device 60 Its disassembly. This structure facilitates the attachment of the box 20 to the holder 60 and the disassembly of the holder 60. The second box-side restricting portion 220 in the form of a protrusion can be easily provided on the fourth surface 204 of the box 20.

A-7-6. Beneficial effects of protrusion 260:

As shown in FIG. 27A, according to this embodiment, the case 20 has a protrusion 260 on the + Z-axis direction side of the first case-side restriction portion 210 on the third surface 203. For the disassembly of the holder 20 from the holder 60, a force is applied to the operating member 830 of the lever 80 from the + X-axis direction side to the -X-axis direction side to cause the operating member 830 to contact the protrusion 260 and to include a vector along the + Z axis direction The component direction Yh presses the protrusion 260. The protrusion 260 accordingly receives a force having a vector component in the + Z axis direction. This facilitates the removal of the cassette 20 from the holder 60 by using the operation member 830. Even when the case 20 is caught by some parts of the holder 60 and does not pass through the first case-side locking surface 211 from the first locking position 810L in the + X axis direction and moves in the + Z axis direction By using the protruding portion 260, the third surface 203 side of the case 20 is moved in the + Z axis direction.

Although according to this embodiment, an external force is directly applied from the operation member 830 to the protruding portion 260, an external force may not be applied from the operation member 830 to the protruding portion 260. Rotating the operating member 830 disengages the engaging portion 810 from the first case-side restricting portion 210 and eliminates the restriction on the movement of the third surface 203 side of the case 20 in the + Z axis direction. Eliminating the restriction on the movement of the box body 20 in the + Z axis direction causes the third surface 203 side of the box body 20 to move in the + Z axis direction by the pressing force Pt from the contact mechanism 70. The protrusions 260 of the box body 20 move simultaneously in the direction Yh. The user holds the periphery of the protruding portion 260 moving in the direction Yh and easily removes the box 20 from the holder 60. Providing the protruding portion 260 improves the operability of disassembling the holder 20 from the holder 60 even when an external force is not directly applied from the operating member 830 to the protruding portion 260.

A-7-7. Advantageous effects of the position of the ink supply structure 280:

As shown in FIG. 27A, according to this embodiment, the ink supply structure 280 is provided on the first surface 201 closer to the fourth surface 204 than the third surface 203. The distance between the outer surface of the ink supply structure 280 and the third surface 203 in the X-axis direction is correspondingly greater than the distance between the outer surface of the ink supply structure 280 and the fourth surface 204. Box side terminal 400 series Provided on the beveled terminal carrying structure 408 adjacent to the third surface 203. In other words, the ink supply structure 280 is provided at a position away from the case-side terminal 400. This reduces the possibility of ink sticking to the case-side terminal 400 and prevents bad contact between the case-side terminal 400 and the device-side terminal 700.

A-7-8. Advantageous effects of ground terminal 437:

According to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10A, among the contact portions cp of the box-side terminals 400, a ground terminal 437 having a contact portion cp at the center in the Y-axis direction is provided across the box 20. The position of the plane Yc at the center of the width (length in the Y-axis direction). The ground terminal 437 is configured to contact the contact mechanism 70 before the other box-side terminals 431 to 436, 438, and 439 during the attachment process of the case 20 to the holder 60. Therefore, a pressing force first applied from the holder 60 to the circuit board 40 is generated at the substantial center of the width of the box body 20 or the length in the Y-axis direction. This prevents the pressing force applied to the circuit board 40 from acting to incline the box 20 in the Y-axis direction and thus achieve the attachment of the box 20 at the designed attachment position. This contact of the ground terminal 437 with the contact mechanism 70 of the holder 60 before the other box-side terminals 431 to 436, 438, and 439 advantageously prevents or reduces failures and damage caused by the high voltage caused by the ground function of the ground terminal 437 , Even when an unexpectedly high voltage is applied to the case 20.

A-7-9. Advantageous effects of the shape of the first device-side locking surface 811:

As shown in FIG. 21, the first device-side locking surface 811 is a curved surface that is arc-shaped about a rotation axis 800c in a cross section parallel to the X-axis and the Z-axis. This ensures a smooth operation of attachment of the box body 20 to the holder 60 and disassembly of the holder 60. Forming the first device-side locking surface 811 as a curved surface reduces the amount of pressing back by the elastic member 648 (FIG. 27A) in the + Z axis direction during the attachment process of the case 20 to the holder 60. This ensures good electrical contact between the box-side terminal 400 and the device-side terminal 700.

An example of this advantageous effect is explained with reference to FIGS. 32A to 32F. The vertical direction of FIGS. 32A to 32F corresponds to the Z-axis direction; the upward direction of the figure corresponds to the + Z-axis direction and downwards. The direction corresponds to the -Z axis direction, and these two directions are opposite to each other. 32A to 32C show the attachment using one of the cases of the first device-side locking surface 811 formed as a curved surface, and are arranged in time series in this order. FIGS. 32D to 32F show attachment using a cassette formed of a first device-side locking surface 811t formed as a plane, and arranged in time series in this order.

As shown in FIG. 32A, for the attachment of the case 20 to the holder 60, the first case-side restricting portion 210 moves in the -Z axis direction while adjoining the guide bottom wall 821. As shown in FIG. 32B, when the first box-side restricting portion 210 is further moved through the guide bottom wall 821 in the -Z axis direction, the first device-side locking surface 811 moves in the direction of arrow Y32. When the user strongly presses the cassette 20 in the -Z axis direction, the first cassette-side restricting portion 210 is located on the -Z axis direction side of the first device-side locking surface 811. When the user no longer holds the box body 20, the box body 20 is pressed upward by the pressing force Ps and Pt of the elastic member 648 and the device-side terminal 700 in the + Z axis direction. As shown in FIG. 32C, when the first device-side locking surface 811 is formed as a curved surface, the upward pressing amount of the first case-side restricting portion 210 of the case 20 is D1.

As shown in FIGS. 32D to 32F, when the first device-side locking surface 811t is formed as a flat surface, the upward pressing amount of the first case-side restricting portion 210 is D2, which is greater than D1.

In the attached state of the case 20, the first device-side locking surface 811 formed as a curved surface may be located on the -Z axis direction side than the first device-side locking surface 811t formed as a flat surface. This reduces the amount of upward pressing of the first case-side restricting portion 210.

According to this embodiment, the first device-side lock surface 811 located at the preset or first lock position 810L approaches the rotation axis 800c in the X-axis direction (FIG. 21). This reduces the moving distance of the first device-side locking surface 811 in the Z-axis direction, even when the actual locking position deviates from the first locking position 810L in the X-axis direction. This accordingly prevents the cassette body 20 from deviating from the holder 60 in the Z-axis direction.

B. Additional embodiments:

FIG. 33 illustrates a printing press 50a according to a second embodiment. Figure 33 shows the The first embodiment corresponds to the cross section of the cross section of FIG. 17. The difference from the printer 50 of the first embodiment is that a holder 690a does not have an elastic member 682. In other respects, the printer 50a of the second embodiment has the same structure as that of the printer 50 of the first embodiment. Identical elements are expressed by the same symbols and are not specifically explained herein. The cassette 20 attached to the printing press 50a has the same structure as the cassette 20 attached to the printing press 50 of the first embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 33, the holder 690a does not have an elastic member for pressing the lever 80 in a direction including a vector component of the -X axis direction. However, the lever 80 is designed to position its first device-side locking surface 811 at the first locking position 810L by its static weight, so that the first box-side locking surface 211 of the box 20 is The device-side locking surface 811 is locked.

The printing press 50a of the second embodiment has advantageous effects similar to those of the printing press 60 of the first embodiment. In addition, the structure of the holder 690 without an elastic member reduces the possibility of the holder 690 being damaged or broken, and reduces the total number of parts to reduce the manufacturing cost of the printing press 50a.

C. Third embodiment:

FIG. 34 is a perspective view illustrating the appearance of a cassette 20b according to a third embodiment. The difference from the case 20 (FIG. 7) of the first embodiment is the size of the case 20b. In other respects, the box 20b of the third embodiment has the same structure as the box 20 of the first embodiment. Identical elements are expressed by the same symbols and are not specifically explained herein. A printing machine of the third embodiment adopts the same structure for the case 20b but has the same structure as the holder 60 of the first embodiment and various components (for example, the lever 80) provided on the holder 60.

The cartridge 20b has a larger size than those of the cartridge 20 of the first embodiment and can contain a larger amount of ink. The cassette 20b can be attached to a cassette mounting structure of one of large inkjet printers capable of printing large paper (for example, sizes A2 to A0). The cassette body 20b is attached to the cassette mounting structure of a large inkjet printer as the mounting direction SD in the -Z axis direction. According to this embodiment, the -Z axis direction is a horizontal direction. Attachment from box 20b to box mounting structure In this state, the X-axis direction is vertical. More specifically, the + X-axis direction is a vertically upward direction, and the -X-axis direction is a vertically downward direction.

D. Modification of the box structure:

35 to 37A show the modification of the structure of the box. These cassette systems are designed for a printing machine having the same structure as that of the printing machine 50 according to the first embodiment. The components of these boxes, which are the same as those of the box 20 of the first embodiment, are denoted by the same symbols.

D-1. Modification of the outer shape of the box:

35A to 35H are conceptual diagrams showing the outer shape of a case according to other embodiments. A case 20c shown in FIG. 35A has a case with an oval or oval side. The case 20c has a first case-side restricting portion 210 and a circuit board 40 provided on the front surface. The ink supply structure 280 is formed on the bottom surface of the cartridge 20c, and the second cartridge-side restricting portion 220 is provided on the rear surface of the cartridge 20c. When the box body 20c is viewed from the front side of the box body 20c, the box body 20c has a fixed width. This case 20c is compatible with the case 20 shown in FIG. 7 as long as the first case-side restriction portion 210 and the second case-side restriction portion 220, the circuit board 40, and the ink supply structure 280 are structured to be compatible with the printing press. The corresponding parts in 50 can be connected.

A box 20d shown in FIG. 35B has an approximately rectangular parallelepiped shape similar to the box 20 shown in FIG. 7. The great difference from the case 20 of FIG. 7 is that the eighth surface 208 is not continuous with the lower end of the third surface 203. The box body 201 shown in FIG. 35G is similar in shape and design to the box body 20d, wherein the placement of the first box-side restricting element 210 is provided closer to the terminal carrying structure 408. The boxes 20e and 20f shown in FIGS. 35C and 35D do not have the seventh face included in the box 20 of FIG. One case 20g shown in FIG. 35E has a circuit board 40 mounted on the eighth surface 208 by means of a spring. One box 20h shown in FIG. 35F has a hinged surface or other movable surface 208h instead of the eighth surface 208, and the circuit board 40 is mounted on the movable surface 208h. When the box 20h is being installed in the printing press, the position indicated by the free dotted line of the movable surface 208h is moved to the position indicated by the solid line. Once the box 20h is correctly installed in the printing press and the movable surface 208h is in the position indicated by the solid line, the circuit The contact portions of the terminals on the board 40 are aligned on the contact portion plane TP. These cassettes 20c to 20g are also compatible with the cassette 20 shown in FIG. 7 as long as the first cassette-side restriction portion 210 and the second cassette-side restriction portion 220, the circuit board 40, and the ink supply structure 280 are structured It can be connected to the corresponding part of the printer 50. One of the boxes 20m shown in FIG. 35H has an elongated member 211a connected to the first box-side restricting portion 210 at one end and connected to the box 20m via a hinge or other pivotable mechanism at the other end. Top 202. Although the terminals are flat-shaped in the above embodiments, the terminals may be slender, linear, or other shapes. For example, FIG. 35I shows an embodiment having an elongated terminal 400n in which the contact portion cp is aligned on the terminal plane TP when the case 20j is installed in a printing press. In the embodiment shown in FIG. 35J, a case 20j includes a contact mechanism 70j having a configuration (including a terminal configuration) that is substantially the same as the device-side contact mechanism 70 shown in FIG. The contact mechanism 70j has a rebound terminal with a contact portion that comes into contact with the terminal 700 of the contact mechanism 70 and is substantially aligned on the terminal plane TP when the case 20j is installed in the printing press. In the embodiments such as FIG. 35I and FIG. 35J (where the terminals are not flat), the “terminal carrying structure” and the “slope surface” can be regarded as the box terminals supporting the contact portion and therefore are in contact with the contact portion plane TP The portions of the indicated terminals are substantially the same. Moreover, the part of the restricting part 210 that engages with the device-side lever is located closer to the contact part plane TP across the front face 203 and the contact part cp than one of the following crossings: 1) the top face 202 and the front face 203; 2) one of the top face 202 and the front face 203 and one of the top face 202 and the front face 203 extend; or 3) the extension of both the top face 202 and the front face 203 (such as in a box When the body has the top surface and the front surface shaped in the embodiment shown in FIGS. 35A and 35D). In the embodiment of FIG. 35J, the circuit board 40j of the box body 20j is positioned inside the contact mechanism 70j and contacts the device-side contact mechanism 70 via indirect contact through the contact mechanism 70j.

As is clearly understood from the examples shown in FIGS. 35A to 35H, there are various other modifications of the outer shape of the case. In a box with an external shape that is different from an approximately cuboid In the shape, as shown by the dashed lines in FIGS. 35A and 35D, it is possible to virtually assume the six faces of the cuboid, namely the bottom face 201 (first face), the top face 202 (second face), and the front face 203 (third Face), rear face 204 (fourth face), left side face 205 (fifth face), and right side face 206 (sixth face). In its description, the terms "plane" and "plane" mean a virtual plane or a non-real (imaginary) plane as shown in Fig. 35A or 35D and an actual plane as shown in Fig. 7 and Fig. 8. The terms "face" and "planar" include both flat and curved surfaces.

D-2. Box with adapter:

FIG. 36 is a perspective view illustrating a structure of a case 20i having an adapter according to an embodiment. This case 20i can be separated into a container assembly 200i containing an ink chamber 200 and an adapter 299, which can then be paired together for installation into a holder of a printing device. After the printing material in the ink chamber 200 is used up, the user replaces the container assembly with a new container assembly 200i, or refills the printing material into the container assembly 200i. Adapter 299 is reusable. This box 20i is compatible with the box 20 of the first embodiment shown in FIG.

A housing 22i of the box body 20i is structured as a combination of a housing for the container assembly 200i and a housing for the adapter 299i. The container assembly 200i includes an ink chamber 200 configured to contain an ink, a printing material flow path 282 configured to supply ink or printing material to the ink supply structure, and a resin foam 284. The container assembly 200i has a second surface 202i corresponding to the second surface 202 of the box body 20i. The container assembly 200i also has a first surface 201i, a third surface 203i, a fourth surface 204i, a fifth surface (not shown), a sixth surface 206i, a seventh surface 207i, and an eighth surface 208i , Which respectively correspond to the first surface 201 and the third surface 203 to the eighth surface 208 of the box body 20i. The first surface 201i and the second surface 202i are opposed to each other in the Z-axis direction; the first surface 201i is located on the -Z axis direction side and the second surface 202i is located on the + Z axis direction side. The third surface 203i and the fourth surface 204i face each other in the X-axis direction; the third surface 203i is located on the + X-axis direction side and the fourth surface 204i is located on the -X-axis direction side. The fifth face (not shown) and the sixth face 206i face each other along the Y-axis direction; the fifth face (not shown) is located on the -Y-axis side and The sixth surface 206i is located on the + Y-axis direction side. The seventh surface 207i and the eighth surface 208i form a connection surface connecting the first surface 201i and the third surface 203i. The seventh surface 207i is perpendicular to the first surface 201i and forms a plane parallel to the Y axis and the Z axis (YZ plane). The seventh surface 207i, which is a step, makes an angle perpendicular to the first surface 201i. The seventh surface 207i extends from the first surface 201i in the + Z axis direction. The seventh surface 207i is located on the -X axis direction side and the -Z axis direction side of the eighth surface 208i. The eighth surface 208i connects the seventh surface 207i and the third surface 203i, and is an inclined surface inclined along a direction including a + X-axis direction vector component and a -Z-axis direction vector component. The eighth surface 208i is inclined to the first surface 201i and the third surface 203i, and is perpendicular to the fifth surface (not shown) and the sixth surface 206i. In other words, the eighth surface 208i is inclined to the XY plane and the YZ plane and is perpendicular to the XZ plane.

The adapter 299 has surfaces corresponding to the first surface 201, the third surface 203, the fourth surface 204, the fifth surface 205, the sixth surface 206, the seventh surface 207, and the eighth surface 208 of the box body 20i. The face of the adapter 299 corresponding to the second face 202 of the box body 20i is an opening. The adapter 299 has an internal space for receiving the container assembly 200i. The first surface 201 of the adapter 200 has an ink supply structure 280. In other respects, the box body 20i has a structure similar to that of the box body 20 of the first embodiment shown in FIG. 7, but with or without some changes. The first case-side restricting portion 210 may be attached to the adapter 299 as shown in FIG. 36 or on the container assembly 200i (not shown). Similarly, the circuit board 40 may be attached to the adapter 299 as shown in FIG. 36, or on the container assembly 200i (not shown). The positioning of the restricting portion 210 and the circuit board 40 need not both be on the container assembly 200i or the adapter 299, but one may be tied on the container assembly 200i and the other may be tied on the adapter 299. The box 20i can thus be structured as a combination of the container assembly 200i and the adapter 299, as described above.

FIG. 37A is a perspective view illustrating a structure of a box 20j having an adapter according to another embodiment. This case 20j can be separated into a container assembly 200j containing an ink chamber 200 and an adapter 299j, which can then be paired together for installation into a holder of a printing device. After the printing material in the ink chamber 200 is used up, the user can use a new container The assembly 200j replaces the container assembly or refills the printed material into the container assembly 200j. Adapter 299 is reusable. This box 20j is compatible with the box 20 of the first embodiment shown in FIG. 7.

A housing 22j for the box 20j is structured as a combination of a housing for the container assembly 200j and one of the housings for the adapter 299j. The container assembly 200j includes an ink chamber 200 and an ink supply structure 280 configured to contain ink. The container assembly 200j has a second surface 202j and a sixth surface 206j, which respectively correspond to the second surface 202 and the sixth surface 206 of the box body 20j. The container assembly 200j also has a first surface 201j, a third surface 203j, a fourth surface 204j, a fifth surface (not shown), a seventh surface 207j, and an eighth surface 208j, which respectively correspond to the box The first surface 201, the third surface 203, the fourth surface 204, the fifth surface 205, the seventh surface 207, and the eighth surface 208 of the body 20j. The first surface 201j and the second surface 202j are opposed to each other in the Z-axis direction; the first surface 201j is located on the -Z axis direction side and the second surface 202j is located on the + Z axis direction side. The third surface 203j and the fourth surface 204j face each other along the X-axis direction; the third surface 203j is located on the + X-axis direction side and the fourth surface 204j is located on the -X-axis direction side. The fifth face (not shown) and the sixth face 206j face each other in the Y-axis direction; the fifth face (not shown) is located on the -Y axis direction side and the sixth face 206j is located on the + Y axis direction side. The seventh surface 207j and the eighth surface 208j form a connection surface connecting the first surface 201j and the third surface 203j. The seventh surface 207j is perpendicular to the first surface 201j and forms a plane parallel to the Y axis and the Z axis (YZ plane). The seventh surface 207j, which is a step, makes an angle perpendicular to the first surface 201j. The seventh surface 207j extends from the first surface 201j in the + Z axis direction. The seventh surface 207j is located on the -X axis direction side and the -Z axis direction side of the eighth surface 208j. The eighth surface 208j connects the seventh surface 207j and the third surface 203j, and is an inclined surface inclined along a direction including a + X-axis direction vector component and a -Z-axis direction vector component. The eighth surface 208j is inclined to the first surface 201j and the third surface 203j, and is perpendicular to the fifth surface (not shown) and the sixth surface 206j. In other words, the eighth surface 208j is inclined to the XY plane and the YZ plane and is perpendicular to the XZ plane.

The adapter 299j has a surface corresponding to the first surface 201, the third surface 203, the fourth surface 204, and the fifth surface 205 of the box body 20j. Form the matching of the second surface 202 and the sixth surface 206 of the box 20j The face of the connector 299j is open. The adapter 299j has an internal space for receiving the container assembly 200j. The adapter 299j also has an opening in a portion of the first surface 201. The ink supply structure 280 provided in the container assembly 200j is exposed at an opening provided on the first side 201 of the adapter 299j and is connected to the printing material supply pipe 640 (FIG. 2). The box body 20j has one of the simpler structures than the structure of the first embodiment (FIG. 7), but may have one of the same structures as the structure of the first embodiment (FIG. 7). First case side restriction portion 210. Alternatively, the first box-side restricting portion 210 may be a part of the adapter 299j shown in FIG. 37A, or a part of the container assembly 200j (not shown). Similarly, the circuit board 40 may be attached to the adapter 299j as shown in FIG. 37A, or on the container assembly 200j (not shown). The positioning of the restriction portion 210 and the circuit board 40 need not both be on the container assembly 200j or the adapter 299j, but one may be tied to the container assembly 200j and the other may be tied to the adapter 299j. The box body 20j has a third surface 203 and a fourth surface 204 which are lower than the height of the third surface 203 and the fourth surface 204 of the first embodiment (shorter length in the Z-axis direction). For example, the third surface 203 and the fourth surface 204 have the same height (the same length in the Z-axis direction). The box body 20j does not have the protruding portion 260, but may also have the protruding portion 260 as in the first embodiment. In other respects, the box 20j has a structure similar to that of the box 20 of the first embodiment shown in FIG. 7, but with or without some changes. The box 20j can thus be structured by the combination of the container assembly 200j and the adapter 299j as described above.

FIG. 37B shows a cassette 20q configured similarly to the cassette shown in the embodiment of FIG. 7. However, this embodiment is different in that the box body 20q is divided into an adapter 299q and a container assembly 200q. The adapter 299q fits on one end 201q of the container assembly 200q (indicated by a dashed line) before the cartridge 20q is installed in the printing press. Also, the terminal 400q is formed directly on the surface of the adapter 299q. When the terminal is formed on a flat surface (whether the surface of the case in the embodiment or the surface of a circuit board as in the previous embodiment), the flat surface on which the terminal is formed can be regarded as a " Bevel surface "or" terminal bearing structure ".

FIG. 38 is a perspective view illustrating a structure of a box body 20k having an adapter according to another embodiment. The box 20k includes an adapter 299k, an external storage tank 200T, a tube 200L, and an auxiliary adapter 200S, which can all be paired together for installation in a holder of a printing device. The adapter 299k has the same structure as that of the adapter 299j described above with reference to FIG. 37A. The external storage tank 200T contains printed material and is located outside the printing machine 50 shown in FIG. 1. The auxiliary adapter 200S has an ink supply structure 280k. The tube 200L is used to supply printing material from the external storage tank 200T to the auxiliary adapter 200S. The external storage tank 200T, the auxiliary adapter 200S, and the tube 200L are used as a container assembly 200k configured to contain ink or printing material. As shown by the dotted line in FIG. 38, the box 20k of this embodiment is therefore assumed to have a container assembly 200k. The box 20k of this embodiment can thus be separated into a container assembly 200k and an adapter 299k, such as the box 20i shown in FIG. 36 and the box 20j shown in FIG. 37A. After the printed material in the external storage tank 200T is used up, the user can replace the external storage tank with a new external storage tank 200T, or refill the printed material into the external storage tank 200T. The adapter 299k is reusable. This box 20k is compatible with the box 20 of the first embodiment shown in FIG.

The case 22k, a case of the case 20k, is structured as a combination of a case for the virtual container assembly 200k and a case for the adapter 299k. The structure of the virtual container assembly 200k and the adapter 299k are similar to the structure of the box 20j described above with reference to FIG. 37A, but with or without some changes. In other respects, the box 20k has a structure similar to that of the box 20 of the first embodiment shown in FIG. 7, but with or without some changes. The box 20k can thus be structured by a combination of the container assembly 200k and the adapter 299k as described above.

E. Modification of leverage:

According to the above embodiment, the elastic member 682 is provided to be separated from the lever 80 (FIG. 22). The lever 80 may be made of an elastically deformable material. A modification of the leverage is explained with reference to FIGS. 39 and 40.

39A and 39B illustrate the structure of a lever 80a according to a modification. FIG. 39A is a perspective view showing the appearance of the lever 80a, and FIG. 39B is a side view showing the appearance of the lever 80a. The difference from the lever 80 of the first embodiment is that the lever 80 a additionally has an arm member 890 that can be elastically deformed, has an operating member 830 of a different shape, and does not include a groove 870. In other respects, the lever 80a has a structure similar to that of the lever 80 according to the first embodiment (FIG. 19). The lever 80a is made of a synthetic resin, such as polypropylene.

Figure 40 illustrates the attachment of the cassette 20 to a holder 60a. According to this embodiment, the cassette 20 has a first cassette-side restricting portion 210a, which does not have a second portion 214 (FIG. 12). The shaft member main body 850 of the lever 80 a is attached to the first device-side side wall member 603. When the lever 80a is rotated around the shaft main body 850, the arm member 890a abuts a protrusion 603t formed as a part of the first device-side side wall member 603 which is elastically deformed.

F. Modification of the terminals on the box side:

41A to 41C show modifications of the shape of the terminals on the circuit board. The difference from the circuit board 40 shown in FIG. 10A is that the circuit boards 40c to 40e have terminals 431 to 439 of different shapes. The respective terminals on the circuit board 40c shown in FIG. 41A and on the circuit board 40d shown in FIG. 41B have irregular shapes instead of the approximately rectangular shape according to the first embodiment (FIG. 10A). In the circuit board 40e shown in FIG. 41C, nine terminals 431 to 439 are arrayed into one line, of which the attachment detection terminals 435 and 439 are located on both ends, and the attachment detection terminals 431 and 434 are respectively located at the attachment Between the detection terminal 435 and the power terminal 436 and between the detection terminal 439 and the data terminal 438. In these circuit boards 40c to 40e, the contact portions cp of these terminals 431 to 439 (which are in contact with the device-side terminals corresponding to these terminals 431 to 439) have the same configuration as the circuit board 400 shown in FIG. 10A Configuration. The individual terminals may have various shapes as long as the contact portions cp have the same configuration.

G. Other modifications:

The invention has been explained in detail above with reference to illustrative embodiments. However, the present invention is not limited In the above embodiments, a large number of changes and modifications can be made to these embodiments without departing from the scope of the present invention. Some examples of possible modifications are described below.

G-1. First modification:

According to the above embodiment, the second box-side restricting portion 220 is provided on the fourth surface 204, but may be omitted as appropriate. For example, when there is a relatively small gap between the case 20 and each groove of the holder 60, the whole or part of the outer surface of the fourth surface 204 can be abutted with the abutment of the second device-side sidewall member 604 The movement of the fourth surface 204 side of the box body 20 in the + Z axis direction is restricted without using the second box side restricting portion 220. This holds the box body 20 in the holder 60. According to another embodiment, an elastic member made of, for example, rubber may be provided between the fourth face 204 of the case 20 and the second device-side sidewall member 604 of the holder 60. The movement of the fourth surface 204 side of the box body 20 in the + Z axis direction can be restricted by the frictional force of the elastic member against the fourth surface 204 of the box body 20 and the second device side wall member 604 of the holder 60. The elastic member may be a separate member from the box body 20 or the holder 60, or may be engaged with the fourth surface 204 of the box body 20 or the second device-side sidewall member 604 of the holder 60. In applications without the second box-side restriction portion 220, the second equipment-side restriction element 620 (FIG. 15) provided on the second equipment-side side wall member 604 may also be omitted.

According to the above embodiment, the second box-side restricting portion 220 is a protruding portion, but may be another form, for example, a concave portion. In the latter application, the second device-side restricting element 620 provided on the second device-side sidewall member 604 may be a protruding portion. According to another embodiment, the holder 60 may have an additional component configured to press the fourth surface 204 side of the second surface 202 of the cassette 20 in the -Z axis direction. For example, the holder 60 may have a slidable rod member. After the cassette 20 is placed in the cassette chamber 602, the fourth surface 204 side of the second surface 202 of the cassette 20 can be pressed by the lever member.

G-2. Second modification:

According to the above embodiment, the first box-side restricting portion 210 is provided near the crossing portion 295, but may also be provided on any third surface 203 in the range 40Y. At the desired position, it may extend outside the range 40Y. (Figure 12). Positioning the first case-side restricting portion 210 within the range 40 achieves fine adjustment of the direction of the inclined surface on which the case-side terminal is mounted. This ensures a stable electrical connection between the box-side terminals and the equipment-side terminals.

G-3. Third modification:

According to the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 22, the lever 80 has a pair of shaft body 850, and the holder 690 has a bearing element 654. According to another embodiment, the lever 80 may have a load bearing element, and the holder 690 may have a shaft body. According to the above embodiment, the lever 80 and the holder 690 including the second holder part 680 are unified and attached to the holder 60 for simple assembly of the printing press. However, the holder 690 is not necessary. According to another embodiment, the bearing member may be formed with the outer wall 603W of the holder 60 to receive and fix the lever 80.

G-4. Fourth modification:

As mentioned above, the present invention is not limited to inkjet printers and their ink cartridges, but is applicable to any one of various liquid ejection apparatuses and liquid containers configured to eject a liquid other than ink, By way of example and not limitation, the liquid ejecting apparatus and its liquid container are given below: 1. an image recording apparatus such as a facsimile machine; 2. a non-ferrous material ejecting apparatus for manufacturing an image display device ( (E.g., liquid crystal display) color filters; 3. electrode material spraying equipment for forming (for example) electrodes of organic EL (electroluminescence) displays and field emission displays (FED); 4. Liquid spraying equipment configured to spray a bio-organic material-containing liquid used for manufacturing a biochip; 5. Sample spraying equipment used as a precision pipette; 6. Lubricating oil spraying equipment; 7. Resin solution spraying equipment; 8. Liquid spraying equipment for precise spraying of lubricating oil at precision machines including watches and cameras; 9. Liquid spraying equipment configured to apply resins such as ultraviolet curable A transparent resin solution of the solution is sprayed onto a substrate to manufacture a hemispherical microlens (optical lens) for, for example, an optical communication element; 10. a liquid spraying device configured to spray an acid or alkali An etching solution to etch the substrate; and 11. (11) a liquid ejecting apparatus equipped with a liquid ejecting head for ejecting a droplet of an extremely small volume of another arbitrary liquid.

"Liquid droplet" means a state of a liquid ejected from a liquid ejecting device, and may be in a granular shape, a teardrop shape, or a tapered shape. "Liquid" as used herein may be any material that can be ejected by a liquid ejection device. A "liquid" may be any material that is in a liquid phase. For example, the "liquid" includes liquid materials with high or low viscosity, sols, gel water, various inorganic and organic solvents, solutions, liquid resins, and liquid metals (metal melts). "Liquid" is not limited to the liquid state as one of the three states of matter, but includes particles of functional solid materials (such as pigment particles or metal particles) dissolved in, dispersed in, or mixed with a solvent. Solutions, dispersions and mixtures. Typical examples of the liquid include the inks and liquid crystals described in the above embodiments. "Ink" includes, but is not limited to, general water-based and oil-based inks, and various liquid compositions such as gel inks and hot-melt inks.

G-5. Fifth modification:

The present invention can be achieved by the following changes. In each of these variations, the symbols in parentheses after the elements correspond to the symbols of the individual elements explained in the first embodiment.

First change

G-5-1. First change:

A cassette (20) removably attached to a printing device (50) includes a first surface (201) configured to form an outer surface of the cassette, the first surface (201 ) Has an ink supply structure (280) connected to the printing device; a second side (202) opposite to the first side (201); a third side (203) configured to have a connection with the One side (291) connected to the second surface (202) and the other side (290) opposite to the one side (291), the third surface (203) is located at a position opposite to a relative direction (Z-axis direction). Between the first surface (201) and the second surface (202), the first surface (201) and the second surface (202) face each other in the opposite direction; a fourth surface (204), which is opposite to The third face (203) is opposite, the fourth face (204) is configured to connect with the first face (201) and the second face (202); a corner section (265) is configured to form An external surface (265) connecting the first surface (201) and the third surface (203); a box-side terminal (400) provided on the corner section (265), the box side The terminal (400) is configured to automatically connect one of the case (20) to the printing device (50). The device-side terminal (700) of the printing device (50) receives an external force pressing upward on the case (20); and a first case-side restriction portion (210) provided on the third surface (203) ) And configured to be locked in the attached state by a lever (80) of the printing device (50), and thereby restrict the movement of the box (20) in an upward pressing direction, wherein the The first case-side restricting portions (210) are provided at a position close to one of the case-side terminals (400).

G-5-2. Second change:

A cassette (20) removably attached to a printing device (50) includes a first surface (201) configured to form an outer surface of the cassette, the first surface (201 ) Has an ink supply structure (280) connected to the printing device; a second side (202) opposite to the first side (201); a third side (203) configured to have a connection with the A side (291) connected to the second surface (202), and opposite to the one side (291) and located on the first surface (201) and the second surface (202) with respect to a relative direction (Z-axis direction) Between the other side (290), the first surface (201) and the second surface (202) are opposed to each other in the opposite direction; a fourth surface (204) is opposite to the third surface (203), and the fourth surface ( 204) configured to connect the first surface (201) and the second surface (202); a corner section (265) configured to form a connection between the first surface (201) and the third surface ( 203) one of the outer surfaces (265); box-side terminals (400) provided on the corner section (265), the box-side terminals (400) are configured to be in the box (20) Receiving an external force pressing the case (20) upward from the device-side terminal (700) of the printing device (50) to one of the printing devices (50) in an attached state; and a first case-side restricting portion (210) provided on the third side (203) and configured to lock in the attached state by a lever (80) of the printing device (50) and thus limit the box (20 ) Movement in an upward pressing direction, wherein the first box-side restricting portion (210) is located closer to the other side (290) than to the one side (291).

G-5-3. Third change

A cassette (20) removably attached to a printing device (50) includes a first surface (201) configured to form an outer surface of the cassette, the first surface (201 ) Has an ink supply structure (280) connected to the printing device; a second side (202) opposite to the first side (201); a third side (203) configured to have a connection with the A side (291) connected to the second surface (202), and opposite to the one side (291) and located on the first surface (201) and the second surface (202) with respect to a relative direction (Z-axis direction) Between the other side (290), the first surface (201) and the second surface (202) face each other in the opposite direction; a fourth surface (204), which is opposite to the third surface (203) In contrast, the fourth surface (204) is configured to connect with the first surface (201) and the second surface (202); a corner section (265) is configured to form a connection with the first surface (201) ) And an external surface (265) of the third surface (203); box-side terminals (400) are provided on the corner section (265), and the box-side terminals (400) are configured to From one of the box (20) to the printing device (50) in an attached state from the printing device (5 0) the device-side terminal (700) receives an external force pressing the box (20) upward; and a first box-side restricting portion (210), which is provided on the third surface (203) and passes through Configured to In the attached state, it is locked by a lever (80) of the printing device (50) and thus restricts the movement of the case (20) in an upward pressing direction, wherein the first case-side restriction portion (210) The system is provided at a position close to the other side (290).

As in the first embodiment described above, any one of the first to third variations advantageously prevents misalignment of the position of the box-side terminal with respect to the printing device, and therefore ensures that Stable electrical connection. In any of the first change to the third change, the direction from the first surface side to the second surface side in the opposite direction (Z-axis direction) in the attached state is the + Z-axis direction and from the first When the direction from the second surface side to the first surface side is the -Z axis direction, the first box-side restricting portion is preferably located on the -Z axis direction side of the rotation axis of the lever.

G-5-4. Fourth change:

A cartridge (20) removably attached to a printing device (50) includes: an ink supply structure (280) connected to the printing device; and a cartridge-side terminal (400) configured to Receiving an external force upwardly pressing one of the cartridges (20) from the device-side terminal (700) of the printing device (50) in the attached state of the cartridge (20) to one of the printing devices (50); and The first case-side restricting portion (210), which is located on the same side as the case-side terminals (400) and is configured to be leveraged by one of the printing devices (50) in the attached state (80) is locked, and therefore the movement of the box body (20) in an upward pressing direction is restricted, wherein the first box-side limiting portion (210) is located near the box-side terminals (700).

When the upward pressing direction is the + Z axis direction and the direction opposite to the upward pressing direction is the -Z axis direction, the first box-side restricting portion is preferably located on the -Z axis direction side of the rotation axis of the lever.

As in the first embodiment described above, the fourth variation advantageously prevents misalignment of the position of the box-side terminals with respect to the printing device, and therefore ensures stable electrical connection between the box-side terminals and the device-side terminals.

G-6. Sixth modification:

The present invention can be achieved by the following changes. In each of these changes, in The symbols in parentheses after the elements correspond to the symbols of the individual elements explained in the first embodiment.

G-6-1. First change

A cassette (20) removably attached to a printing device (50) includes a first surface (201) configured to form an outer surface of the cassette, the first surface (210) ) Has a printing material supply structure (280) connected to the printing equipment; a second side (202) opposite to the first side (201); a third side (203) configured to have a One side (291) connected to the second surface (202) and the other side (290) opposite to the one side (291), the third surface (203) is located at a position opposite to a relative direction (Z-axis direction). Between the first surface (201) and the second surface (202), the relative direction is a direction in which the first surface (201) and the second surface (202) are opposite to each other; a fourth surface (204) opposite to the third surface (203), the fourth surface (204) is configured to traverse the first surface (201) and the second surface (202); a fifth surface (205) , Which is configured to traverse the first face (201), the second face (202), the third face (203), and the fourth face (204); a sixth face (206), which intersects with the The fifth face (205) is opposite; a corner section (265) is configured to form a connection between the first face (201) and the third face (203) ) One of the outer surfaces (265); the box-side terminals (400) are provided on the corner section (265), the box-side terminals (400) are configured to connect the box (20) to One of the printing equipment (50) receives an external force pressing the casing (20) upward from an equipment-side terminal (700) of the printing equipment (50) in an attached state; and a first casing-side restricting portion ( 210), which is provided on the third side (203) and is configured to be locked in the attached state by a lever (80) of the printing device (50) and thus restrict the case (20) Movement in an upward pressing direction, in which the first box-side restricting portion (210) is provided with respect to the relative direction (Y-axis direction) of the fifth surface (205) and the sixth surface (206) There is a range (40Y) of one of the box-side terminals (400) inside, not outside.

G-6-2. Second change

A cartridge (20) removably attached to a printing device (50), comprising: a printing Brush material supply structure (280), which is connected to the printing device; box-side terminals (400), which are provided on an external surface of the box (20), and the box-side terminals (400) are configured Receiving an external force pressing upward on one of the cartridges (20) from a device-side terminal (700) of the printing device (50) in an attached state from the cartridge (20) to one of the printing devices (50); and A first case-side restricting portion (211) provided on the same external surface side as the case-side terminals (400), the first case-side restricting portion (211) being configured to In the attached state, it is locked by a lever (80) of the printing device (50) to limit the movement of the box (20) in an upward pressing direction (+ Z axis direction), wherein In the width direction, the first case restricting element (211) is located at the inner side rather than the outer side of a range (40Y) in which the case-side terminals (400) are provided. According to the first variation or the second variation, the box-side terminal receives a force from the device-side terminal in the upward pressing direction. This achieves fine adjustment of the direction in which the box-side terminals are provided, and ensures a stable electrical connection between the box-side terminals and the device-side terminals. According to the first variation or the second variation, the first box-side restricting portion is preferably located below the rotation axis of the lever. "Below" here corresponds to, for example, the -Z axis direction or the opposite direction of the upward pressing direction.

G-7. Seventh modification:

The present invention can be achieved by the following description and changes. In each of these descriptions, the symbols in parentheses after the elements correspond to the symbols of the individual elements explained in the first embodiment.

G-7-1. First change

An ink cartridge (20) adapted to be removably mounted on an inkjet printing device (50), the inkjet printing device (50) comprising a plurality of device-side contact forming members (731 to 739), the plurality Each device-side contact forming member is structured and configured to apply an elastic force (Pt) to the ink cartridge body (20) when the ink cartridge bodies (20) are pressed against the device-side contact forming members (731 to 739), The inkjet printing equipment (50) also includes: a lever (80) having an engaging portion (810); and an ink cartridge body (20) including a front surface (203) and a rear surface. (204), a box body (22) with a top (202) and a bottom (201), the front (203) and the back (204) are opposite each other and the top (202) and the bottom (201) are opposite each other; An electric device; an ink chamber (200) for storing ink; an ink supply structure (280) positioned at the bottom (201) of the box body (22), adapted and configured to transfer Ink is supplied from the ink chamber (200) to the inkjet printing device (50), and the ink supply structure (280) has a leading edge defining an installation direction (SD) of a plane (BP) of the ink cartridge (20) (288); a terminal bearing structure (408), which is located near the front face (203) of the box body (22), the terminal bearing structure (408) has a plurality of conductive terminals coupled to the electrical device ( 400), the terminals (400) are adapted and arranged on the terminal bearing structure (408) to be mounted on the terminals (400) when the ink cartridge (20) is installed on the printing equipment (50). The contact portion (cp) makes contact with the contact forming members (731 to 739) and receives the elastic force (Pt) from the contact forming members, and the contact portions (cp) are arranged substantially neither parallel to nor perpendicular to One of the planes (BP) defined by the leading edge (288) in a contact portion plane (TP); and a first restricting portion (210) adapted to engage the engaging portion (810) of the lever (80) In order to restrict the ink cartridge body (20) from moving in a direction (RD) opposite to the installation direction (SD), the engaging portion (212) of the first restricting portion (210) is located adjacent to the terminal bearing structure (408). ).

Some of the benefits of the aforementioned changes of the seventh modification will now be explained. When the ink cartridge is installed in the printing press, the terminals must be accurately positioned and stably fixed to ensure reliable electrical communication between the cartridge and the printing press. Since the engaging portion of the first restricting portion is located adjacent to the terminal bearing structure, the positioning action of the first restricting portion occurs close to the most needed positioning (ie, the terminal of the terminal bearing structure). Can properly offset the elastic force from the terminal on the device side. Moreover, it is possible to suppress the positional displacement of the terminal that may occur due to vibration during a printing operation. Therefore, the positioning of the terminals is more stable, so a stable electrical connection between the box-side terminals and the equipment-side terminals is maintained.

In addition, since the lever is not integrated with the case, the material used to make the case may be different from the material used to make the lever. Moreover, less attention can be paid to flexibility and durability It is required to pay more attention to other properties such as ink resistance to select the material of the box.

In addition, because the lever is not on the box, no special attention is required to prevent the creep deformation of the lever when the box is packaged for transportation and distribution. This simplifies packaging requirements and improves user convenience. Since the lever is not an integral part of the case, the case can be made smaller. This further allows for a reduction in the size of the packaging materials (such as paper or boxes) used to package the boxes for transportation or distribution of the boxes, thus advantageously reducing shipping costs and parts costs. Moreover, because the lever is not integrated with the case, the first case-side restricting portion can have a small size and a simple structure, and is similar to the structure described in, for example, US Publication No. 2005/0151811. Ratio has higher stiffness. This leads to a significant reduction in the possibility of plastic deformation of the restriction portion on the side of the first case. In the attached or installed state, the box can be maintained at the correct position in the box mounting structure. This maintains normal or good contact between the box-side terminals and the device-side terminals and reduces the possibility of poor electrical connectivity. . Because the first box-side restricting part can have a small size and simple structure, it is different from the box of US Publication No. 2005/0151811, and no special attention is required in the packaging of the box for transportation and distribution Prevent the creep deformation of the lever. This reduces packaging requirements and also improves user convenience.

The structure that connects the box terminal and the engaging portion of the box to each other may be only a rigid structure (which is not the case of the flexible lever of US Publication No. 2005/0151811). In this case, less vibration is transmitted from the engaging portion to the box terminal, so the electrical communication is more stable.

Since the contact part plane (TP) of the terminal is neither parallel to nor perpendicular to the plane (BP) defined by the leading edge (288), the surface of the box terminal can be properly wiped during the insertion of the box into the printing press . In addition, this configuration reduces or eliminates insulation debris (dust) that can be generated when the terminals of the printing machine are scraped against the circuit board for a long distance during the installation of the box.

Since the printing press terminal exerts an elastic force including a vector component in a direction in which the printing cartridge is detached from the printing press against the terminal of the printing cartridge, it is not necessary to provide a device such as the One of the springs 103 described in No. 6,955,422. In other words, the elastic force from the printer-side terminal is used to press the printer-side terminal and the box-side terminal together, and also in the direction for removing from the printer when the engagement between the first restriction portion and the printer lever is released. Move the case. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide an additional spring as in the case of US Patent No. 6,955,422, which achieves a simpler structure and reduced cost.

Since the first restricting portion is adapted to engage with the engaging portion of the lever to restrict the movement of the case in a direction opposite to the installation direction, as a result, when the case is installed in the printing machine, the position of the case terminal will be determined by the device The elastic force of the side contact forming member is maintained at an appropriate position with respect to the mounting direction and by the first restricting portion with respect to a direction opposite to the mounting direction. Since the box terminals are "clamped" in this manner, they are firmly fixed to prevent movement in both the mounting direction and the direction opposite to the mounting direction. Therefore, compared with the one-sided limitation of the elastic member 40 and related configurations of US Patent No. 7,008,053, misalignment or disconnection between the box terminal and the device-side contact forming member is less likely to occur.

Adapt 1

The ink cartridge as described above, wherein the contact portion plane (TP) forms an angle between about 25 degrees and 40 degrees with the plane (BP) defined by the leading edge (288).

As discussed with reference to FIGS. 42A to 45, when the contact portion plane forms an angle between about 25 and 40 degrees with respect to the plane defined by the leading edge, excessive wiping is prevented and sufficient force can be applied to prevent half insertion.

Adapt 2

The ink cartridge as described above, wherein when the front surface (203) of the cartridge body (20) is viewed downward with the ink supply structure (280) facing downward, the engaging portions (212) of the first restricting portion (210) are located in a plurality of The left side of the rightmost contact portion in the terminal (400) and the right side of the leftmost contact portion in the plurality of terminals (400).

When the ink cartridge is mounted on a printing device, if the cartridge is held too firmly, some of the parts are formed by contact with the device side (for example, terminal 734 in FIG. 31). Contact may not be secure. By positioning the engaging portion of the first restricting portion to the left of the rightmost contact portion of the plurality of terminals and to the right of the leftmost contact portion of the plurality of terminals, the ink cartridge can be sufficiently inclined so that the plurality of terminals and The electrical connection between the device-side contact-forming components can be even more stable.

Adaptation 3

The ink cartridge (20) as described above, further comprising a second restricting portion (220) on the rear surface (204) of the ink cartridge (20), the second restricting portion (220) being adapted and assembled State to engage with a respective part (620) of an inkjet printing device (50), wherein when measuring a distance in a direction orthogonal to a plane (BP) defined by a leading edge (288), the second restricting part The distance (B) between the engaging portion of (220) and the plane (BP) defined by the leading edge (288) is greater than the engaging portion (212) of the first restricting portion (210) and the plane defined by the leading edge (288) (BP) Distance (A).

Compared with the case where the engaging portion of the first restricting portion is located farther away from the plane defined by the leading edge than the engaging portion of the second restricting portion, the engaging portion of the second restricting portion is located more than the engaging portion of the first restricting portion. Moving farther away from the plane defined by the leading edge can more effectively reduce the possibility that the first-side restriction portion will become disengaged from the engagement portion of the printing press.

Adapt 4

The ink cartridge body (20) as described above, wherein the ink cartridge body is viewed from the side (203) from which the engaging portion (212) of the first restricting portion (210) is on the right side and the ink supply structure (280) faces downward. 20), when measuring the distance in a direction orthogonal to the plane (BP) defined by the leading edge (288), the engaging portion (212) of the first restricting portion (210) when the box (20) is installed ) And the plane (BP) defined by the leading edge (288) is smaller than the distance (A) between a pivot point (800c) of the lever (80) and the plane (BP) defined by the leading edge (288) Distance (C).

When the box is installed, the distance between the engaging portion of the first restricting portion and the plane defined by the leading edge is less than the distance between one of the pivot points of the lever and the plane defined by the leading edge At this time, the lever is used to restrict the movement of the box. This reduces the possibility that the first restricting portion becomes unlocked or disengaged from the engaging portion of the lever, so that a stable electrical connection is formed between the plurality of terminals and the contact forming member and the possibility of a bad connection is reduced. When a force is applied from the contact-forming member to the mounted case, the first restricting portion is movable around a rotation axis of the lever. This reduces the possibility that the engaging portion of the first restriction portion becomes decoupled from the engaging portion of the lever.

Adapt 5

The ink cartridge body as described above, wherein when the ink cartridge body (20) is viewed from the side (203) where the engaging portion (212) of the first restricting portion (210) is on the right side and the ink supply structure (280) faces downward. When the box body is installed, the engaging portion (212) of the first restricting portion (210) is on the left side of a pivot point (800c) of the lever.

When the case is installed such that when the case is viewed from the side where the engaging portion of the first restricting portion is on the right side and the ink supply structure faces downward, the engaging portion of the first restricting portion is to the left of a pivot point of the lever, The first restricting portion generates a rotating moment on the lever to rotate the lever about the axis of rotation of the lever in a direction opposite to the unlocking direction. This reduces the possibility that the engaging portion of the first restricting portion is unlocked from the engaging portion of the lever, and further ensures a stable electrical connection between the plurality of terminals and the device-side contact forming member. Even when the box receives force, the first restricting portion will move with the box. This movement reduces the possibility that the engaging portion of the first restricting portion is unlocked from the engaging portion of the lever.

Adaptation 6

The ink cartridge as described above, wherein when the front surface (203) of the cartridge body (22) is viewed downward with the ink supply structure (280) facing down, at least a part of the engaging portion (212) of the first restricting portion (210) It is located at the substantially widthwise center of the ink cartridge (20).

By providing the first restricting portion at a position such that at least a part of the engaging portion of the first restricting portion is substantially at the center in the width direction of the ink cartridge body, the first restricting portion is positioned close to the plurality of terminals to The electrical connection between the plurality of terminals and the device-side contact-forming component can be stabilized.

Adaptation 7

The ink cartridge as described above, wherein the plane (BP) defined by the leading edge (288) is substantially flush with the bottom (201).

G-7-2. Second change

An ink cartridge (20) adapted to be detachably mounted on an inkjet printing device (50), the inkjet printing device (50) including a plurality of device-side contact forming members (731 to 739), Constructed and configured to apply elastic force (Pt) to the ink cartridge (20) when the ink cartridge (20) is pressed against the device-side contact forming members (731 to 739), the inkjet printing device ( 50) also includes: a lever (80) having an engaging portion (810); the ink cartridge body (20) including a front surface (203), a rear surface (204), a top portion (202) and a A box body (22) at the bottom (201), the front face (203) and the back face (204) facing each other and the top (202) and the bottom face (201) facing each other; an electrical device; an ink chamber (200 ), Which is used for storing ink; an ink supply structure (280), which is positioned at the bottom (201) of the case body (22), is adapted and configured to supply ink from the ink chamber (200) to The inkjet printing device (50), the ink supply structure (280) has a leading edge (288) defining a mounting direction (SD) of a plane (BP) of the ink cartridge (20); a terminal bearing structure (408) ), Which is located at At the front face (203) of the box body (22), the terminal bearing structure (408) has a plurality of conductive terminals (400) coupled to the electrical device, and the terminals (400) are adapted and arranged in the The terminal carrying structure (408) is in contact with the contact forming member (731 to 739) of the inkjet printing apparatus (50) when the ink cartridge (20) is mounted on the printing apparatus (50), and The equal contact forming member receives the elastic force (Pt), and the terminals (400) are substantially arranged in a terminal plane (TP) of the plane that is neither parallel to nor perpendicular to the leading edge (288); and a first A restricting portion (210) adapted to be engaged with the engaging portion (810) of the lever (80) to restrict the movement of the ink cartridge body (20) in a direction (RD) opposite to the installation direction (SD). An engaging portion (212) of a restricting portion (210) is located adjacent to the terminal bearing structure (408).

Some of the benefits of the aforementioned changes of the seventh modification will now be explained. When the ink cartridge is installed in the printing press, the terminals must be accurately positioned and stably fixed to ensure reliable electrical communication between the cartridge and the printing press. Since the engaging portion of the first restricting portion is located adjacent to the terminal bearing structure, the positioning action of the first restricting portion occurs close to the most needed positioning (ie, the terminal of the terminal bearing structure). Can properly offset the elastic force from the terminal on the device side. Moreover, it is possible to suppress the positional displacement of the terminal that may occur due to vibration during a printing operation. Therefore, the positioning of the terminals is more stable, so a stable electrical connection between the box-side terminals and the equipment-side terminals is maintained.

In addition, since the lever is not integrated with the case, the material used to make the case may be different from the material used to make the lever. Moreover, less attention can be paid to flexibility and durability requirements and more attention to other properties such as ink resistance to select the material of the box.

In addition, because the lever is not on the box, no special attention is required to prevent the creep deformation of the lever when the box is packaged for transportation and distribution. This simplifies packaging requirements and improves user convenience. Since the lever is not an integral part of the case, the case can be made smaller. This further allows for a reduction in the size of the packaging materials (such as paper or boxes) used to package the boxes for transportation or distribution of the boxes, thus advantageously reducing shipping costs and parts costs. Moreover, because the lever is not integrated with the case, the first case-side restricting portion can have a small size and a simple structure, and is similar to the structure described in, for example, US Publication No. 2005/0151811. Ratio has higher stiffness. This leads to a significant reduction in the possibility of plastic deformation of the restriction portion on the side of the first case. In the attached or installed state, the box can be maintained at the correct position in the box mounting structure. This maintains normal or good contact between the box-side terminals and the device-side terminals and reduces the possibility of poor electrical connectivity. . Because the first box-side restricting part can have a small size and simple structure, it is different from the box of US Publication No. 2005/0151811, and no special attention is required in the packaging of the box for transportation and distribution Prevent the creep deformation of the lever. This reduces packaging requirements and also improves user convenience.

The structure that connects the box terminal and the engaging portion of the box to each other may be only a rigid structure (which is not the case of the flexible lever of US Publication No. 2005/0151811). In this case, less vibration is transmitted from the engaging portion to the box terminal, so the electrical communication is more stable.

Since the terminal plane (TP) of the terminal is neither parallel to nor perpendicular to the plane (BP) defined by the leading edge (288), the surface of the box terminal can be properly wiped during the insertion of the box into the printing machine. In addition, this configuration reduces or eliminates insulation debris (dust) that can be generated when the terminals of the printing machine are scraped against the circuit board for a long distance during the installation of the box.

Since the printing press terminal applies an elastic force including a vector component in a direction in which the printing cartridge is detached from the printing press against the box terminal, it is not necessary to provide a spring such as the spring 103 described in US Patent No. 6,955,422. In other words, the elastic force from the printer-side terminal is used to press the printer-side terminal and the box-side terminal together, and also in the direction for removing from the printer when the engagement between the first restriction portion and the printer lever is released. Move the case. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide an additional spring as in the case of US Patent No. 6,955,422, which achieves a simpler structure and reduced cost.

Since the first restricting portion is adapted to engage with the engaging portion of the lever to restrict the movement of the case in a direction opposite to the installation direction, as a result, when the case is installed in the printing machine, the position of the case terminal will be determined by the device The elastic force of the side contact forming member is maintained at an appropriate position with respect to the mounting direction and by the first restricting portion with respect to a direction opposite to the mounting direction. Since the box terminals are "clamped" in this manner, they are firmly fixed to prevent movement in both the mounting direction and the direction opposite to the mounting direction. Therefore, compared with the one-sided limitation of the elastic member 40 and related configurations of US Patent No. 7,008,053, misalignment or disconnection between the box terminal and the device-side contact forming member is less likely to occur.

Adapt 1

The ink cartridge as described above, wherein the terminal plane (TP) is at an angle between about 25 degrees and 40 degrees with the plane (BP) defined by the leading edge (288).

As discussed with reference to FIGS. 42A to 45, the terminal plane is relative to the plane defined by the leading edge. When the face is at an angle between about 25 and 40 degrees, excessive wiping is prevented and sufficient force can be applied to prevent half insertion.

Adapt 2

The ink cartridge as described above, wherein when the front surface (203) of the cartridge body (20) is viewed downward with the ink supply structure (280) facing downward, the engaging portions (212) of the first restricting portion (210) are located in a plurality of One of the terminals (400) is to the left of the right edge of one of the rightmost terminals and one of the plurality of terminals (400) is to the left of one of the leftmost terminals.

When the ink cartridge is mounted on a printing device, if the cartridge is held too securely, some of the components forming contact with the device side (for example, terminal 734 in FIG. 31) may not be securely contacted. By positioning the engaging portion of the first restricting portion to the left of the right edge of one of the rightmost terminals of one of the plurality of terminals and to the right of the left edge of one of the leftmost terminals of the plurality of terminals, the ink cartridge can be fully inclined Placed so that the electrical connection between the plurality of terminals and the device-side contact-forming component can be even more stable.

Adaptation 3

The ink cartridge (20) as described above, further comprising a second restricting portion (220) on the rear surface (204) of the ink cartridge (20), the second restricting portion (220) being adapted and assembled State to engage with a respective part (620) of an inkjet printing device (50), wherein when measuring a distance in a direction orthogonal to a plane (BP) defined by a leading edge (288), the second restricting part The distance (B) between the engaging portion of (220) and the plane (BP) defined by the leading edge (288) is greater than the engaging portion (212) of the first restricting portion (210) and the plane defined by the leading edge (288) (BP) Distance (A).

Compared with the case where the engaging portion of the first restricting portion is farther from the plane defined by the leading edge than the engaging portion of the second restricting portion, the engaging portion at the second restricting portion is located farther away than the engaging portion of the first restricting portion. At the plane defined by the leading edge, it is possible to more effectively reduce the possibility that the first-side restricting portion will become disengaged from the engaging portion of the printing press.

Adapt 4

The ink cartridge body (20) as described above, wherein the ink cartridge body is viewed from the side (203) from which the engaging portion (212) of the first restricting portion (210) is on the right side and the ink supply structure (280) faces downward. 20), when measuring the distance in a direction orthogonal to the plane (BP) defined by the leading edge (288), the engaging portion (212) of the first restricting portion (210) when the box (20) is installed ) And the plane (BP) defined by the leading edge (288) is smaller than the distance (A) between a pivot point (800c) of the lever (80) and the plane (BP) defined by the leading edge (288) Distance (C).

When the distance between the engaging portion of the first restricting portion and the plane defined by the leading edge is smaller than the distance between a pivot point of the lever and the plane defined by the leading edge when the box is installed, the lever is used to restrict the box Body movement. This reduces the possibility that the first restricting portion becomes unlocked or disengaged from the engaging portion of the lever, so that a stable electrical connection is formed between the plurality of terminals and the contact forming member and the possibility of a bad connection is reduced. When a force is applied from the contact-forming member to the mounted case, the first restricting portion is movable around a rotation axis of the lever. This reduces the possibility that the engaging portion of the first restriction portion becomes decoupled from the engaging portion of the lever.

Adapt 5

The ink cartridge body as described above, wherein when the ink cartridge body (20) is viewed from the side (203) where the engaging portion (212) of the first restricting portion (210) is on the right side and the ink supply structure (280) faces downward. When the box body is installed, the engaging portion (212) of the first restricting portion (210) is on the left side of a pivot point (800c) of the lever.

When the case is installed such that when the case is viewed from the side where the engaging portion of the first restricting portion is on the right side and the ink supply structure faces downward, the engaging portion of the first restricting portion is to the left of a pivot point of the lever, The first restricting portion generates a rotating moment on the lever to rotate the lever about the axis of rotation of the lever in a direction opposite to the unlocking direction. This reduces the possibility that the engaging portion of the first restricting portion is unlocked from the engaging portion of the lever, and further ensures a stable electrical connection between the plurality of terminals and the device-side contact forming member. Even when the box receives force, the first restricting portion will move with the box. This movement reduces the possibility that the engaging portion of the first restricting portion is unlocked from the engaging portion of the lever.

Adaptation 6

The ink cartridge as described above, wherein when the front surface (203) of the cartridge body (22) is viewed downward with the ink supply structure (280) facing down, at least a part of the engaging portion (212) of the first restricting portion (210) It is located at the substantially widthwise center of the ink cartridge (20).

By providing the first restricting portion at a position such that at least a part of the engaging portion of the first restricting portion is substantially at the center in the width direction of the ink cartridge body, the first restricting portion is positioned close to the plurality of terminals to The electrical connection between the plurality of terminals and the device-side contact-forming component can be stabilized.

Adaptation 7

The ink cartridge as described above, wherein the plane (BP) defined by the leading edge (288) is substantially flush with the bottom (201).

G-7-3. Third change

An ink cartridge (20) adapted to be detachably mounted on an inkjet printing device (50), the inkjet printing device (50) including a plurality of device-side contact forming members (731 to 739), Constructed and configured to apply elastic force (Pt) to the ink cartridge (20) when the ink cartridge (20) is pressed against the device-side contact forming members (731 to 739), the inkjet printing device ( 50) also includes: a lever (80) having an engaging portion (810); the ink cartridge body (20) including a first surface (203), a second surface (204), and a third surface ( 202) and a box body (22), one of the fourth surface (201), wherein the first surface (203) and the second surface (204) are opposite each other and the third surface (202) and the fourth surface (201) Opposite each other; an electrical device; an ink chamber (200) for storing ink; an ink supply structure (280) positioned at the fourth surface (201) of the case body (22), adapted and Configured to supply ink from the ink chamber (200) to the inkjet printing device (50), the ink supply structure (280) has a mounting direction (SD) defining a plane (BP) of the ink cartridge (20) ) Leading edge (288); A terminal bearing structure (408), which is located near the first surface (203) of the box body (22), the terminal bearing structure (408) has a plurality of conductive terminals coupled to the electrical device (400), the contact portions (cp) are adapted and configured on the contact portion structure (408) to be mounted on the terminals (400) when the ink cartridge (20) is mounted on the printing equipment (50) The contact portion (cp) comes into contact with the contact forming members (731 to 739) and receives the elastic force (Pt) from the contact forming members. The contact portions (400) are arranged substantially neither parallel to nor One of the planes perpendicular to the leading edge (288) in the contact portion plane (TP); and a first restricting portion (210) adapted to engage the engaging portion (810) of the lever (80) to restrict the ink cartridge body (20) Movement in a direction (RD) opposite to the installation direction (SD), the engaging portion (212) of the first restricting portion (210) is located adjacent to the terminal bearing structure (408).

Some of the benefits of the aforementioned changes of the seventh modification will now be explained. When the ink cartridge is installed in the printing press, the terminals must be accurately positioned and stably fixed to ensure reliable electrical communication between the cartridge and the printing press. Since the engaging portion of the first restricting portion is located adjacent to the terminal bearing structure, the positioning action of the first restricting portion occurs close to the most needed positioning (ie, the terminal of the terminal bearing structure). Can properly offset the elastic force from the terminal on the device side. Moreover, it is possible to suppress the positional displacement of the terminal that may occur due to vibration during a printing operation. Therefore, the positioning of the terminals is more stable, so a stable electrical connection between the box-side terminals and the equipment-side terminals is maintained.

In addition, since the lever is not integrated with the case, the material used to make the case may be different from the material used to make the lever. Moreover, less attention can be paid to flexibility and durability requirements and more attention to other properties such as ink resistance to select the material of the box.

In addition, because the lever is not on the box, no special attention is required to prevent the creep deformation of the lever when the box is packaged for transportation and distribution. This simplifies packaging requirements and improves user convenience. Since the lever is not an integral part of the case, the case can be made smaller. This further allows for a reduction in the size of the packaging materials (such as paper or boxes) used to package the boxes for transportation or distribution of the boxes, thus advantageously reducing shipping costs and parts costs. Moreover, since the lever is not integrated with the case, the first case-side restricting portion can have a small size and a simple structure, and (for example) with US Publication No. 2005/0151811 Compared with the structure described in No., it has higher rigidity. This leads to a significant reduction in the possibility of plastic deformation of the restriction portion on the side of the first case. In the attached or installed state, the box can be maintained at the correct position in the box mounting structure. This maintains normal or good contact between the box-side terminals and the device-side terminals and reduces the possibility of poor electrical connectivity. . Because the first box-side restricting part can have a small size and simple structure, it is different from the box of US Publication No. 2005/0151811, and no special attention is required in the packaging of the box for transportation and distribution Prevent the creep deformation of the lever. This reduces packaging requirements and also improves user convenience.

The structure that connects the box terminal and the engaging portion of the box to each other may be only a rigid structure (which is not the case of the flexible lever of US Publication No. 2005/0151811). In this case, less vibration is transmitted from the engaging portion to the box terminal, so the electrical communication is more stable.

Since the contact part plane (TP) of the terminal is neither parallel to nor perpendicular to the plane (BP) defined by the leading edge (288), the surface of the box terminal can be properly wiped during the insertion of the box into the printing press . In addition, this configuration reduces or eliminates insulation debris (dust) that can be generated when the terminals of the printing machine are scraped against the circuit board for a long distance during the installation of the box.

Since the printing press terminal applies an elastic force including a vector component in a direction in which the printing cartridge is detached from the printing press against the box terminal, it is not necessary to provide a spring such as the spring 103 described in US Patent No. 6,955,422. In other words, the elastic force from the printer-side terminal is used to press the printer-side terminal and the box-side terminal together, and also in the direction for removing from the printer when the engagement between the first restriction portion and the printer lever is released. Move the case. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide an additional spring as in the case of US Patent No. 6,955,422, which achieves a simpler structure and reduced cost.

Since the first restricting portion is adapted to engage with the engaging portion of the lever to restrict the movement of the case in a direction opposite to the installation direction, as a result, when the case is installed in the printing machine, the position of the case terminal will be determined by the device. The side contact forms the elastic force of the component relative to the The mounting direction is maintained at a proper position by the first restricting portion with respect to the direction opposite to the mounting direction. Since the box terminals are "clamped" in this manner, they are firmly fixed to prevent movement in both the mounting direction and the direction opposite to the mounting direction. Therefore, compared with the one-sided limitation of the elastic member 40 and related configurations of US Patent No. 7,008,053, misalignment or disconnection between the box terminal and the device-side contact forming member is less likely to occur.

Adapt 1

The ink cartridge as described above, wherein the contact portion plane (TP) forms an angle between about 25 degrees and 40 degrees with the plane (BP) defined by the leading edge (288).

As discussed with reference to FIGS. 42A to 45, when the contact portion plane forms an angle between about 25 and 40 degrees with respect to the plane defined by the leading edge, excessive wiping is prevented and sufficient force can be applied to prevent half insertion.

Adapt 2

The ink cartridge as described above, wherein when the first surface (203) of the cartridge body (20) is viewed downward with the ink supply structure (280) facing down, the engaging portion (212) of the first restricting portion (210) is located The left side of the rightmost contact portion in the plurality of terminals (400) and the right side of the leftmost contact portion in the plurality of terminals (400).

When the ink cartridge is mounted on a printing device, if the cartridge is held too securely, some of the components forming contact with the device side (for example, terminal 734 in FIG. 31) may not be securely contacted. By positioning the engaging portion of the first restricting portion to the left of the rightmost contact portion of the plurality of terminals and to the right of the leftmost contact portion of the plurality of terminals, the ink cartridge can be sufficiently inclined so that the plurality of terminals and The electrical connection between the device-side contact-forming components can be even more stable.

Adaptation 3

The ink cartridge (20) as described above, further comprising a second restricting portion (220) on the second surface (204) of the ink cartridge (20), the second restricting portion (220) being adapted And configured to mesh with a separate section (620) of an inkjet printing device (50), where When measuring the distance in one direction of the plane (BP) defined by the leading edge (288), the distance (B) between the engaging portion of the second restricting portion (220) and the plane (BP) defined by the leading edge (288) ) Is larger than the distance (A) between the engaging portion (212) of the first restricting portion (210) and the plane (BP) defined by the leading edge (288).

Compared with the case where the engaging portion of the first restricting portion is farther from the plane defined by the leading edge than the engaging portion of the second restricting portion, the engaging portion at the second restricting portion is located farther away than the engaging portion of the first restricting portion. At the plane defined by the leading edge, it is possible to more effectively reduce the possibility that the first-side restricting portion will become disengaged from the engaging portion of the printing press.

Adapt 4

The ink cartridge body (20) as described above, wherein the ink cartridge body is viewed from the side (203) from which the engaging portion (212) of the first restricting portion (210) is on the right side and the ink supply structure (280) faces downward. 20), when measuring the distance in a direction orthogonal to the plane (BP) defined by the leading edge (288), the engaging portion (212) of the first restricting portion (210) when the box (20) is installed ) And the plane (BP) defined by the leading edge (288) is smaller than the distance (A) between a pivot point (800c) of the lever (80) and the plane (BP) defined by the leading edge (288) Distance (C).

When the distance between the engaging portion of the first restricting portion and the plane defined by the leading edge is smaller than the distance between a pivot point of the lever and the plane defined by the leading edge when the box is installed, the lever is used to restrict the box Body movement. This reduces the possibility that the first restricting portion becomes unlocked or disengaged from the engaging portion of the lever, so that a stable electrical connection is formed between the plurality of terminals and the contact forming member and the possibility of a bad connection is reduced. When a force is applied from the contact-forming member to the mounted case, the first restricting portion is movable around a rotation axis of the lever. This reduces the possibility that the engaging portion of the first restriction portion becomes decoupled from the engaging portion of the lever.

Adapt 5

The ink cartridge body as described above, wherein when the ink cartridge body (20) is viewed from the side (203) where the engaging portion (212) of the first restricting portion (210) is on the right side and the ink supply structure (280) faces downward. When the box body is installed, the engaging portion (212) of the first restricting portion (210) is at Left of one of the pivot points (800c) of the lever.

When the case is installed such that when the case is viewed from the side where the engaging portion of the first restricting portion is on the right side and the ink supply structure faces downward, the engaging portion of the first restricting portion is to the left of a pivot point of the lever, The first restricting portion generates a rotating moment on the lever to rotate the lever about the axis of rotation of the lever in a direction opposite to the unlocking direction. This reduces the possibility that the engaging portion of the first restricting portion is unlocked from the engaging portion of the lever, and further ensures a stable electrical connection between the plurality of terminals and the device-side contact forming member. Even when the box receives force, the first restricting portion will move with the box. This movement reduces the possibility that the engaging portion of the first restricting portion is unlocked from the engaging portion of the lever.

Adaptation 6

The ink cartridge as described above, wherein when the first surface (203) of the cartridge body (22) is viewed downward with the ink supply structure (280) facing down, the engagement portion (212) of the first restricting portion (210) At least a portion is located at a substantially widthwise center of the ink cartridge body (20).

By providing the first restricting portion at a position such that at least a part of the engaging portion of the first restricting portion is substantially at the center in the width direction of the ink cartridge body, the first restricting portion is positioned close to the plurality of terminals to The electrical connection between the plurality of terminals and the device-side contact-forming component can be stabilized.

Adaptation 7

The ink cartridge as described above, wherein the plane (BP) defined by the leading edge (288) is substantially flush with the fourth surface (201).

G-7-4. Fourth change

An ink cartridge (20) adapted to be removably mounted on an inkjet printing device (50), the inkjet printing device (50) comprising a plurality of device-side contact forming members (731 to 739), the plurality Each device-side contact forming member (731 to 739) is structured and configured to apply an elastic force (Pt) to the ink cartridge when the ink cartridge body (20) is pressed against the device-side contact forming member (731 to 739). Body (20), the inkjet printing equipment (50) also includes: a lever (80), It has an engaging portion (810); an ink cartridge body (20), which includes a cartridge including a first surface (203), a second surface (204), a third surface (202), and a fourth surface (201) A body body (22), wherein the first surface (203) and the second surface (204) are opposed to each other and the third surface (202) and the fourth surface (201) are opposed to each other; an electrical device; an ink chamber (200) ), Which is used for storing ink; an ink supply structure (280), which is positioned at the fourth surface (201) of the case body (22), is adapted and configured to remove ink from the ink chamber (200) Supplied to the inkjet printing device (50), the ink supply structure (280) has a leading edge (288) defining a mounting direction (SD) of a plane (BP) of the ink cartridge (20); a terminal carrying structure (408), which is located near the first surface (203) of the box body (22), the terminal bearing structure (408) has a plurality of conductive terminals (400) coupled to the electrical device, and the terminals ( 400) is adapted and arranged on the terminal bearing structure (408) to make contact with the contact forming members (731 to 739) when the ink cartridge is mounted on the printing equipment (50) and to form components from these contacts The elastic force (Pt) is retracted, and the terminals (400) are substantially arranged in a terminal plane (TP) that is neither parallel to nor perpendicular to the leading edge (288), so that the contact from the equipment side forms the component ( A vector component of the elastic force (Pt) of 731 to 739) advances the ink cartridge in a direction (RD) opposite to the installation direction (SD); and a first restriction portion (210), which is adapted to interact with the lever The engaging portion (810) of (80) is engaged to restrict the ink cartridge body (20) from moving in a direction (RD) opposite to the installation direction (SD). The engaging portion (212) of the first restricting portion (210) is located at Adjacent to the terminal bearing structure (408).

Some of the benefits of the aforementioned changes of the seventh modification will now be explained. When the ink cartridge is installed in the printing press, the terminals must be accurately positioned and stably fixed to ensure reliable electrical communication between the cartridge and the printing press. Since the engaging portion of the first restricting portion is located adjacent to the terminal bearing structure, the positioning action of the first restricting portion occurs close to the most needed positioning (ie, the terminal of the terminal bearing structure). Can properly offset the elastic force from the terminal on the device side. Moreover, it is possible to suppress the positional displacement of the terminal that may occur due to vibration during a printing operation. Therefore, the positioning of the terminals is more stable, so the box-side terminals and the Stable electrical connection between equipment-side terminals.

In addition, since the lever is not integrated with the case, the material used to make the case may be different from the material used to make the lever. Moreover, less attention can be paid to flexibility and durability requirements and more attention to other properties such as ink resistance to select the material of the box.

In addition, because the lever is not on the box, no special attention is required to prevent the creep deformation of the lever when the box is packaged for transportation and distribution. This simplifies packaging requirements and improves user convenience. Since the lever is not an integral part of the case, the case can be made smaller. This further allows for a reduction in the size of the packaging materials (such as paper or boxes) used to package the boxes for transportation or distribution of the boxes, thus advantageously reducing shipping costs and parts costs. Moreover, because the lever is not integrated with the case, the first case-side restricting portion can have a small size and a simple structure, and is similar to the structure described in, for example, US Publication No. 2005/0151811. Ratio has higher stiffness. This leads to a significant reduction in the possibility of plastic deformation of the restriction portion on the side of the first case. In the attached or installed state, the box can be maintained at the correct position in the box mounting structure. This maintains normal or good contact between the box-side terminals and the device-side terminals and reduces the possibility of poor electrical connectivity. . Because the first box-side restricting part can have a small size and simple structure, it is different from the box of US Publication No. 2005/0151811, and no special attention is required in the packaging of the box for transportation and distribution Prevent the creep deformation of the lever. This reduces packaging requirements and also improves user convenience.

The structure that connects the box terminal and the engaging portion of the box to each other may be only a rigid structure (which is not the case of the flexible lever of US Publication No. 2005/0151811). In this case, less vibration is transmitted from the engaging portion to the box terminal, so the electrical communication is more stable.

Since the terminal plane (TP) of the terminal is neither parallel to nor perpendicular to the plane (BP) defined by the leading edge (288), the surface of the box terminal can be properly wiped during the insertion of the box into the printing machine. In addition, this configuration reduces or eliminates insulation debris (dust) that can be generated when the terminals of the printing machine are scraped against the circuit board for a long distance during the installation of the box.

Since the printing press terminal applies an elastic force including a vector component in a direction in which the printing cartridge is detached from the printing press against the box terminal, it is not necessary to provide a spring such as the spring 103 described in US Patent No. 6,955,422. In other words, the elastic force from the printer-side terminal is used to press the printer-side terminal and the box-side terminal together, and also in the direction for removing from the printer when the engagement between the first restriction portion and the printer lever is released. Move the case. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide an additional spring as in the case of US Patent No. 6,955,422, which achieves a simpler structure and reduced cost.

Since the first restricting portion is adapted to engage with the engaging portion of the lever to restrict the movement of the case in a direction opposite to the installation direction, as a result, when the case is installed in the printing machine, the position of the case terminal will be determined by the device The elastic force of the side contact forming member is maintained at an appropriate position with respect to the mounting direction and by the first restricting portion with respect to a direction opposite to the mounting direction. Since the box terminals are "clamped" in this manner, they are firmly fixed to prevent movement in both the mounting direction and the direction opposite to the mounting direction. Therefore, compared with the one-sided limitation of the elastic member 40 and related configurations of US Patent No. 7,008,053, misalignment or disconnection between the box terminal and the device-side contact forming member is less likely to occur.

Adapt 1

The ink cartridge as described above, wherein the terminal plane (TP) is at an angle between about 25 degrees and 40 degrees with the plane (BP) defined by the leading edge (288).

As discussed with reference to FIGS. 42A to 45, when the terminal plane forms an angle between about 25 and 40 degrees with respect to the plane defined by the leading edge, excessive wiping is prevented and sufficient force can be applied to prevent half insertion.

Adapt 2

The ink cartridge as described above, wherein when the first surface (203) of the cartridge body (20) is viewed downward with the ink supply structure (280) facing down, the engaging portion (212) of the first restricting portion (210) is located The left side of the rightmost contact portion in the plurality of terminals (400) and the right side of the leftmost contact portion in the plurality of terminals (400).

When the ink cartridge is mounted on a printing device, if the cartridge is held too securely, some of the components forming contact with the device side (for example, terminal 734 in FIG. 31) may not be securely contacted. By positioning the engaging portion of the first restricting portion to the left of the rightmost contact portion of the plurality of terminals and to the right of the leftmost contact portion of the plurality of terminals, the ink cartridge can be sufficiently inclined so that the plurality of terminals and The electrical connection between the device-side contact-forming components can be even more stable.

Adaptation 3

The ink cartridge (20) as described above, further comprising a second restricting portion (220) on the second surface (204) of the ink cartridge (20), the second restricting portion (220) being adapted And configured to engage with a separate portion (620) of an inkjet printing device (50), where the second distance is measured when measuring the distance in a direction orthogonal to a plane (BP) defined by the leading edge (288). The distance (B) between the meshing portion of the restriction portion (220) and the plane (BP) defined by the leading edge (288) is greater than the meshing portion (212) of the first restriction portion (210) and the boundary defined by the leading edge (288) The distance (A) between the planes (BP).

Compared with the case where the engaging portion of the first restricting portion is farther from the plane defined by the leading edge than the engaging portion of the second restricting portion, the engaging portion at the second restricting portion is located farther away than the engaging portion of the first restricting portion. At the plane defined by the leading edge, it is possible to more effectively reduce the possibility that the first-side restricting portion will become disengaged from the engaging portion of the printing press.

Adapt 4

The ink cartridge body (20) as described above, wherein the ink cartridge body is viewed from the side (203) from which the engaging portion (212) of the first restricting portion (210) is on the right side and the ink supply structure (280) faces downward. 20), when measuring the distance in a direction orthogonal to the plane (BP) defined by the leading edge (288), the engaging portion (212) of the first restricting portion (210) when the box (20) is installed ) And the plane (BP) defined by the leading edge (288) is smaller than the distance (A) between a pivot point (800c) of the lever (80) and the plane (BP) defined by the leading edge (288) Distance (C).

When the box is installed, the engaging portion of the first restricting portion is flat with the edge defined by the leading edge. When the distance between the faces is less than the distance between a pivot point of the lever and a plane defined by the leading edge, the lever is used to restrict the movement of the box. This reduces the possibility that the first restricting portion becomes unlocked or disengaged from the engaging portion of the lever, so that a stable electrical connection is formed between the plurality of terminals and the contact forming member and the possibility of a bad connection is reduced. When a force is applied from the contact-forming member to the mounted case, the first restricting portion is movable around a rotation axis of the lever. This reduces the possibility that the engaging portion of the first restriction portion becomes decoupled from the engaging portion of the lever.

Adapt 5

The ink cartridge body as described above, wherein when the ink cartridge body (20) is viewed from the side (203) where the engaging portion (212) of the first restricting portion (210) is on the right side and the ink supply structure (280) faces downward. When the box body is installed, the engaging portion (212) of the first restricting portion (210) is on the left side of a pivot point (800c) of the lever.

When the case is installed such that when the case is viewed from the side where the engaging portion of the first restricting portion is on the right side and the ink supply structure faces downward, the engaging portion of the first restricting portion is to the left of a pivot point of the lever, The first restricting portion generates a rotating moment on the lever to rotate the lever about the axis of rotation of the lever in a direction opposite to the unlocking direction. This reduces the possibility that the engaging portion of the first restricting portion is unlocked from the engaging portion of the lever, and further ensures a stable electrical connection between the plurality of terminals and the device-side contact forming member. Even when the box receives force, the first restricting portion will move with the box. This movement reduces the possibility that the engaging portion of the first restricting portion is unlocked from the engaging portion of the lever.

Adaptation 6

The ink cartridge as described above, wherein when the first surface (203) of the cartridge body (22) is viewed downward with the ink supply structure (280) facing down, the engagement portion (212) of the first restricting portion (210) At least a portion is located at a substantially widthwise center of the ink cartridge body (20).

By providing the first restricting portion in a position such that at least a part of the engaging portion of the first restricting portion is substantially at the center in the width direction of the ink cartridge body, the first restricting portion is positioned close to the plurality of terminals so that the plurality of Contact terminals with equipment side The electrical connection between the components may be stable.

Adaptation 7

The ink cartridge as described above, wherein the plane (BP) defined by the leading edge (288) is substantially flush with the fourth surface (201).

G-7-5. Fifth change

A combination of an ink cartridge (20) and a part of an inkjet printing equipment (50), the combination includes: a part of an inkjet printing equipment (50), the portion includes: a plurality of device-side contact forming members (731 To 739), which applies an elastic force (Pt) to the ink cartridge body (20); and a lever (80), which has an engaging portion (810); an ink cartridge body (20), the ink cartridge body (20) A box body (22) including a front (203), a rear (204), a top (202), and a bottom (201). The front (203) and the back (204) are opposite to each other and The top (202) and the bottom (201) are opposed to each other; an ink chamber (200) for storing ink; an electric device; an ink supply structure (280), which is positioned at the bottom of the box body (22) At (201), adapted and configured to supply ink from the ink chamber (200) to the inkjet printing device (50), the ink supply structure (280) has a plane defining the ink cartridge (20) (BP) one of the mounting directions (SD) front edge (288); a terminal bearing structure (408), which is located near the front face (203) of the box body (22), the terminal bearing structure (408) With coupling A plurality of conductive terminals (400) of the electric device, the terminals (400) on the terminal bearing structure (408), and contact forming parts (731 to 739) at the contact portions (cp) of the terminals (400) Contact and receive an elastic force (Pt) from the contact forming member, and the contact portions (cp) are substantially arranged in a contact portion plane (TP) which is a plane that is neither parallel to nor perpendicular to the leading edge (288); and A first restricting portion (210) which is engaged with the engaging portion (810) of the lever (80) to restrict the ink cartridge body (20) from moving in a direction (RD) opposite to the installation direction (SD). The engaging portion (212) of the first restricting portion (210) is located adjacent to the terminal bearing structure (408).

Some of the benefits of the aforementioned changes of the seventh modification will now be explained. After installing the ink cartridge These terminals must be accurately positioned and stably fixed in the printing press to ensure reliable electrical communication between the box and the printing press. Since the engaging portion of the first restricting portion is located adjacent to the terminal bearing structure, the positioning action of the first restricting portion occurs close to the most needed positioning (ie, the terminal of the terminal bearing structure). Can properly offset the elastic force from the terminal on the device side. Moreover, it is possible to suppress the positional displacement of the terminal that may occur due to vibration during a printing operation. Therefore, the positioning of the terminals is more stable, so a stable electrical connection between the box-side terminals and the equipment-side terminals is maintained.

In addition, since the lever is not integrated with the case, the material used to make the case may be different from the material used to make the lever. Moreover, less attention can be paid to flexibility and durability requirements and more attention to other properties such as ink resistance to select the material of the box.

In addition, because the lever is not on the box, no special attention is required to prevent the creep deformation of the lever when the box is packaged for transportation and distribution. This simplifies packaging requirements and improves user convenience. Since the lever is not an integral part of the case, the case can be made smaller. This further allows for a reduction in the size of the packaging materials (such as paper or boxes) used to package the boxes for transportation or distribution of the boxes, thus advantageously reducing shipping costs and parts costs. Moreover, because the lever is not integrated with the case, the first case-side restricting portion can have a small size and a simple structure, and is similar to the structure described in, for example, US Publication No. 2005/0151811. Ratio has higher stiffness. This leads to a significant reduction in the possibility of plastic deformation of the restriction portion on the side of the first case. In the attached or installed state, the box can be maintained at the correct position in the box mounting structure. This maintains normal or good contact between the box-side terminals and the device-side terminals and reduces the possibility of poor electrical connectivity. . Because the first box-side restricting part can have a small size and simple structure, it is different from the box of US Publication No. 2005/0151811, and no special attention is required in the packaging of the box for transportation and distribution Prevent the creep deformation of the lever. This reduces packaging requirements and also improves user convenience.

The structure that connects the box terminal and the engaging portion of the box to each other may be a rigid junction only Structure (which is not the case with the flexible leverage of US Publication No. 2005/0151811). In this case, less vibration is transmitted from the engaging portion to the box terminal, so the electrical communication is more stable.

Since the contact part plane (TP) of the terminal is neither parallel to nor perpendicular to the plane (BP) defined by the leading edge (288), the surface of the box terminal can be properly wiped during the insertion of the box into the printing press . In addition, this configuration reduces or eliminates insulation debris (dust) that can be generated when the terminals of the printing machine are scraped against the circuit board for a long distance during the installation of the box.

Since the printing press terminal applies an elastic force including a vector component in a direction in which the printing cartridge is detached from the printing press against the box terminal, it is not necessary to provide a spring such as the spring 103 described in US Patent No. 6,955,422. In other words, the elastic force from the printer-side terminal is used to press the printer-side terminal and the box-side terminal together, and also in the direction for removing from the printer when the engagement between the first restriction portion and the printer lever is released. Move the case. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide an additional spring as in the case of US Patent No. 6,955,422, which achieves a simpler structure and reduced cost.

Since the first restricting portion is adapted to engage with the engaging portion of the lever to restrict the movement of the case in a direction opposite to the installation direction, as a result, when the case is installed in the printing machine, the position of the case terminal will be determined by the device The elastic force of the side contact forming member is maintained at an appropriate position with respect to the mounting direction and by the first restricting portion with respect to a direction opposite to the mounting direction. Since the box terminals are "clamped" in this manner, they are firmly fixed to prevent movement in both the mounting direction and the direction opposite to the mounting direction. Therefore, compared with the one-sided limitation of the elastic member 40 and related configurations of US Patent No. 7,008,053, misalignment or disconnection between the box terminal and the device-side contact forming member is less likely to occur.

Adapt 1

The combination as described above, wherein the contact portion plane (TP) forms an angle between about 25 degrees and 40 degrees with the plane (BP) defined by the leading edge (288).

As discussed with reference to FIGS. 42A to 45, the plane of the contact portion is defined with respect to the front edge When the plane is at an angle between about 25 and 40 degrees, excessive wiping is prevented and sufficient force can be applied to prevent half insertion.

Adapt 2

In the combination as described above, when the front surface (203) of the cartridge body (20) is viewed downward with the ink supply structure (280) facing down, the engaging portion (212) of the first restricting portion (210) is located at the plurality of terminals ( 400) The left side of the rightmost contact portion and the right side of the leftmost contact portion of the plurality of terminals (400).

When the ink cartridge is mounted on a printing device, if the cartridge is held too securely, some of the components forming contact with the device side (for example, terminal 734 in FIG. 31) may not be securely contacted. By positioning the engaging portion of the first restricting portion to the left of the rightmost contact portion of the plurality of terminals and to the right of the leftmost contact portion of the plurality of terminals, the ink cartridge can be sufficiently inclined so that the plurality of terminals and The electrical connection between the device-side contact-forming components can be even more stable.

Adaptation 3

The combination as described above further includes a second restricting portion (220) on the rear surface (204) of the ink cartridge (20), the second restricting portion (220) and the inkjet printing device (50). A separate portion (620) is engaged, wherein when the distance is measured in a direction orthogonal to a plane (BP) defined by the leading edge (288), the engaging portion of the second restricting portion (220) and the leading edge ( 288) The distance (B) between the defined planes (BP) is greater than the distance (A) between the engaging portion (212) of the first restriction portion (210) and the plane (BP) defined by the leading edge (288).

Compared with the case where the engaging portion of the first restricting portion is farther from the plane defined by the leading edge than the engaging portion of the second restricting portion, the engaging portion at the second restricting portion is located farther away than the engaging portion of the first restricting portion. At the plane defined by the leading edge, it is possible to more effectively reduce the possibility that the first-side restricting portion will become disengaged from the engaging portion of the printing press.

Adapt 4

The combination as described above, wherein the lever (80) has two ends and is in the middle of the two ends At a pivot point (800c) of the ink cartridge (20) when the engaging portion (212) of the first restricting portion (210) is on the right side and the ink supply structure (280) faces downward (203) When measuring the distance in a direction orthogonal to the plane (BP) defined by the leading edge (288), when the box (20) is installed, the engaging portion (212) of the first restricting portion (210) and the The distance (A) between the plane (BP) defined by the leading edge (288) is smaller than the distance (C) between the pivot point (800c) of the lever (80) and the plane (BP) defined by the leading edge (288) .

When the distance between the engaging portion of the first restricting portion and the plane defined by the leading edge is smaller than the distance between a pivot point of the lever and the plane defined by the leading edge when the box is installed, the lever is used to restrict the box Body movement. This reduces the possibility that the first restricting portion becomes unlocked or disengaged from the engaging portion of the lever, so that a stable electrical connection is formed between the plurality of terminals and the contact forming member and the possibility of a bad connection is reduced. When a force is applied from the contact-forming member to the mounted case, the first restricting portion is movable around a rotation axis of the lever. This reduces the possibility that the engaging portion of the first restriction portion becomes decoupled from the engaging portion of the lever.

Adapt 5

The combination as described above, wherein the lever (80) has two ends and a pivot point (800c) between the two ends, and the engaging portion (212) of the first restricting portion (210) is at When the ink cartridge body (20) is viewed from the right side with the ink supply structure (280) facing downward (203), the engaging portion (212) of the first restricting portion (210) is on the left side of the pivot point (800c) of the lever.

When the case is installed such that when the case is viewed from the side where the engaging portion of the first restricting portion is on the right side and the ink supply structure faces downward, the engaging portion of the first restricting portion is to the left of a pivot point of the lever, The first restricting portion generates a rotating moment on the lever to rotate the lever about the axis of rotation of the lever in a direction opposite to the unlocking direction. This reduces the possibility that the engaging portion of the first restricting portion is unlocked from the engaging portion of the lever, and further ensures a stable electrical connection between the plurality of terminals and the device-side contact forming member. Even when the box receives force, the first restricting portion will move with the box. This movement reduces the possibility that the engaging portion of the first restricting portion is unlocked from the engaging portion of the lever.

Adaptation 6

The combination as described above, wherein when the front surface (203) of the cartridge main body (22) is viewed downward with the ink supply structure (280) facing down, at least a part of the engaging portion (212) of the first restricting portion (210) is located substantially The center of the upper ink cartridge body (20) in the width direction.

By providing the first restricting portion in a position such that at least a part of the engaging portion of the first restricting portion is substantially at the center in the width direction of the ink cartridge body, the first restricting portion is positioned close to the plurality of terminals so that the plurality of The electrical connection between the terminals and the device-side contact forming member may be stable.

Adaptation 7

The combination as described above, wherein the plane (BP) defined by the leading edge (288) is substantially flush with the bottom (201).

G-7-6. Sixth change

A combination of an ink cartridge (20) and a part of an inkjet printing equipment (50), the combination includes: a part of an inkjet printing equipment (50), the portion includes: a plurality of device-side contact forming members (731 To 739), which applies an elastic force (Pt) to the ink cartridge body (20); and a lever (80), which has an engaging portion (810); an ink cartridge body (20), the ink cartridge body (20) includes: a box body (22), which includes a front face (203), a rear face (204), a top portion (202), and a bottom portion (201), the front face (203) and the rear face (204) each other Opposite and the top (202) and bottom (201) are opposite each other; an electrical device; an ink chamber (200) for storing ink; an ink supply structure (280), which is positioned on the box body (22) At the bottom (201), it is adapted and configured to supply ink from the ink chamber (200) to the inkjet printing equipment (50), and the ink supply structure (280) has a portion defining the ink cartridge (20). A front edge (288) of a mounting direction (SD) of a plane (BP); a terminal bearing structure (408) located at the front face (203) of the box body (22), the terminal bearing structure ( 408) has Bonded to the plurality of conductive terminals (400) of the electrical device, such terminals (400) of the terminal on the carrier structure (408) is formed with the contact member (731-739) and the contact member is formed from a contact receiving bomb Force (Pt), the terminals (400) are substantially arranged in a terminal plane (TP) that is neither parallel to nor perpendicular to the leading edge (288); and a first restricting portion (210), It engages with the engaging portion (810) of the lever (80) to restrict the ink cartridge body (20) from moving in a direction (RD) opposite to the installation direction (SD), and the engagement of the first restricting portion (210) Portion (212) is located adjacent to the terminal carrying structure (408).

Some of the benefits of the aforementioned changes of the seventh modification will now be explained. When the ink cartridge is installed in the printing press, the terminals must be accurately positioned and stably fixed to ensure reliable electrical communication between the cartridge and the printing press. Since the engaging portion of the first restricting portion is located adjacent to the terminal bearing structure, the positioning action of the first restricting portion occurs close to the most needed positioning (ie, the terminal of the terminal bearing structure). Can properly offset the elastic force from the terminal on the device side. Moreover, it is possible to suppress the positional displacement of the terminal that may occur due to vibration during a printing operation. Therefore, the positioning of the terminals is more stable, so a stable electrical connection between the box-side terminals and the equipment-side terminals is maintained.

In addition, since the lever is not integrated with the case, the material used to make the case may be different from the material used to make the lever. Moreover, less attention can be paid to flexibility and durability requirements and more attention to other properties such as ink resistance to select the material of the box.

In addition, because the lever is not on the box, no special attention is required to prevent the creep deformation of the lever when the box is packaged for transportation and distribution. This simplifies packaging requirements and improves user convenience. Since the lever is not an integral part of the case, the case can be made smaller. This further allows for a reduction in the size of the packaging materials (such as paper or boxes) used to package the boxes for transportation or distribution of the boxes, thus advantageously reducing shipping costs and parts costs. Moreover, because the lever is not integrated with the case, the first case-side restricting portion can have a small size and a simple structure, and is similar to the structure described in, for example, US Publication No. 2005/0151811. Ratio has higher stiffness. This leads to a significant reduction in the possibility of plastic deformation of the restriction portion on the side of the first case. In the attached or installed state, the box can be maintained at the correct position in the box mounting structure. This maintains the box-side terminal and the device-side terminal. Normal or good contact between them and reduce the possibility of poor electrical connectivity. Because the first box-side restricting part can have a small size and simple structure, it is different from the box of US Publication No. 2005/0151811, and no special attention is required in the packaging of the box for transportation and distribution Prevent the creep deformation of the lever. This reduces packaging requirements and also improves user convenience.

The structure that connects the box terminal and the engaging portion of the box to each other may be only a rigid structure (which is not the case of the flexible lever of US Publication No. 2005/0151811). In this case, less vibration is transmitted from the engaging portion to the box terminal, so the electrical communication is more stable.

Since the terminal plane (TP) of the terminal is neither parallel to nor perpendicular to the plane (BP) defined by the leading edge (288), the surface of the box terminal can be properly wiped during the insertion of the box into the printing machine. In addition, this configuration reduces or eliminates insulation debris (dust) that can be generated when the terminals of the printing machine are scraped against the circuit board for a long distance during the installation of the box.

Since the printing press terminal applies an elastic force including a vector component in a direction in which the printing cartridge is detached from the printing press against the box terminal, it is not necessary to provide a spring such as the spring 103 described in US Patent No. 6,955,422. In other words, the elastic force from the printer-side terminal is used to press the printer-side terminal and the box-side terminal together, and also in the direction for removing from the printer when the engagement between the first restriction portion and the printer lever is released. Move the case. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide an additional spring as in the case of US Patent No. 6,955,422, which achieves a simpler structure and reduced cost.

Since the first restricting portion is adapted to engage with the engaging portion of the lever to restrict the movement of the case in a direction opposite to the installation direction, as a result, when the case is installed in the printing machine, the position of the case terminal will be determined by the device The elastic force of the side contact forming member is maintained at an appropriate position with respect to the mounting direction and by the first restricting portion with respect to a direction opposite to the mounting direction. Since the box terminals are "clamped" in this manner, they are firmly fixed to prevent movement in both the mounting direction and the direction opposite to the mounting direction. Therefore, compared with the one-sided limitation of the elastic member 40 and related configurations of US Patent No. 7,008,053, it is more unlikely Misalignment or disconnection between the case terminal and the device-side contact forming member is now present.

Adapt 1

The combination as described above, wherein the terminal plane (TP) forms an angle between about 25 degrees and 40 degrees with the plane (BP) defined by the leading edge (288).

As discussed with reference to FIGS. 42A to 45, when the terminal plane forms an angle between about 25 and 40 degrees with respect to the plane defined by the leading edge, excessive wiping is prevented and sufficient force can be applied to prevent half insertion.

Adapt 2

In the combination as described above, when the front surface (203) of the cartridge body (20) is viewed downward with the ink supply structure (280) facing down, the engaging portion (212) of the first restricting portion (210) is located at the plurality of terminals ( 400) One of the rightmost edges of one of the rightmost terminals and the right of one of the leftmost terminals of the plurality of terminals (400).

When the ink cartridge is mounted on a printing device, if the cartridge is held too securely, some of the components forming contact with the device side (for example, terminal 734 in FIG. 31) may not be securely contacted. By positioning the engaging portion of the first restricting portion to the left of the right edge of one of the rightmost terminals of one of the plurality of terminals and to the right of the left edge of one of the leftmost terminals of the plurality of terminals, the ink cartridge can be fully inclined Placed so that the electrical connection between the plurality of terminals and the device-side contact-forming component can be even more stable.

Adaptation 3

The combination as described above further includes a second restricting portion (220) on the rear surface (204) of the ink cartridge (20), the second restricting portion (220) and the inkjet printing device (50). A separate portion (620) is engaged, wherein when the distance is measured in a direction orthogonal to a plane (BP) defined by the leading edge (288), the engaging portion of the second restricting portion (220) and the leading edge ( 288) The distance (B) between the defined planes (BP) is greater than the distance (A) between the engaging portion (212) of the first restriction portion (210) and the plane (BP) defined by the leading edge (288).

Farther from the engaging portion of the first restricting portion than the engaging portion of the second restricting portion Compared with the situation when the plane is defined by the leading edge, the first side restriction can be more effectively reduced when the engaging portion of the second restricting portion is located farther away from the plane defined by the leading edge than the engaging portion of the first restricting portion. The possibility that part will become disengaged from the engaging part of the printing press.

Adapt 4

The combination as described above, wherein the lever (80) has two ends and a pivot point (800c) between the two ends, and the engaging portion (212) of the first restricting portion (210) is at When viewing the ink cartridge (20) on the right side with the ink supply structure (280) facing downward (203), when measuring the distance in a direction orthogonal to a plane (BP) defined by the leading edge (288), When the box (20) is installed, the distance (A) between the engaging portion (212) of the first restricting portion (210) and the plane (BP) defined by the leading edge (288) is less than the pivot point of the lever (80) The distance (C) between (800c) and the plane (BP) defined by the leading edge (288).

When the distance between the engaging portion of the first restricting portion and the plane defined by the leading edge is smaller than the distance between a pivot point of the lever and the plane defined by the leading edge when the box is installed, the lever is used to restrict the box Body movement. This reduces the possibility that the first restricting portion becomes unlocked or disengaged from the engaging portion of the lever, so that a stable electrical connection is formed between the plurality of terminals and the contact forming member and the possibility of a bad connection is reduced. When a force is applied from the contact-forming member to the mounted case, the first restricting portion is movable around a rotation axis of the lever. This reduces the possibility that the engaging portion of the first restriction portion becomes decoupled from the engaging portion of the lever.

Adapt 5

The combination as described above, wherein the lever (80) has two ends and a pivot point (800c) between the two ends, and the engaging portion (212) of the first restricting portion (210) is at When the ink cartridge body (20) is viewed from the right side with the ink supply structure (280) facing downward (203), the engaging portion (212) of the first restricting portion (210) is on the left side of the pivot point (800c) of the lever.

When the case is installed such that when the case is viewed from the side where the engaging portion of the first restricting portion is on the right side and the ink supply structure faces downward, the engaging portion of the first restricting portion is to the left of a pivot point of the lever, The first restricting portion generates a rotational moment on the lever to The lever is rotated about the axis of rotation of the lever in the opposite direction to the unlocking direction. This reduces the possibility that the engaging portion of the first restricting portion is unlocked from the engaging portion of the lever, and further ensures a stable electrical connection between the plurality of terminals and the device-side contact forming member. Even when the box receives force, the first restricting portion will move with the box. This movement reduces the possibility that the engaging portion of the first restricting portion is unlocked from the engaging portion of the lever.

Adaptation 6

The combination as described above, wherein when the front surface (203) of the cartridge main body (22) is viewed downward with the ink supply structure (280) facing down, at least a part of the engaging portion (212) of the first restricting portion (210) is located substantially The center of the upper ink cartridge body (20) in the width direction.

By providing the first restricting portion in a position such that at least a part of the engaging portion of the first restricting portion is substantially at the center in the width direction of the ink cartridge body, the first restricting portion is positioned close to the plurality of terminals so that the plurality of The electrical connection between the terminals and the device-side contact forming member may be stable.

Adaptation 7

The combination as described above, wherein the plane (BP) defined by the leading edge (288) is substantially flush with the bottom (201).

G-7-7. Seventh change

A combination of an ink cartridge (20) and a part of an inkjet printing equipment (50), the combination includes: a part of an inkjet printing equipment (50), the portion includes: a plurality of device-side contact forming members (731 To 739), which applies an elastic force (Pt) to the ink cartridge body (20); and a lever (80), which has an engaging portion (810); an ink cartridge body (20), the ink cartridge body (20) includes a box body (22) including a first surface (203), a second surface (204), a third surface (202), and a fourth surface (201), wherein the first surface (203) It is opposite to the second surface (204) and the third surface (202) and the fourth surface (201) are opposite each other; an electric device; an ink chamber (200) for storing ink; an ink supply structure (280 ), Which is positioned at the fourth surface (201) of the box body (22), adjusted and configured To supply ink from an ink chamber (200) to an inkjet printing device (50), the ink supply structure (280) has a leading edge defining a mounting direction (SD) of a plane (BP) of the ink cartridge (20) (288); a terminal bearing structure (408), which is located near the first surface (203) of the box body (22), the terminal bearing structure (408) has a plurality of conductive terminals coupled to the electrical device (400), the terminal (400) on the terminal bearing structure (408) contacts the contact forming members (731 to 739) at the contact portions (cp) of the terminals (400), and receives the elastic force from the contact forming member (Pt), the contact portions (cp) are substantially arranged in a contact portion plane (TP), which is a plane that is neither parallel to nor perpendicular to the leading edge (288); and a first restriction portion (210), It engages with the engaging portion (810) of the lever (80) to restrict the ink cartridge body (20) from moving in a direction (RD) opposite to the installation direction (SD). The engaging portion of the first restricting portion (210) ( 212) is located adjacent to the terminal bearing structure (408).

Some of the benefits of the aforementioned changes of the seventh modification will now be explained. When the ink cartridge is installed in the printing press, the terminals must be accurately positioned and stably fixed to ensure reliable electrical communication between the cartridge and the printing press. Since the engaging portion of the first restricting portion is located adjacent to the terminal bearing structure, the positioning action of the first restricting portion occurs close to the most needed positioning (ie, the terminal of the terminal bearing structure). Can properly offset the elastic force from the terminal on the device side. Moreover, it is possible to suppress the positional displacement of the terminal that may occur due to vibration during a printing operation. Therefore, the positioning of the terminals is more stable, so a stable electrical connection between the box-side terminals and the equipment-side terminals is maintained.

In addition, since the lever is not integrated with the case, the material used to make the case may be different from the material used to make the lever. Moreover, less attention can be paid to flexibility and durability requirements and more attention to other properties such as ink resistance to select the material of the box.

In addition, because the lever is not on the box, no special attention is required to prevent the creep deformation of the lever when the box is packaged for transportation and distribution. This simplifies packaging requirements and improves user convenience. Since the lever is not an integral part of the case, the case can be made smaller. This further allows packaging materials to be used to package the cassettes for transportation or distribution (Such as paper or boxes) is reduced in size, thus advantageously reducing transportation costs and parts costs. Moreover, because the lever is not integrated with the case, the first case-side restricting portion can have a small size and a simple structure, and is similar to the structure described in, for example, US Publication No. 2005/0151811. Ratio has higher stiffness. This leads to a significant reduction in the possibility of plastic deformation of the restriction portion on the side of the first case. In the attached or installed state, the box can be maintained at the correct position in the box mounting structure. This maintains normal or good contact between the box-side terminals and the device-side terminals and reduces the possibility of poor electrical connectivity. . Because the first box-side restricting part can have a small size and simple structure, it is different from the box of US Publication No. 2005/0151811, and no special attention is required in the packaging of the box for transportation and distribution Prevent the creep deformation of the lever. This reduces packaging requirements and also improves user convenience.

The structure that connects the box terminal and the engaging portion of the box to each other may be only a rigid structure (which is not the case of the flexible lever of US Publication No. 2005/0151811). In this case, less vibration is transmitted from the engaging portion to the box terminal, so the electrical communication is more stable.

Since the contact part plane (TP) of the terminal is neither parallel to nor perpendicular to the plane (BP) defined by the leading edge (288), the surface of the box terminal can be properly wiped during the insertion of the box into the printing press . In addition, this configuration reduces or eliminates insulation debris (dust) that can be generated when the terminals of the printing machine are scraped against the circuit board for a long distance during the installation of the box.

Since the printing press terminal applies an elastic force including a vector component in a direction in which the printing cartridge is detached from the printing press against the box terminal, it is not necessary to provide a spring such as the spring 103 described in US Patent No. 6,955,422. In other words, the elastic force from the printer-side terminal is used to press the printer-side terminal and the box-side terminal together, and also in the direction for removing from the printer when the engagement between the first restriction portion and the printer lever is released. Move the case. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide an additional spring as in the case of US Patent No. 6,955,422, which achieves a simpler structure and reduced cost.

Since the first restricting portion is adapted to engage with the engaging portion of the lever to restrict the movement of the case in a direction opposite to the installation direction, as a result, when the case is installed in the printing machine, the position of the case terminal will be determined by the device The elastic force of the side contact forming member is maintained at an appropriate position with respect to the mounting direction and by the first restricting portion with respect to a direction opposite to the mounting direction. Since the box terminals are "clamped" in this manner, they are firmly fixed to prevent movement in both the mounting direction and the direction opposite to the mounting direction. Therefore, compared with the one-sided limitation of the elastic member 40 and related configurations of US Patent No. 7,008,053, misalignment or disconnection between the box terminal and the device-side contact forming member is less likely to occur.

Adapt 1

The combination as described above, wherein the contact portion plane (TP) forms an angle between about 25 degrees and 40 degrees with the plane (BP) defined by the leading edge (288).

As discussed with reference to FIGS. 42A to 45, when the contact portion plane forms an angle between about 25 and 40 degrees with respect to the plane defined by the leading edge, excessive wiping is prevented and sufficient force can be applied to prevent half insertion.

Adapt 2

In the combination as described above, when the first surface (203) of the cartridge body (20) is viewed downward with the ink supply structure (280) facing down, the engaging portions (212) of the first restricting portion (210) are located in a plurality of The left side of the rightmost contact portion in the terminal (400) and the right side of the leftmost contact portion in the plurality of terminals (400).

When the ink cartridge is mounted on a printing device, if the cartridge is held too securely, some of the components forming contact with the device side (for example, terminal 734 in FIG. 31) may not be securely contacted. By positioning the engaging portion of the first restricting portion to the left of the rightmost contact portion of the plurality of terminals and to the right of the leftmost contact portion of the plurality of terminals, the ink cartridge can be sufficiently inclined so that the plurality of terminals and The electrical connection between the device-side contact-forming components can be even more stable.

Adaptation 3

The combination as described above, further comprising a second restriction portion (220) on the second surface (204) of the ink cartridge body (20), the second restriction portion (220) and the inkjet printing device (50) ) Is engaged with a respective portion (620), wherein when the distance is measured in a direction orthogonal to the plane (BP) defined by the leading edge (288), the engaging portion of the second restricting portion (220) and the front portion The distance (B) between the plane (BP) defined by the edge (288) is greater than the distance (A) between the engaging portion (212) of the first restriction portion (210) and the plane (BP) defined by the leading edge (288). ).

Compared with the case where the engaging portion of the first restricting portion is farther from the plane defined by the leading edge than the engaging portion of the second restricting portion, the engaging portion at the second restricting portion is located farther away than the engaging portion of the first restricting portion. At the plane defined by the leading edge, it is possible to more effectively reduce the possibility that the first-side restricting portion will become disengaged from the engaging portion of the printing press.

Adapt 4

The combination as described above, wherein the lever (80) has two ends and a pivot point (800c) between the two ends, and the engaging portion (212) of the first restricting portion (210) is at When viewing the ink cartridge (20) on the right side with the ink supply structure (280) facing downward (203), when measuring the distance in a direction orthogonal to a plane (BP) defined by the leading edge (288), When the box (20) is installed, the distance (A) between the engaging portion (212) of the first restricting portion (210) and the plane (BP) defined by the leading edge (288) is less than the pivot point of the lever (80) The distance (C) between (800c) and the plane (BP) defined by the leading edge (288).

When the distance between the engaging portion of the first restricting portion and the plane defined by the leading edge is smaller than the distance between a pivot point of the lever and the plane defined by the leading edge when the box is installed, the lever is used to restrict the box Body movement. This reduces the possibility that the first restricting portion becomes unlocked or disengaged from the engaging portion of the lever, so that a stable electrical connection is formed between the plurality of terminals and the contact forming member and the possibility of a bad connection is reduced. When a force is applied from the contact-forming member to the mounted case, the first restricting portion is movable around a rotation axis of the lever. This reduces the possibility that the engaging portion of the first restriction portion becomes decoupled from the engaging portion of the lever.

Adapt 5

The combination as described above, wherein the lever (80) has two ends and a pivot point (800c) between the two ends, and the engaging portion (212) of the first restricting portion (210) is at When the ink cartridge body (20) is viewed from the right side with the ink supply structure (280) facing downward (203), the engaging portion (212) of the first restricting portion (210) is on the left side of the pivot point (800c) of the lever.

When the case is installed such that when the case is viewed from the side where the engaging portion of the first restricting portion is on the right side and the ink supply structure faces downward, the engaging portion of the first restricting portion is to the left of a pivot point of the lever, The first restricting portion generates a rotating moment on the lever to rotate the lever about the axis of rotation of the lever in a direction opposite to the unlocking direction. This reduces the possibility that the engaging portion of the first restricting portion is unlocked from the engaging portion of the lever, and further ensures a stable electrical connection between the plurality of terminals and the device-side contact forming member. Even when the box receives force, the first restricting portion will move with the box. This movement reduces the possibility that the engaging portion of the first restricting portion is unlocked from the engaging portion of the lever.

Adaptation 6

The combination as described above, wherein when the first surface (203) of the case body (22) is viewed downward with the ink supply structure (280) facing down, at least a part of the engaging portion (212) of the first restricting portion (210) It is located at the substantially widthwise center of the ink cartridge (20).

By providing the first restricting portion in a position such that at least a part of the engaging portion of the first restricting portion is substantially at the center in the width direction of the ink cartridge body, the first restricting portion is positioned close to the plurality of terminals so that the plurality of The electrical connection between the terminals and the device-side contact forming member may be stable.

Adaptation 7

The combination as described above, wherein the plane (BP) defined by the leading edge (288) is substantially flush with the fourth surface (201).

G-7-8. Eighth change

A combination of an ink cartridge (20) and a part of an inkjet printing equipment (50), the combination includes: a part of an inkjet printing equipment (50), the part includes: a plurality of equipment Side contact forming members (731 to 739) that apply an elastic force (Pt) to the ink cartridge body (20); and a lever (80) that has an engaging portion (810); an ink cartridge body (20 ), The ink cartridge body (20) includes a cartridge body (22) including a first surface (203), a second surface (204), a third surface (202), and a fourth surface (201), wherein the The first surface (203) and the second surface (204) are opposed to each other and the third surface (202) and the fourth surface (201) are opposed to each other; an electrical device; an ink chamber (200) for storing ink; An ink supply structure (280), which is positioned at the fourth surface (201) of the box body (22), is adapted and configured to supply ink from the ink chamber (200) to the inkjet printing equipment ( 50), the ink supply structure (280) has a leading edge (288) defining a mounting direction (SD) of a plane (BP) of the ink cartridge body (20); a terminal bearing structure (408), which is located close to At the first surface (203) of the box body (22), the terminal bearing structure (408) has a plurality of conductive terminals (400) coupled to the electrical device, and the terminals (400) on the terminal bearing structure (408) ) And contact forming part (731 739) contact and receive the elastic force (Pt) from the contact forming member, and the terminals (400) are substantially arranged in a terminal plane (TP) that is neither parallel to nor perpendicular to the leading edge (288); and A first restricting portion (210) including an engaging (212) portion that engages with the engaging portion (810) of the lever (80) to restrict the ink cartridge (20) in a direction opposite to the installation direction (SD) ( RD), the engaging portion (212) of the first restricting portion (210) is located adjacent to the terminal bearing structure (408).

Some of the benefits of the aforementioned changes of the seventh modification will now be explained. When the ink cartridge is installed in the printing press, the terminals must be accurately positioned and stably fixed to ensure reliable electrical communication between the cartridge and the printing press. Since the engaging portion of the first restricting portion is located adjacent to the terminal bearing structure, the positioning action of the first restricting portion occurs close to the most needed positioning (ie, the terminal of the terminal bearing structure). Can properly offset the elastic force from the terminal on the device side. Moreover, it is possible to suppress the positional displacement of the terminal that may occur due to vibration during a printing operation. Therefore, the positioning of the terminals is more stable, so a stable electrical connection between the box-side terminals and the equipment-side terminals is maintained.

In addition, since the lever is not integrated with the case, the material used to make the case may be different from the material used to make the lever. Moreover, less attention can be paid to flexibility and durability requirements and more attention to other properties such as ink resistance to select the material of the box.

In addition, because the lever is not on the box, no special attention is required to prevent the creep deformation of the lever when the box is packaged for transportation and distribution. This simplifies packaging requirements and improves user convenience. Since the lever is not an integral part of the case, the case can be made smaller. This further allows for a reduction in the size of the packaging materials (such as paper or boxes) used to package the boxes for transportation or distribution of the boxes, thus advantageously reducing shipping costs and parts costs. Moreover, because the lever is not integrated with the case, the first case-side restricting portion can have a small size and a simple structure, and is similar to the structure described in, for example, US Publication No. 2005/0151811. Ratio has higher stiffness. This leads to a significant reduction in the possibility of plastic deformation of the restriction portion on the side of the first case. In the attached or installed state, the box can be maintained at the correct position in the box mounting structure. This maintains normal or good contact between the box-side terminals and the device-side terminals and reduces the possibility of poor electrical connectivity. . Because the first box-side restricting part can have a small size and simple structure, it is different from the box of US Publication No. 2005/0151811, and no special attention is required in the packaging of the box for transportation and distribution Prevent the creep deformation of the lever. This reduces packaging requirements and also improves user convenience.

The structure that connects the box terminal and the engaging portion of the box to each other may be only a rigid structure (which is not the case of the flexible lever of US Publication No. 2005/0151811). In this case, less vibration is transmitted from the engaging portion to the box terminal, so the electrical communication is more stable.

Since the terminal plane (TP) of the terminal is neither parallel to nor perpendicular to the plane (BP) defined by the leading edge (288), the surface of the box terminal can be properly wiped during the insertion of the box into the printing machine. In addition, this configuration reduces or eliminates insulation debris (dust) that can be generated when the terminals of the printing machine are scraped against the circuit board for a long distance during the installation of the box.

Since the printing press terminals are applied against the box terminals, the removal of the magazine from the printing press is included. One of the vector components of the body is an elastic force, so it is not necessary to provide a spring such as the spring 103 described in US Patent No. 6,955,422. In other words, the elastic force from the printer-side terminal is used to press the printer-side terminal and the box-side terminal together, and also in the direction for removing from the printer when the engagement between the first restriction portion and the printer lever is released. Move the case. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide an additional spring as in the case of US Patent No. 6,955,422, which achieves a simpler structure and reduced cost.

Since the first restricting portion is adapted to engage with the engaging portion of the lever to restrict the movement of the case in a direction opposite to the installation direction, as a result, when the case is installed in the printing machine, the position of the case terminal will be determined by the device The elastic force of the side contact forming member is maintained at an appropriate position with respect to the mounting direction and by the first restricting portion with respect to a direction opposite to the mounting direction. Since the box terminals are "clamped" in this manner, they are firmly fixed to prevent movement in both the mounting direction and the direction opposite to the mounting direction. Therefore, compared with the one-sided limitation of the elastic member 40 and related configurations of US Patent No. 7,008,053, misalignment or disconnection between the box terminal and the device-side contact forming member is less likely to occur.

Adapt 1

The combination as described above, wherein the terminal plane (TP) forms an angle between about 25 degrees and 40 degrees with the plane (BP) defined by the leading edge (288).

As discussed with reference to FIGS. 42A to 45, when the terminal plane forms an angle between about 25 and 40 degrees with respect to the plane defined by the leading edge, excessive wiping is prevented and sufficient force can be applied to prevent half insertion.

Adapt 2

In the combination as described above, when the front surface (203) of the cartridge body (20) is viewed downward with the ink supply structure (280) facing down, the engaging portion (212) of the first restricting portion (210) is located at the plurality of terminals ( 400) One of the rightmost edges of one of the rightmost terminals and the right of one of the leftmost terminals of the plurality of terminals (400).

When the ink cartridge is mounted on a printing device, if the cartridge is held too firmly, Then, some of the components (for example, terminal 734 in FIG. 31) in contact with the device-side contact forming member may not be firm. By positioning the engaging portion of the first restricting portion to the left of the right edge of one of the rightmost terminals of one of the plurality of terminals and to the right of the left edge of one of the leftmost terminals of the plurality of terminals, the ink cartridge can be fully inclined Placed so that the electrical connection between the plurality of terminals and the device-side contact-forming component can be even more stable.

Adaptation 3

The combination as described above, further comprising a second restriction portion (220) on the second surface (204) of the ink cartridge body (20), the second restriction portion (220) and the inkjet printing device (50) ) Is engaged with a respective portion (620), wherein when the distance is measured in a direction orthogonal to the plane (BP) defined by the leading edge (288), the engaging portion of the second restricting portion (220) and the front portion The distance (B) between the plane (BP) defined by the edge (288) is greater than the distance (A) between the engaging portion (212) of the first restriction portion (210) and the plane (BP) defined by the leading edge (288). ).

Compared with the case where the engaging portion of the first restricting portion is farther from the plane defined by the leading edge than the engaging portion of the second restricting portion, the engaging portion at the second restricting portion is located farther away than the engaging portion of the first restricting portion. At the plane defined by the leading edge, it is possible to more effectively reduce the possibility that the first-side restricting portion will become disengaged from the engaging portion of the printing press.

Adapt 4

The combination as described above, wherein the lever (80) has two ends and a pivot point (800c) between the two ends, and the engaging portion (212) of the first restricting portion (210) is at When viewing the ink cartridge (20) on the right side with the ink supply structure (280) facing downward (203), when measuring the distance in a direction orthogonal to a plane (BP) defined by the leading edge (288), When the box (20) is installed, the distance (A) between the engaging portion (212) of the first restricting portion (210) and the plane (BP) defined by the leading edge (288) is less than the pivot point of the lever (80) The distance (C) between (800c) and the plane (BP) defined by the leading edge (288).

When the box is installed, the distance between the engaging portion of the first restricting portion and the plane defined by the leading edge is less than the distance between one of the pivot points of the lever and the plane defined by the leading edge At this time, the lever is used to restrict the movement of the box. This reduces the possibility that the first restricting portion becomes unlocked or disengaged from the engaging portion of the lever, so that a stable electrical connection is formed between the plurality of terminals and the contact forming member and the possibility of a bad connection is reduced. When a force is applied from the contact-forming member to the mounted case, the first restricting portion is movable around a rotation axis of the lever. This reduces the possibility that the engaging portion of the first restriction portion becomes decoupled from the engaging portion of the lever.

Adapt 5

The combination as described above, wherein the lever (80) has two ends and a pivot point (800c) between the two ends, and the engaging portion (212) of the first restricting portion (210) is at When the ink cartridge body (20) is viewed from the right side with the ink supply structure (280) facing downward (203), the engaging portion (212) of the first restricting portion (210) is on the left side of the pivot point (800c) of the lever.

When the case is installed such that when the case is viewed from the side where the engaging portion of the first restricting portion is on the right side and the ink supply structure faces downward, the engaging portion of the first restricting portion is to the left of a pivot point of the lever, The first restricting portion generates a rotating moment on the lever to rotate the lever about the axis of rotation of the lever in a direction opposite to the unlocking direction. This reduces the possibility that the engaging portion of the first restricting portion is unlocked from the engaging portion of the lever, and further ensures a stable electrical connection between the plurality of terminals and the device-side contact forming member. Even when the box receives force, the first restricting portion will move with the box. This movement reduces the possibility that the engaging portion of the first restricting portion is unlocked from the engaging portion of the lever.

Adaptation 6

The combination as described above, wherein when the first surface (203) of the case body (22) is viewed downward with the ink supply structure (280) facing down, at least a part of the engaging portion (212) of the first restricting portion (210) It is located at the substantially widthwise center of the ink cartridge (20).

By providing the first restricting portion in a position such that at least a part of the engaging portion of the first restricting portion is substantially at the center in the width direction of the ink cartridge body, the first restricting portion is positioned close to the plurality of terminals so that the plurality of The electrical connection between the terminals and the device-side contact forming member may be stable.

Adaptation 7

The combination as described above, wherein the plane (BP) defined by the leading edge (288) is substantially flush with the fourth surface (201).

G-7-9. Ninth change

An ink supply system adapted to supply ink to an inkjet printing device (50), the inkjet printing device (50) including: a plurality of device-side contact forming members (731 to 739); the ink supply system includes: An electric device; an ink chamber (200) for storing ink; and an ink supply structure (280) adapted and configured to supply ink from the ink chamber (200) to the inkjet printing device (50 ), The ink supply structure (280) has a leading edge (288) defining a mounting direction (SD) of a plane (BP); a terminal bearing structure (408) having a plurality of conductive terminals (coupled to the electrical device) 400), the terminals (400) are adapted and arranged on the terminal carrying structure (408) to contact parts (cp) of the terminals (400) when the ink supply system supplies ink to the printing equipment (50) ) Contact the contact forming members (731 to 739) and receive the elastic force (Pt) from the contact forming member so that a vector component of the elastic force (Pt) from the device-side contact forming member (731 to 739) follows The installation direction (SD) advances the ink chamber (200) in the opposite direction (RD); and a first restricting portion ( 210), which is adapted to mesh with the engaging portion (810) of the lever (80) to limit the movement of the terminal bearing structure (408) in a direction (RD) opposite to the installation direction (SD); where the ink supply system will When the ink is supplied to the printing device (50), the engaging portion (212) of the first restricting portion (210) is positioned adjacent to the terminal bearing structure (408) and the contact portions (cp) are arranged substantially in neither parallel In one of the planes that is not perpendicular to the leading edge (288), in the contact partial plane (TP).

Some of the benefits of the aforementioned changes of the seventh modification will now be explained. When the ink cartridge is installed in the printing press, the terminals must be accurately positioned and stably fixed to ensure reliable electrical communication between the cartridge and the printing press. Since the engaging portion of the first restricting portion is located adjacent to the terminal bearing structure, the positioning action of the first restricting portion occurs near the terminal. Positioning (ie, the terminals of the terminal carrying structure) is required. Can properly offset the elastic force from the terminal on the device side. Moreover, it is possible to suppress the positional displacement of the terminal that may occur due to vibration during a printing operation. Therefore, the positioning of the terminals is more stable, so a stable electrical connection between the box-side terminals and the equipment-side terminals is maintained.

In addition, since the lever is not integrated with the case, the material used to make the case may be different from the material used to make the lever. Moreover, less attention can be paid to flexibility and durability requirements and more attention to other properties such as ink resistance to select the material of the box.

In addition, because the lever is not on the box, no special attention is required to prevent the creep deformation of the lever when the box is packaged for transportation and distribution. This simplifies packaging requirements and improves user convenience. Since the lever is not an integral part of the case, the case can be made smaller. This further allows for a reduction in the size of the packaging materials (such as paper or boxes) used to package the boxes for transportation or distribution of the boxes, thus advantageously reducing shipping costs and parts costs. Moreover, because the lever is not integrated with the case, the first case-side restricting portion can have a small size and a simple structure, and is similar to the structure described in, for example, US Publication No. 2005/0151811. Ratio has higher stiffness. This leads to a significant reduction in the possibility of plastic deformation of the restriction portion on the side of the first case. In the attached or installed state, the box can be maintained at the correct position in the box mounting structure. This maintains normal or good contact between the box-side terminals and the device-side terminals and reduces the possibility of poor electrical connectivity. . Because the first box-side restricting part can have a small size and simple structure, it is different from the box of US Publication No. 2005/0151811, and no special attention is required in the packaging of the box for transportation and distribution Prevent the creep deformation of the lever. This reduces packaging requirements and also improves user convenience.

The structure that connects the box terminal and the engaging portion of the box to each other may be only a rigid structure (which is not the case of the flexible lever of US Publication No. 2005/0151811). In this case, less vibration is transmitted from the engaging portion to the box terminal, so the electrical communication is more stable.

Because the contact part plane (TP) of the terminal is neither parallel to nor perpendicular to the leading edge (288) Defined plane (BP), so the surface of the terminals of the box can be properly wiped during the insertion of the box into the printing press. In addition, this configuration reduces or eliminates insulation debris (dust) that can be generated when the terminals of the printing machine are scraped against the circuit board for a long distance during the installation of the box.

Since the printing press terminal applies an elastic force including a vector component in a direction in which the printing cartridge is detached from the printing press against the box terminal, it is not necessary to provide a spring such as the spring 103 described in US Patent No. 6,955,422. In other words, the elastic force from the printer-side terminal is used to press the printer-side terminal and the box-side terminal together, and also in the direction for removing from the printer when the engagement between the first restriction portion and the printer lever is released. Move the case. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide an additional spring as in the case of US Patent No. 6,955,422, which achieves a simpler structure and reduced cost.

Since the first restricting portion is adapted to engage with the engaging portion of the lever to restrict the movement of the case in a direction opposite to the installation direction, as a result, when the case is installed in the printing machine, the position of the case terminal will be determined by the device The elastic force of the side contact forming member is maintained at an appropriate position with respect to the mounting direction and by the first restricting portion with respect to a direction opposite to the mounting direction. Since the box terminals are "clamped" in this manner, they are firmly fixed to prevent movement in both the mounting direction and the direction opposite to the mounting direction. Therefore, compared with the one-sided limitation of the elastic member 40 and related configurations of US Patent No. 7,008,053, misalignment or disconnection between the box terminal and the device-side contact forming member is less likely to occur.

Adapt 1

The ink supply system as described above, wherein when the ink supply system supplies ink to the printing equipment (50), the plane (TP) of the contact portion is between about 25 degrees and the plane (BP) defined by the leading edge (288). A corner between 40 degrees.

As discussed with reference to FIGS. 42A to 45, when the contact portion plane forms an angle between about 25 and 40 degrees with respect to the plane defined by the leading edge, excessive wiping is prevented and sufficient force can be applied to prevent half insertion.

Adapt 2

The ink cartridge as described above, wherein when the ink supply system supplies ink to the printing device (50), the engaging portion (212) of the first restricting portion (210) is located at the rightmost contact among the plurality of terminals (400) The left side of the portion and the right side of the leftmost contact portion of the plurality of terminals (400).

When the ink supply system supplies ink to a printing device, if it is held too firmly, some of the contact-forming components on the device side (for example, terminal 734 in FIG. 31) may not be in firm contact. By positioning the engaging portion of the first restriction portion to the left of the rightmost contact portion of the plurality of terminals and to the right of the leftmost contact portion of the plurality of terminals, there may be a sufficient slant so that the plurality of terminals and the device side The electrical connection between the contact-forming components can be even more stable.

Adaptation 3

The ink supply system as described above, further comprising: a main body (22) including a front face (203) and a rear face (204), the front face (203) and the rear face (204) facing each other; a second restriction Part (220), which is close to the rear face (204) of the main body (22); terminal bearing structure (408), which is close to the front face (203) of the main body (22); the second restricted part (220) is adapted and assembled State to engage with a respective part (620) of an inkjet printing device (50), wherein when measuring a distance in a direction orthogonal to a plane (BP) defined by a leading edge (288), the second restricting part The distance (B) between the engaging portion of (220) and the plane (BP) defined by the leading edge (288) is greater than the engaging portion (212) of the first restricting portion (210) and the plane defined by the leading edge (288) (BP) Distance (A).

Compared with the case where the engaging portion of the first restricting portion is farther from the plane defined by the leading edge than the engaging portion of the second restricting portion, the engaging portion at the second restricting portion is located farther away than the engaging portion of the first restricting portion. At the plane defined by the leading edge, it is possible to more effectively reduce the possibility that the first-side restricting portion will become disengaged from the engaging portion of the printing press.

Adapt 4

The ink supply system as described above, further comprising: a main body (22) including a first surface (203) and a second surface (204), the first surface (203) and the second surface (204) ) Opposite each other; a second restricting portion (220), which is close to the second surface (204) of the main body (22); a terminal bearing structure (408), which is close to the first surface (203) of the main body (22); The second restricting portion (220) is adapted and configured to engage a respective portion (620) of the inkjet printing device (50), wherein the second restricting portion (220) is orthogonal to a plane defined by the leading edge (288) (BP When measuring the distance in one direction, the distance (B) between the engaging portion of the second restricting portion (220) and the plane (BP) defined by the leading edge (288) is greater than the engaging portion of the first restricting portion (210). (212) The distance (A) from the plane (BP) defined by the leading edge (288).

Compared with the case where the engaging portion of the first restricting portion is farther from the plane defined by the leading edge than the engaging portion of the second restricting portion, the engaging portion at the second restricting portion is located farther away than the engaging portion of the first restricting portion. At the plane defined by the leading edge, it is possible to more effectively reduce the possibility that the first-side restricting portion will become disengaged from the engaging portion of the printing press.

Adapt 5

The ink supply system as described above, wherein when the distance is measured in a direction orthogonal to a plane (BP) defined by the leading edge (288), when the ink supply system supplies ink to the printing equipment (50), The distance (A) between the engaging portion (212) of the first restricting portion (210) and the plane (BP) defined by the leading edge (288) is less than one pivot point (800c) of the lever (80) and the leading edge (288) The distance (C) between the defined planes (BP).

When the distance between the engaging portion of the first restricting portion and the plane defined by the leading edge is smaller than the distance between a pivot point of the lever and the plane defined by the leading edge when the ink is supplied to the printing device by the ink supply system, Lever is used to limit movement. This reduces the possibility that the first restricting portion becomes unlocked or disengaged from the engaging portion of the lever, so that a stable electrical connection is formed between the plurality of terminals and the contact forming member and the possibility of a bad connection is reduced. When a force is applied from the self-contact forming member, the first restricting portion is movable around the rotation axis of the lever. This reduces the possibility that the engaging portion of the first restriction portion becomes decoupled from the engaging portion of the lever.

Adaptation 6

The ink supply system as described above, wherein when the ink supply system supplies ink to the printing equipment (50), the engaging portion (212) of the first restriction portion (210) is on the right side, and the ink supply structure (280) faces downward, The engaging portion (212) of the first restricting portion (210) is located to the left of a pivot point (800c) of the lever.

When the ink supply system supplies ink to the printing equipment and the engaging portion of the first restricting portion is to the left of a pivot point of the lever and the engaging portion of the first restricting portion is on the right and the ink supply structure faces downward, the first restricting portion is at A rotational moment is generated on the lever to rotate the lever about the axis of rotation of the lever in the direction opposite to the unlocking direction. This reduces the possibility that the engaging portion of the first restricting portion is unlocked from the engaging portion of the lever, and further ensures a stable electrical connection between the plurality of terminals and the device-side contact forming member. Further, the possibility that the engaging portion of the first restricting portion becomes unlocked from the engaging portion of the lever is reduced.

Adaptation 7

The ink supply system as described above, further comprising a main body (22) close to one of the terminal carrying structures (408), wherein when the ink supply system supplies ink to the printing equipment (50), the first restriction portion (210) At least a part of the engaging portion (212) is located substantially at the center in the width direction of the main body (22).

By providing the first restricting portion in a position such that at least a portion of the engaging portion of the first restricting portion is substantially at the center in the width direction of the main body, the first restricting portion is positioned very close to the plurality of terminals so that the plurality of terminals The electrical connection between the components forming contact with the device side may be stable.

Adaptation 8

The ink supply system as described above, further comprising an adapter (299), wherein the ink supply structure (280), the terminal bearing structure (408), and the first restricting portion (210) are positioned at the adapter And the ink chamber (200) is adapted and configured to mate with the adapter (299).

Adaptation 9

The ink supply system as described above, further comprising an adapter (299j), wherein the terminal bearing structure (408) and the first restriction portion (210) are positioned on the adapter (299j), and the ink The supply structure (280) is positioned on the ink chamber (200) and the ink chamber (200) is adapted and configured to mate with the adapter (299).

Adaptation 10

The ink supply system as described above further includes an adapter (299k), an ink storage tank (200T) outside the inkjet printing equipment (50), a tube (200L), and an auxiliary adapter ( 200S), where the ink supply structure (280) is positioned on the auxiliary adapter (200S), the terminal bearing structure (408) and the first restriction portion (210) are positioned on the adapter (299k) and in the ink supply system When the ink is supplied to the printing equipment (50), the tube (200L) supplies the ink from the external storage tank (200T) to the auxiliary adapter (200S).

Adapt 11

The ink supply system as described above, further comprising a main body (22) including a top (202) and a bottom (201), the top and the bottom being opposite to each other, wherein a plane (BP) defined by the leading edge (288) ) Is substantially flush with the bottom (201).

G-7-10. Tenth change

An ink supply system adapted to supply ink to an inkjet printing device (50) including a plurality of device-side contact forming members (731 to 739), the inkjet printing device (50 ) Also includes a lever (80) with an engaging portion (810). The ink supply system includes: an electrical device; an ink chamber (200) for storing ink; and an ink supply structure (280), whose Adapted and configured to supply ink from an ink chamber (200) to an inkjet printing device (50), the ink supply structure (280) having a leading edge (288) defining an installation direction (SD) of a plane (BP); A terminal bearing structure (408) having a plurality of conductive terminals (400) coupled to the electrical device, and these terminals (400) are adapted and arranged on the terminal bearing structure (408) so that When the ink supply system supplies ink to the printing equipment (50), it comes into contact with the contact forming members (731 to 739) and receives the elastic force (Pt) from the contact forming member so that the contact forming members (731 to 739) from the device side A vector component of the elastic force (Pt) advances the ink chamber (200) in a direction (RD) opposite to the installation direction (SD); and a first restricting portion (210), which is adjusted to match the lever (80) The engaging portion (810) engages to limit the movement of the terminal bearing structure (408) in a direction (RD) opposite to the installation direction (SD); where the ink supply system supplies ink to the printing device (50) first The engaging portion (212) of the restricting portion (210) is positioned adjacent to the terminal carrying structure (408) and the terminals (400) are substantially arranged on a terminal which is neither parallel to nor perpendicular to the leading edge (288) Plane (TP).

Some of the benefits of the aforementioned changes of the seventh modification will now be explained. When the ink cartridge is installed in the printing press, the terminals must be accurately positioned and stably fixed to ensure reliable electrical communication between the cartridge and the printing press. Since the engaging portion of the first restricting portion is located adjacent to the terminal bearing structure, the positioning action of the first restricting portion occurs close to the most needed positioning (ie, the terminal of the terminal bearing structure). Can properly offset the elastic force from the terminal on the device side. Moreover, it is possible to suppress the positional displacement of the terminal that may occur due to vibration during a printing operation. Therefore, the positioning of the terminals is more stable, so a stable electrical connection between the box-side terminals and the equipment-side terminals is maintained.

In addition, since the lever is not integrated with the case, the material used to make the case may be different from the material used to make the lever. Moreover, less attention can be paid to flexibility and durability requirements and more attention to other properties such as ink resistance to select the material of the box.

In addition, because the lever is not on the box, no special attention is required to prevent the creep deformation of the lever when the box is packaged for transportation and distribution. This simplifies packaging requirements and improves user convenience. Since the lever is not an integral part of the case, the case can be made smaller. This further allows for a reduction in the size of the packaging materials (such as paper or boxes) used to package the boxes for transportation or distribution of the boxes, thus advantageously reducing shipping costs and parts costs. Moreover, since the lever is not integrated with the case, the first case-side restricting portion can have A small size and simple structure, and has a high stiffness compared to, for example, the structure described in US Publication No. 2005/0151811. This leads to a significant reduction in the possibility of plastic deformation of the restriction portion on the side of the first case. In the attached or installed state, the box can be maintained at the correct position in the box mounting structure. This maintains normal or good contact between the box-side terminals and the device-side terminals and reduces the possibility of poor electrical connectivity. . Because the first box-side restricting part can have a small size and simple structure, it is different from the box of US Publication No. 2005/0151811, and no special attention is required in the packaging of the box for transportation and distribution Prevent the creep deformation of the lever. This reduces packaging requirements and also improves user convenience.

The structure that connects the box terminal and the engaging portion of the box to each other may be only a rigid structure (which is not the case of the flexible lever of US Publication No. 2005/0151811). In this case, less vibration is transmitted from the engaging portion to the box terminal, so the electrical communication is more stable.

Since the terminal plane (TP) of the terminal is neither parallel to nor perpendicular to the plane (BP) defined by the leading edge (288), the surface of the box terminal can be properly wiped during the insertion of the box into the printing machine. In addition, this configuration reduces or eliminates insulation debris (dust) that can be generated when the terminals of the printing machine are scraped against the circuit board for a long distance during the installation of the box.

Since the printing press terminal applies an elastic force including a vector component in a direction in which the printing cartridge is detached from the printing press against the box terminal, it is not necessary to provide a spring such as the spring 103 described in US Patent No. 6,955,422. In other words, the elastic force from the printer-side terminal is used to press the printer-side terminal and the box-side terminal together, and also in the direction for removing from the printer when the engagement between the first restriction portion and the printer lever is released. Move the case. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide an additional spring as in the case of US Patent No. 6,955,422, which achieves a simpler structure and reduced cost.

Since the first restricting portion is adapted to engage with the engaging portion of the lever to restrict the movement of the case in a direction opposite to the installation direction, as a result, when the case is installed in the printing machine, the position of the case terminal will be determined by the device. The side contact forms the elastic force of the component relative to the The mounting direction is maintained at a proper position by the first restricting portion with respect to the direction opposite to the mounting direction. Since the box terminals are "clamped" in this manner, they are firmly fixed to prevent movement in both the mounting direction and the direction opposite to the mounting direction. Therefore, compared with the one-sided limitation of the elastic member 40 and related configurations of US Patent No. 7,008,053, misalignment or disconnection between the box terminal and the device-side contact forming member is less likely to occur.

Adapt 1

The ink supply system as described above, wherein when the ink supply system supplies ink to the printing equipment (50), the terminal plane (TP) is between about 25 degrees and the plane (BP) defined by the leading edge (288). A corner between 40 degrees.

As discussed with reference to FIGS. 42A to 45, when the terminal plane forms an angle between about 25 and 40 degrees with respect to the plane defined by the leading edge, excessive wiping is prevented and sufficient force can be applied to prevent half insertion.

Adapt 2

The ink supply system as described above, wherein when the ink supply system supplies ink to the printing device (50), the engaging portion (212) of the first restricting portion (210) is located at the far right of one of the plurality of terminals (400). A left side of a right edge of one of the terminals and a right side of a left edge of one of the leftmost terminals of the plurality of terminals (400).

When the ink supply system supplies ink to a printing device, if it is held too firmly, some of the contact-forming components on the device side (for example, terminal 734 in FIG. 31) may not be in firm contact. By positioning the engaging portion of the first restricting portion to the left of the right edge of one of the rightmost terminals of one of the plurality of terminals and to the right of the left edge of one of the leftmost terminals of the plurality of terminals, the ink cartridge can be fully inclined Placed so that the electrical connection between the plurality of terminals and the device-side contact-forming component can be even more stable.

Adaptation 3

The ink supply system as described above, further comprising: a main body (22) including a front face (203) and a rear face (204), the front face (203) and the rear face (204) facing each other; a The second restricting portion (220) is close to the rear face (204) of the main body (22); the terminal bearing structure (408) is close to the front face (203) of the main body (22); the second restricting portion (220) is Adapted and configured to engage with a separate section (620) of an inkjet printing device (50), where when measuring a distance in a direction orthogonal to a plane (BP) defined by the leading edge (288), the first The distance (B) between the engaging portion of the second restricting portion (220) and the plane (BP) defined by the leading edge (288) is greater than the engaging portion (212) of the first restricting portion (210) and the leading edge (288) The distance (A) between the defined planes (BP).

Compared with the case where the engaging portion of the first restricting portion is farther from the plane defined by the leading edge than the engaging portion of the second restricting portion, the engaging portion at the second restricting portion is located farther away than the engaging portion of the first restricting portion. At the plane defined by the leading edge, it is possible to more effectively reduce the possibility that the first-side restricting portion will become disengaged from the engaging portion of the printing press.

Adapt 4

The ink supply system as described above, further comprising: a main body (22) including a first surface (203) and a second surface (204), the first surface (203) and the second surface (204) ) Opposite each other; a second restricting portion (220), which is close to the second surface (204) of the main body (22); a terminal bearing structure (408), which is close to the first surface (203) of the main body (22); The second restricting portion (220) is adapted and configured to engage a respective portion (620) of the inkjet printing device (50), wherein the second restricting portion (220) is orthogonal to a plane defined by the leading edge (288) (BP When measuring the distance in one direction, the distance (B) between the engaging portion of the second restricting portion (220) and the plane (BP) defined by the leading edge (288) is greater than the engaging portion of the first restricting portion (210). (212) The distance (A) from the plane (BP) defined by the leading edge (288).

Compared with the case where the engaging portion of the first restricting portion is farther from the plane defined by the leading edge than the engaging portion of the second restricting portion, the engaging portion at the second restricting portion is located farther away than the engaging portion of the first restricting portion. At the plane defined by the leading edge, it is possible to more effectively reduce the possibility that the first-side restricting portion will become disengaged from the engaging portion of the printing press.

Adapt 5

The ink supply system as described above, wherein when the distance is measured in a direction orthogonal to a plane (BP) defined by the leading edge (288), when the ink supply system supplies ink to the printing equipment (50), The distance (A) between the engaging portion (212) of the first restricting portion (210) and the plane (BP) defined by the leading edge (288) is less than one pivot point (800c) of the lever (80) and the leading edge (288) The distance (C) between the defined planes (BP).

When the distance between the engaging portion of the first restricting portion and the plane defined by the leading edge is smaller than the distance between a pivot point of the lever and the plane defined by the leading edge when the ink is supplied to the printing device by the ink supply system, Lever is used to limit movement. This reduces the possibility that the first restricting portion becomes unlocked or disengaged from the engaging portion of the lever, so that a stable electrical connection is formed between the plurality of terminals and the contact forming member and the possibility of a bad connection is reduced. When a force is applied from the self-contact forming member, the first restricting portion is movable around the rotation axis of the lever. This reduces the possibility that the engaging portion of the first restriction portion becomes decoupled from the engaging portion of the lever.

Adaptation 6

The ink supply system as described above, wherein when the ink supply system supplies ink to the printing equipment (50), the engaging portion (212) of the first restriction portion (210) is on the right side, and the ink supply structure (280) faces downward, The engaging portion (212) of the first restricting portion (210) is located to the left of a pivot point (800c) of the lever.

When the ink supply system supplies ink to the printing equipment and the engaging portion of the first restricting portion is to the left of a pivot point of the lever and the engaging portion of the first restricting portion is on the right and the ink supply structure faces downward, the first restricting portion is at A rotational moment is generated on the lever to rotate the lever about the axis of rotation of the lever in the direction opposite to the unlocking direction. This reduces the possibility that the engaging portion of the first restricting portion is unlocked from the engaging portion of the lever, and further ensures a stable electrical connection between the plurality of terminals and the device-side contact forming member. Further, the possibility that the engaging portion of the first restricting portion becomes unlocked from the engaging portion of the lever is reduced.

Adaptation 7

The ink supply system as described above, further comprising a proximity terminal carrying structure (408) a main body (22), wherein when the ink supply system supplies ink to the printing equipment (50), at least a part of the engaging portion (212) of the first restricting portion (210) is located in the substantial body (22) In the width direction.

By providing the first restricting portion in a position such that at least a portion of the engaging portion of the first restricting portion is substantially at the center in the width direction of the main body, the first restricting portion is positioned very close to the plurality of terminals so that the plurality of terminals The electrical connection between the components forming contact with the device side may be stable.

Adaptation 8

The ink supply system as described above, further comprising an adapter (299), wherein the ink supply structure (280), the terminal bearing structure (408), and the first restricting portion (210) are positioned at the adapter And the ink chamber (200) is adapted and configured to mate with the adapter (299).

Adaptation 9

The ink supply system as described above, further comprising an adapter (299j), wherein the terminal bearing structure (408) and the first restriction portion (210) are positioned on the adapter (299j), and the ink The supply structure (280) is positioned on the ink chamber (200) and the ink chamber (200) is adapted and configured to mate with the adapter (299).

Adaptation 10

The ink supply system as described above further includes an adapter (299k), an ink storage tank (200T) outside the inkjet printing equipment (50), a tube (200L), and an auxiliary adapter ( 200S), where the ink supply structure (280) is positioned on the auxiliary adapter (200S), the terminal bearing structure (408) and the first restriction portion (210) are positioned on the adapter (299k) and in the ink supply system When the ink is supplied to the printing equipment (50), the tube (200L) supplies the ink from the external storage tank (200T) to the auxiliary adapter (200S).

Adapt 11

The ink supply system as described above, further comprising a top (202) And a main body (22) of a bottom (201), the top and bottom being opposite to each other, wherein a plane (BP) defined by the leading edge (288) is substantially flush with the bottom (201).

G-7-11. Eleventh change

An ink supply system adapted to supply ink to a part of an inkjet printing device (50), the system includes: a part of an inkjet printing device (50), the part including: a plurality of device-side contact forming members ( 731 to 739); and a lever (80) having an engaging portion (810); an electric device; an ink chamber (200) for storing ink; and an ink supply structure (280), which is adapted and Configured to supply ink from an ink chamber (200) to an inkjet printing device (50), the ink supply structure (280) having a leading edge (288) defining an installation direction (SD) of a plane (BP); a terminal A carrying structure (408) having a plurality of conductive terminals (400) coupled to the electrical device, the terminals (400) being at the terminals (400) when the ink supply system supplies ink to the printing device (50) ) Is in contact with the contact forming members (731 to 739) at the contact portion (cp) and receives the elastic force (Pt) from the contact forming member so that the elastic force (Pt) of the contact forming member (731 to 739) from the device side A vector component advances the ink chamber (200) in a direction (RD) opposite to the installation direction (SD); and a first limit The control part (210) is engaged with the engaging part (810) of the lever (80) to limit the movement of the terminal bearing structure (408) in a direction (RD) opposite to the installation direction (SD); When the ink is supplied to the printing device (50), the engaging portion (212) of the first restricting portion (210) is positioned adjacent to the terminal bearing structure (408) and the contact portion (cp) is substantially disposed neither parallel to nor perpendicular to One of the planes of the leading edge (288) touches the partial plane (TP).

Some of the benefits of the aforementioned changes of the seventh modification will now be explained. When the ink cartridge is installed in the printing press, the terminals must be accurately positioned and stably fixed to ensure reliable electrical communication between the cartridge and the printing press. Since the engaging portion of the first restricting portion is located adjacent to the terminal bearing structure, the positioning action of the first restricting portion occurs close to the most needed positioning (ie, the terminal of the terminal bearing structure). Can properly offset the elastic force from the terminal on the device side. Moreover, it is possible to suppress The position of the terminal is shifted. Therefore, the positioning of the terminals is more stable, so a stable electrical connection between the box-side terminals and the equipment-side terminals is maintained.

In addition, since the lever is not integrated with the case, the material used to make the case may be different from the material used to make the lever. Moreover, less attention can be paid to flexibility and durability requirements and more attention to other properties such as ink resistance to select the material of the box.

In addition, because the lever is not on the box, no special attention is required to prevent the creep deformation of the lever when the box is packaged for transportation and distribution. This simplifies packaging requirements and improves user convenience. Since the lever is not an integral part of the case, the case can be made smaller. This further allows for a reduction in the size of the packaging materials (such as paper or boxes) used to package the boxes for transportation or distribution of the boxes, thus advantageously reducing shipping costs and parts costs. Moreover, because the lever is not integrated with the case, the first case-side restricting portion can have a small size and a simple structure, and is similar to the structure described in, for example, US Publication No. 2005/0151811. Ratio has higher stiffness. This leads to a significant reduction in the possibility of plastic deformation of the restriction portion on the side of the first case. In the attached or installed state, the box can be maintained at the correct position in the box mounting structure. This maintains normal or good contact between the box-side terminals and the device-side terminals and reduces the possibility of poor electrical connectivity. . Because the first box-side restricting part can have a small size and simple structure, it is different from the box of US Publication No. 2005/0151811, and no special attention is required in the packaging of the box for transportation and distribution Prevent the creep deformation of the lever. This reduces packaging requirements and also improves user convenience.

The structure that connects the box terminal and the engaging portion of the box to each other may be only a rigid structure (which is not the case of the flexible lever of US Publication No. 2005/0151811). In this case, less vibration is transmitted from the engaging portion to the box terminal, so the electrical communication is more stable.

Since the contact part plane (TP) of the terminal is neither parallel to nor perpendicular to the plane (BP) defined by the leading edge (288), the surface of the box terminal can be properly wiped during the insertion of the box into the printing press . In addition, this configuration reduces or eliminates Insulation debris (dust) that can be generated when the brush terminals are abutted against the circuit board for a long distance.

Since the printing press terminal applies an elastic force including a vector component in a direction in which the printing cartridge is detached from the printing press against the box terminal, it is not necessary to provide a spring such as the spring 103 described in US Patent No. 6,955,422. In other words, the elastic force from the printer-side terminal is used to press the printer-side terminal and the box-side terminal together, and also in the direction for removing from the printer when the engagement between the first restriction portion and the printer lever is released. Move the case. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide an additional spring as in the case of US Patent No. 6,955,422, which achieves a simpler structure and reduced cost.

Since the first restricting portion is adapted to engage with the engaging portion of the lever to restrict the movement of the case in a direction opposite to the installation direction, as a result, when the case is installed in the printing machine, the position of the case terminal will be determined by the device The elastic force of the side contact forming member is maintained at an appropriate position with respect to the mounting direction and by the first restricting portion with respect to a direction opposite to the mounting direction. Since the box terminals are "clamped" in this manner, they are firmly fixed to prevent movement in both the mounting direction and the direction opposite to the mounting direction. Therefore, compared with the one-sided limitation of the elastic member 40 and related configurations of US Patent No. 7,008,053, misalignment or disconnection between the box terminal and the device-side contact forming member is less likely to occur.

Adapt 1

The ink supply system as described above, wherein when the ink supply system supplies ink to the printing equipment (50), the plane (TP) of the contact portion is between about 25 degrees and the plane (BP) defined by the leading edge (288). A corner between 40 degrees.

As discussed with reference to FIGS. 42A to 45, when the contact portion plane forms an angle between about 25 and 40 degrees with respect to the plane defined by the leading edge, excessive wiping is prevented and sufficient force can be applied to prevent half insertion.

Adapt 2

The ink cartridge as described above, wherein the ink is supplied to the printing unit in the ink supply system. When the device (50) is brushed, the engaging portion (212) of the first restricting portion (210) is located to the left of the rightmost contact portion of the plurality of terminals (400) and to the left of the leftmost contact portion of the plurality of terminals (400). Right.

When the ink supply system supplies ink to a printing device, if it is held too firmly, some of the contact-forming components on the device side (for example, terminal 734 in FIG. 31) may not be in firm contact. By positioning the engaging portion of the first restriction portion to the left of the rightmost contact portion of the plurality of terminals and to the right of the leftmost contact portion of the plurality of terminals, there may be a sufficient slant so that the plurality of terminals and the device side The electrical connection between the contact-forming components can be even more stable.

Adaptation 3

The ink supply system as described above, further comprising: a main body (22) including a front face (203) and a rear face (204), the front face (203) and the rear face (204) facing each other; a second restriction Part (220), which is close to the rear face (204) of the main body (22); terminal bearing structure (408), which is close to the front face (203) of the main body (22); the second restricting part (220) and inkjet printing A separate portion (620) of one of the devices (50) is engaged, wherein when the distance is measured in a direction orthogonal to a plane (BP) defined by the leading edge (288), the engaging portion of the second restricting portion (220) The distance (B) from the plane (BP) defined by the leading edge (288) is greater than the distance between the engaging portion (212) of the first restriction portion (210) and the plane (BP) defined by the leading edge (288). Distance (A).

Compared with the case where the engaging portion of the first restricting portion is farther from the plane defined by the leading edge than the engaging portion of the second restricting portion, the engaging portion at the second restricting portion is located farther away than the engaging portion of the first restricting portion. At the plane defined by the leading edge, it is possible to more effectively reduce the possibility that the first-side restricting portion will become disengaged from the engaging portion of the printing press.

Adapt 4

The ink supply system as described above, further comprising: a main body (22) including a first surface (203) and a second surface (204), the first surface (203) and the second surface (204) ) Opposite each other; a second restricted portion (220), which is close to the second table of the main body (22) Surface (204); terminal bearing structure (408), which is close to the first surface (203) of the main body (22); the second restricting portion (220) and a separate portion (620) of an inkjet printing device (50) ) Meshing, in which when the distance is measured in a direction orthogonal to a plane (BP) defined by the leading edge (288), the meshing portion of the second restricting portion (220) and the plane defined by the leading edge (288) ( The distance (B) between BP) is greater than the distance (A) between the engaging portion (212) of the first restriction portion (210) and a plane (BP) defined by the leading edge (288).

Compared with the case where the engaging portion of the first restricting portion is farther from the plane defined by the leading edge than the engaging portion of the second restricting portion, the engaging portion at the second restricting portion is located farther away than the engaging portion of the first restricting portion. At the plane defined by the leading edge, it is possible to more effectively reduce the possibility that the first-side restricting portion will become disengaged from the engaging portion of the printing press.

Adapt 5

The ink supply system as described above, wherein the lever (80) has two ends and a pivot point (800c) in the middle of the two ends, and wherein the axis is orthogonal to the plane defined by the leading edge (288). (BP) when measuring the distance in one direction, when the ink supply system supplies ink to the printing equipment (50), the engaging portion (212) of the first restricting portion (210) and the plane defined by the leading edge (288) ( The distance (A) between BP) is smaller than the distance (C) between the pivot point (800c) of the lever (80) and the plane (BP) defined by the leading edge (288).

When the distance between the engaging portion of the first restricting portion and the plane defined by the leading edge is smaller than the distance between a pivot point of the lever and the plane defined by the leading edge when the ink is supplied to the printing device by the ink supply system, Lever is used to limit movement. This reduces the possibility that the first restricting portion becomes unlocked or disengaged from the engaging portion of the lever, so that a stable electrical connection is formed between the plurality of terminals and the contact forming member and the possibility of a bad connection is reduced. When a force is applied from the self-contact forming member, the first restricting portion is movable around the rotation axis of the lever. This reduces the possibility that the engaging portion of the first restriction portion becomes decoupled from the engaging portion of the lever.

Adaptation 6

The ink supply system as described above, wherein the lever (80) has two ends and the two A pivot point (800c) in the middle of each end, in which the ink is supplied to the printing equipment (50) by the ink supply system, the engaging portion (212) of the first restriction portion (210) is on the right side, and the ink supply structure (280) When facing downward, the engaging portion (212) of the first restricting portion (210) is to the left of the pivot point (800c) of the lever.

When the ink supply system supplies ink to the printing equipment and the engaging portion of the first restricting portion is to the left of a pivot point of the lever and the engaging portion of the first restricting portion is on the right and the ink supply structure faces downward, the first restricting portion is at A rotational moment is generated on the lever to rotate the lever about the axis of rotation of the lever in the direction opposite to the unlocking direction. This reduces the possibility that the engaging portion of the first restricting portion is unlocked from the engaging portion of the lever, and further ensures a stable electrical connection between the plurality of terminals and the device-side contact forming member. Further, the possibility that the engaging portion of the first restricting portion becomes unlocked from the engaging portion of the lever is reduced.

Adaptation 7

The ink supply system as described above, further comprising a main body (22) close to one of the terminal carrying structures (408), wherein when the ink supply system supplies ink to the printing equipment (50), the first restriction portion (210) At least a part of the engaging portion (212) is located substantially at the center in the width direction of the main body (22).

By providing the first restricting portion in a position such that at least a portion of the engaging portion of the first restricting portion is substantially at the center in the width direction of the main body, the first restricting portion is positioned very close to the plurality of terminals so that the plurality of terminals The electrical connection between the components forming contact with the device side may be stable.

Adaptation 8

The ink supply system as described above, further comprising an adapter (299), wherein the ink supply structure (280), the terminal bearing structure (408), and the first restricting portion (210) are positioned at the adapter And the ink chamber (200) is adapted and configured to mate with the adapter (299).

Adaptation 9

The ink supply system as described above, further comprising an adapter (299j), wherein the terminal bearing structure (408) and the first restriction portion (210) are positioned on the adapter (299j), and the ink The supply structure (280) is positioned on the ink chamber (200) and the ink chamber (200) is adapted and configured to mate with the adapter (299).

Adaptation 10

The ink supply system as described above further includes an adapter (299k), an ink storage tank (200T) outside the inkjet printing equipment (50), a tube (200L), and an auxiliary adapter ( 200S), where the ink supply structure (280) is positioned on the auxiliary adapter (200S), the terminal bearing structure (408) and the first restriction portion (210) are positioned on the adapter (299k) and in the ink supply system When the ink is supplied to the printing equipment (50), the tube (200L) supplies the ink from the external storage tank (200T) to the auxiliary adapter (200S).

Adapt 11

The ink supply system as described above, further comprising a main body (22) including a top (202) and a bottom (201), the top and the bottom being opposite to each other, wherein a plane (BP) defined by the leading edge (288) ) Is substantially flush with the bottom (201).

G-7-12. Twelfth change

An ink supply system adapted to supply ink to a part of an inkjet printing device (50), the system includes: a part of an inkjet printing device (50), the part including: a plurality of device-side contact forming members ( 731 to 739); and a lever (80) having an engaging portion (810); an electric device; an ink chamber (200) for storing ink; and an ink supply structure (280), which is adapted and Configured to supply ink from the ink chamber (200) to the inkjet printing device (50), the ink supply structure (280) having a leading edge (288) defining an installation direction (SD) of a plane (BP); A terminal carrying structure (408) having a plurality of conductive terminals (400) coupled to the electrical device, the terminals (400) and contact forming components when the ink supply system supplies ink to the printing device (50) (731 to 739) contact and receive the elastic force (Pt) from the contact forming member; and a first restricting portion (210), which is in contact with the lever (80) The engaging portion (810) engages to limit the movement of the terminal bearing structure (408) in a direction (RD) opposite to the installation direction (SD); wherein when the ink supply system supplies ink to the printing device (50), The engaging portion (212) of the first restricting portion (210) is positioned adjacent to the terminal bearing structure (408) and the terminals (400) are substantially arranged in a plane that is neither parallel to nor perpendicular to the leading edge (288) One of the terminal planes (TP).

Some of the benefits of the aforementioned changes of the seventh modification will now be explained. When the ink cartridge is installed in the printing press, the terminals must be accurately positioned and stably fixed to ensure reliable electrical communication between the cartridge and the printing press. Since the engaging portion of the first restricting portion is located adjacent to the terminal bearing structure, the positioning action of the first restricting portion occurs close to the most needed positioning (ie, the terminal of the terminal bearing structure). Can properly offset the elastic force from the terminal on the device side. Moreover, it is possible to suppress the positional displacement of the terminal that may occur due to vibration during a printing operation. Therefore, the positioning of the terminals is more stable, so a stable electrical connection between the box-side terminals and the equipment-side terminals is maintained.

In addition, since the lever is not integrated with the case, the material used to make the case may be different from the material used to make the lever. Moreover, less attention can be paid to flexibility and durability requirements and more attention to other properties such as ink resistance to select the material of the box.

In addition, because the lever is not on the box, no special attention is required to prevent the creep deformation of the lever when the box is packaged for transportation and distribution. This simplifies packaging requirements and improves user convenience. Since the lever is not an integral part of the case, the case can be made smaller. This further allows for a reduction in the size of the packaging materials (such as paper or boxes) used to package the boxes for transportation or distribution of the boxes, thus advantageously reducing shipping costs and parts costs. Moreover, because the lever is not integrated with the case, the first case-side restricting portion can have a small size and a simple structure, and is similar to the structure described in, for example, US Publication No. 2005/0151811. Ratio has higher stiffness. This leads to a significant reduction in the possibility of plastic deformation of the restriction portion on the side of the first case. In the attached or installed state, the box can be maintained at the correct position in the box mounting structure. This maintains the box-side terminal and the device-side terminal. Normal or good contact between them and reduce the possibility of poor electrical connectivity. Because the first box-side restricting part can have a small size and simple structure, it is different from the box of US Publication No. 2005/0151811, and no special attention is required in the packaging of the box for transportation and distribution Prevent the creep deformation of the lever. This reduces packaging requirements and also improves user convenience.

The structure that connects the box terminal and the engaging portion of the box to each other may be only a rigid structure (which is not the case of the flexible lever of US Publication No. 2005/0151811). In this case, less vibration is transmitted from the engaging portion to the box terminal, so the electrical communication is more stable.

Since the terminal plane (TP) of the terminal is neither parallel to nor perpendicular to the plane (BP) defined by the leading edge (288), the surface of the box terminal can be properly wiped during the insertion of the box into the printing machine. In addition, this configuration reduces or eliminates insulation debris (dust) that can be generated when the terminals of the printing machine are scraped against the circuit board for a long distance during the installation of the box.

Since the printing press terminal applies an elastic force including a vector component in a direction in which the printing cartridge is detached from the printing press against the box terminal, it is not necessary to provide a spring such as the spring 103 described in US Patent No. 6,955,422. In other words, the elastic force from the printer-side terminal is used to press the printer-side terminal and the box-side terminal together, and also in the direction for removing from the printer when the engagement between the first restriction portion and the printer lever is released. Move the case. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide an additional spring as in the case of US Patent No. 6,955,422, which achieves a simpler structure and reduced cost.

Since the first restricting portion is adapted to engage with the engaging portion of the lever to restrict the movement of the case in a direction opposite to the installation direction, as a result, when the case is installed in the printing machine, the position of the case terminal will be determined by the device The elastic force of the side contact forming member is maintained at an appropriate position with respect to the mounting direction and by the first restricting portion with respect to a direction opposite to the mounting direction. Since the box terminals are "clamped" in this manner, they are firmly fixed to prevent movement in both the mounting direction and the direction opposite to the mounting direction. Therefore, compared with the one-sided limitation of the elastic member 40 and related configurations of US Patent No. 7,008,053, it is more unlikely Misalignment or disconnection between the case terminal and the device-side contact forming member is now present.

Adapt 1

The ink supply system as described above, wherein when the ink supply system supplies ink to the printing equipment (50), the terminal plane (TP) is between about 25 degrees and the plane (BP) defined by the leading edge (288). A corner between 40 degrees.

As discussed with reference to FIGS. 42A to 45, when the terminal plane forms an angle between about 25 and 40 degrees with respect to the plane defined by the leading edge, excessive wiping is prevented and sufficient force can be applied to prevent half insertion.

Adapt 2

The ink supply system as described above, wherein when the ink supply system supplies ink to the printing device (50), the engaging portion (212) of the first restricting portion (210) is located at the far right of one of the plurality of terminals (400). A left side of a right edge of one of the terminals and a right side of a left edge of one of the leftmost terminals of the plurality of terminals (400).

When the ink supply system supplies ink to a printing device, if it is held too firmly, some of the contact-forming components on the device side (for example, terminal 734 in FIG. 31) may not be in firm contact. By positioning the engaging portion of the first restricting portion to the left of the right edge of one of the rightmost terminals of one of the plurality of terminals and to the right of the left edge of one of the leftmost terminals of the plurality of terminals, the ink cartridge can be fully inclined Placed so that the electrical connection between the plurality of terminals and the device-side contact-forming component can be even more stable.

Adaptation 3

The ink supply system as described above, further comprising: a main body (22) including a front face (203) and a rear face (204), the front face (203) and the rear face (204) facing each other; a second restriction Part (220), which is close to the rear face (204) of the main body (22); terminal bearing structure (408), which is close to the front face (203) of the main body (22); the second restricting part (220) and inkjet printing A separate portion (620) of one of the devices (50) is engaged, wherein when the distance is measured in a direction orthogonal to a plane (BP) defined by the leading edge (288), the engaging portion of the second restricting portion (220) The distance (B) from the plane (BP) defined by the leading edge (288) is greater than the distance between the engaging portion (212) of the first restriction portion (210) and the plane (BP) defined by the leading edge (288). Distance (A).

Compared with the case where the engaging portion of the first restricting portion is farther from the plane defined by the leading edge than the engaging portion of the second restricting portion, the engaging portion at the second restricting portion is located farther away than the engaging portion of the first restricting portion. At the plane defined by the leading edge, it is possible to more effectively reduce the possibility that the first-side restricting portion will become disengaged from the engaging portion of the printing press.

Adapt 4

The ink supply system as described above, further comprising: a main body (22) including a first surface (203) and a second surface (204), the first surface (203) and the second surface (204) ) Opposite each other; a second restricting portion (220), which is close to the second surface (204) of the main body (22); a terminal bearing structure (408), which is close to the first surface (203) of the main body (22); The second restricting portion (220) is engaged with a respective portion (620) of an inkjet printing device (50), and the distance is measured in a direction orthogonal to a plane (BP) defined by the leading edge (288). When the distance (B) between the engaging portion of the second restricting portion (220) and the plane (BP) defined by the leading edge (288) is greater than the engaging portion (212) of the first restricting portion (210) and the leading edge (288) The distance (A) between the defined planes (BP).

Compared with the case where the engaging portion of the first restricting portion is farther from the plane defined by the leading edge than the engaging portion of the second restricting portion, the engaging portion at the second restricting portion is located farther away than the engaging portion of the first restricting portion. At the plane defined by the leading edge, it is possible to more effectively reduce the possibility that the first-side restricting portion will become disengaged from the engaging portion of the printing press.

Adapt 5

The ink supply system as described above, wherein the lever (80) has two ends and a pivot point (800c) in the middle of the two ends, and wherein the axis is orthogonal to the plane defined by the leading edge (288). (BP) when measuring the distance in one direction, when the ink supply system supplies ink to the printing equipment (50), the engaging portion (212) of the first restricting portion (210) and the plane defined by the leading edge (288) ( BP) The distance (A) is less than the pivot point (800c) of the lever (80) and defined by the leading edge (288) The distance (C) between the planes (BP).

When the distance between the engaging portion of the first restricting portion and the plane defined by the leading edge is smaller than the distance between a pivot point of the lever and the plane defined by the leading edge when the ink is supplied to the printing device by the ink supply system, Lever is used to limit movement. This reduces the possibility that the first restricting portion becomes unlocked or disengaged from the engaging portion of the lever, so that a stable electrical connection is formed between the plurality of terminals and the contact forming member and the possibility of a bad connection is reduced. When a force is applied from the self-contact forming member, the first restricting portion is movable around the rotation axis of the lever. This reduces the possibility that the engaging portion of the first restriction portion becomes decoupled from the engaging portion of the lever.

Adaptation 6

The ink supply system as described above, wherein the lever (80) has two ends and a pivot point (800c) between the two ends, and wherein the ink supply system supplies ink to the printing equipment (50), When the engaging portion (212) of the first restricting portion (210) is on the right side and the ink supply structure (280) faces downward, the engaging portion (212) of the first restricting portion (210) is at the pivot point (800c) of the lever Left.

When the ink supply system supplies ink to the printing equipment and the engaging portion of the first restricting portion is to the left of a pivot point of the lever and the engaging portion of the first restricting portion is on the right and the ink supply structure faces downward, the first restricting portion is at A rotational moment is generated on the lever to rotate the lever about the axis of rotation of the lever in the direction opposite to the unlocking direction. This reduces the possibility that the engaging portion of the first restricting portion is unlocked from the engaging portion of the lever, and further ensures a stable electrical connection between the plurality of terminals and the device-side contact forming member. Further, the possibility that the engaging portion of the first restricting portion becomes unlocked from the engaging portion of the lever is reduced.

Adaptation 7

The ink supply system as described above, further comprising a main body (22) close to one of the terminal carrying structures (408), wherein when the ink supply system supplies ink to the printing equipment (50), the first restriction portion (210) At least a part of the engaging portion (212) is located substantially at the center in the width direction of the main body (22).

By providing the first restricting portion in a position such that at least a portion of the engaging portion of the first restricting portion is substantially at the center in the width direction of the main body, the first restricting portion is positioned very close to the plurality of terminals so that the plurality of terminals The electrical connection between the components forming contact with the device side may be stable.

Adaptation 8

The ink supply system as described above, further comprising an adapter (299), wherein the ink supply structure (280), the terminal bearing structure (408), and the first restricting portion (210) are positioned at the adapter And the ink chamber (200) is adapted and configured to mate with the adapter (299).

Adaptation 9

The ink supply system as described above, further comprising an adapter (299j), wherein the terminal bearing structure (408) and the first restriction portion (210) are positioned on the adapter (299j), and the ink The supply structure (280) is positioned on the ink chamber (200) and the ink chamber (200) is adapted and configured to mate with the adapter (299).

Adaptation 10

The ink supply system as described above further includes an adapter (299k), an ink storage tank (200T) outside the inkjet printing equipment (50), a tube (200L), and an auxiliary adapter ( 200S), where the ink supply structure (280) is positioned on the auxiliary adapter (200S), the terminal bearing structure (408) and the first restriction portion (210) are positioned on the adapter (299k) and in the ink supply system When the ink is supplied to the printing equipment (50), the tube (200L) supplies the ink from the external storage tank (200T) to the auxiliary adapter (200S).

Adapt 11

The ink supply system as described above, further comprising a main body (22) including a top (202) and a bottom (201), the top and the bottom being opposite to each other, wherein a plane (BP) defined by the leading edge (288) ) Is substantially flush with the bottom (201).

G-8. Eighth modification

The present invention can be achieved by the following description and changes. In each of these descriptions, the symbols in parentheses after the elements correspond to the symbols of the individual elements explained in the first embodiment or in the modification of the case by means of an adapter.

G-8-1. First change

A cartridge (20) adapted to be mounted on a printing device having one of the following structures: the printing device (50) includes a plurality of device-side contact forming members (731 to 739), the plurality of device-side contact forming members are Configured to apply elastic force (Pt) to the box body (20), the printing device (50) also includes a lever (80) having an engaging portion (810), the box body (20) including: a first Face (203), second face (204), third face (202), and fourth face (201), wherein the first face (203) and the second face (204) are opposite each other and the third face (202) ) And the fourth face (201) are opposite each other; an electric device; a liquid chamber (200) for storing liquid; a liquid supply structure (280), which is positioned at the fourth face (201), To supply liquid from the liquid chamber (200) to the printing equipment (50), and the liquid supply structure (280) has a leading edge defining a mounting direction (SD) of a plane (BP) of the casing (20) (288); a conductive terminal (400), which is located closer to the first surface (203) than the second surface (204) and is coupled to the electrical device, the terminals (400) are configured to The box (20) is mounted on the printing equipment (50 ) Contact the contact forming members (731 to 739) at the contact portion (cp) of the terminals (400) and receive the elastic force (Pt) from the contact forming members. The equal contact portion (cp) is substantially disposed in a contact portion plane (TP) that is neither parallel to nor perpendicular to the plane (BP) defined by the leading edge (288); and a first restricting portion (210 ), Which is adapted to mesh with the engaging portion (810) of the lever (80) to restrict the movement of the case (20) in a direction (RD) opposite to the installation direction (SD), and the first restricting portion (210) The engaging portion (212) is located closer to one of the contact portions (cp) than the crossing portion (291) of the third surface (202) and the first surface (203).

Some of the benefits of the aforementioned changes of the eighth modification will now be explained. When the box is installed in the printing equipment, the terminals must be accurately positioned and stably fixed to ensure that the box and the Reliable electrical communication between printing equipment. Since the engaging portion of the first restricting portion is located closer to one of the contact portions than the crossing between the third surface and one of the first surfaces, the positioning action of the first restricting portion occurs closer to the most needed positioning (also That is, the terminals of the terminal bearing structure). Can properly offset the elastic force from the terminal on the device side. Moreover, it is possible to suppress the positional displacement of the terminal that may occur due to vibration during a printing operation. Therefore, the positioning of the terminals is more stable, so a stable electrical connection between the box-side terminals and the equipment-side terminals is maintained.

In addition, since the lever is not integrated with the case, the material used to make the case may be different from the material used to make the lever. Moreover, less attention can be paid to flexibility and durability requirements and more attention to other properties such as liquid resistance to select the material of the box.

In addition, because the lever is not on the box, no special attention is required to prevent the creep deformation of the lever when the box is packaged for transportation and distribution. This simplifies packaging requirements and improves user convenience. Since the lever is not an integral part of the case, the case can be made smaller. This further allows for a reduction in the size of the packaging materials (such as paper or boxes) used to package the boxes for transportation or distribution of the boxes, thus advantageously reducing shipping costs and parts costs. Moreover, because the lever is not integrated with the case, the first case-side restricting portion can have a small size and a simple structure, and is similar to the structure described in, for example, US Publication No. 2005/0151811. Ratio has higher stiffness. This leads to a significant reduction in the possibility of plastic deformation of the restriction portion on the side of the first case. In the attached or installed state, the box can be maintained at the correct position in the box mounting structure. This maintains normal or good contact between the box-side terminals and the device-side terminals and reduces the possibility of poor electrical connectivity. . Because the first box-side restricting part can have a small size and simple structure, it is different from the box of US Publication No. 2005/0151811, and no special attention is required in the packaging of the box for transportation and distribution Prevent the creep deformation of the lever. This reduces packaging requirements and also improves user convenience.

The structure that connects the box terminal and the engaging portion of the box to each other may be a rigid junction only Structure (which is not the case with the flexible leverage of US Publication No. 2005/0151811). In this case, less vibration is transmitted from the engaging portion to the box terminal, so the electrical communication is more stable.

Since the contact part plane (TP) of the terminal is neither parallel to nor perpendicular to the plane (BP) defined by the leading edge (288), the surface of the terminal of the box can be properly wiped during the insertion of the box into the printing equipment . In addition, this configuration reduces or eliminates insulation debris (dust) that can be generated when the equipment-side terminals are scraped against the circuit board for a long distance during the installation of the box.

Since the device-side terminal applies a spring force including a vector component in a direction in which the box is removed from the printing device against the box terminal, it is not necessary to provide a spring such as the spring 103 described in US Patent No. 6,955,422. In other words, the elastic force from the device-side terminal is used to press the device-side terminal and the box-side terminal together, and the box is also moved in the direction for removal from the printing device when the engagement between the first restricting portion and the lever is released. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide an additional spring as in the case of US Patent No. 6,955,422, which achieves a simpler structure and reduced cost.

Since the first restricting portion is adapted to be engaged with the engaging portion of the lever to restrict the movement of the case in a direction opposite to the installation direction, as a result, when the case is installed in the printing device, the position of the terminal of the case will be determined by the device. The elastic force of the side contact forming member is maintained at an appropriate position with respect to the mounting direction and by the first restricting portion with respect to a direction opposite to the mounting direction. Since the box terminals are "clamped" in this manner, they are firmly fixed to prevent movement in both the mounting direction and the direction opposite to the mounting direction. Therefore, compared with the one-sided limitation of the elastic member 40 and related configurations of US Patent No. 7,008,053, misalignment or disconnection between the box terminal and the device-side contact forming member is less likely to occur.

Adapt 1

The box body (20) as described above, wherein the engaging portion (212) of the first restricting portion (210) is located at a crossing (295) and the first The midpoint (203P) between the three sides (202) and one of the crossings (291) of the first side (203) is closer to the junction Touch one of the parts (cp).

By positioning the engaging portion of the first restricting portion closer to the contact portion than the midpoint, the above-mentioned benefits can be achieved well.

Adapt 2

The box (20) as described above, wherein the contact part plane (TP) forms an angle between 25 degrees and 40 degrees with the plane (BP) defined by the leading edge (288).

As discussed with reference to FIGS. 42A to 45, when the contact portion plane forms an angle between about 25 and 40 degrees with respect to the plane defined by the leading edge, excessive wiping is prevented and sufficient force can be applied to prevent half insertion.

Adaptation 3

The box body (20) as described above, wherein when the first surface (203) of the box body (20) is viewed downward with the liquid supply structure (280) facing downward, the engaging portion (212) of the first restricting portion (210) ) Is located on the left side of an extension line (439PL) of the right edge (439P) of one of the rightmost terminals (439) of one of the plurality of terminals (431 to 439) and the leftmost of one of the plurality of terminals (431 to 439) One of the left edges (435P) of the terminals (435) is to the right of an extension line (435PL).

When the case is mounted on a printing device, if the case is held too securely, some of the components forming contact with the device side (for example, terminal 734 in FIG. 31) may not be in firm contact. By positioning the engaging portion of the first restriction portion to the left of the rightmost contact portion of the plurality of terminals and to the right of the leftmost contact portion of the plurality of terminals, the case can be sufficiently inclined so that the plurality of terminals and the device The electrical connection between the side contact forming components can be even more stable.

Adapt 4

As described above, the box body (20) further includes a second restriction portion (220) on the second surface (204) of the box body (20), and the second restriction portion (220) is adapted to communicate with A separate portion of a printing device (50) is engaged, wherein when the distance is measured in a direction orthogonal to a plane (BP) defined by the leading edge (288), the engaging portion of the second restricting portion (220) and the Leading edge (288) The distance (B) between the defined planes (BP) is greater than the distance (A) between the engaging portion (212) of the first restricted portion (210) and the plane (BP) defined by the leading edge (288). .

Compared with the case where the engaging portion of the first restricting portion is located farther away from the plane defined by the leading edge than the engaging portion of the second restricting portion, the engaging portion of the second restricting portion is located more than the engaging portion of the first restricting portion. Moving farther away from the plane defined by the leading edge can more effectively reduce the possibility that the first-side restricting portion will become disengaged from the device-side engaging portion.

Adapt 5

The box (20) as described above, wherein when the box (20) is viewed from an angle from which the engaging portion (212) of the first restricting portion (210) is on the right side and the liquid supply structure (280) faces downward, When measuring the distance in a direction orthogonal to the plane (BP) defined by the leading edge (288), the engaging portion (212) of the first restricting portion (210) and the leading edge when the box (20) is installed (288) The distance (A) between the defined planes (BP) is smaller than the distance (C) between a pivot point (800c) of the lever (80) and the plane (BP) defined by the leading edge (288).

When the distance between the engaging portion of the first restricting portion and the plane defined by the leading edge is smaller than the distance between a pivot point of the lever and the plane defined by the leading edge when the box is installed, the lever is used to restrict the box Body movement. This reduces the possibility that the first restricting portion becomes unlocked or disengaged from the engaging portion of the lever, so that a stable electrical connection is formed between the plurality of terminals and the contact forming member and the possibility of a bad connection is reduced. When a force is applied from the contact-forming member to the mounted case, the first restricting portion is movable around a rotation axis of the lever. This reduces the possibility that the engaging portion of the first restriction portion becomes decoupled from the engaging portion of the lever.

Adaptation 6

The box (20) as described above, wherein when the box (20) is viewed from an angle from which the engaging portion (212) of the first restricting portion (210) is on the right side and the liquid supply structure (280) faces downward, When the box body (20) is installed, the engaging portion (212) of the first restricting portion (210) is located to the left of the pivot point (800c) of the lever (80).

When the case is mounted such that when the case is viewed from the side where the engaging portion of the first restricting portion is on the right side and the liquid supply structure faces downward, the engaging portion of the first restricting portion is to the left of a pivot point of the lever, The first restricting portion generates a rotating moment on the lever to rotate the lever about the axis of rotation of the lever in a direction opposite to the unlocking direction. This reduces the possibility that the engaging portion of the first restricting portion is unlocked from the engaging portion of the lever, and further ensures a stable electrical connection between the plurality of terminals and the device-side contact forming member. Even when the box receives force, the first restricting portion will move with the box. This movement reduces the possibility that the engaging portion of the first restricting portion is unlocked from the engaging portion of the lever.

Adaptation 7

The box (20) as described above, wherein when the first surface (203) is viewed with the liquid supply structure (280) facing downward, the engaging portion of the first restricting portion (210) when the box (20) is installed At least a part of (212) is located substantially at the center in the width direction of the box (20).

By providing the first restricting portion in a position such that at least a part of the engaging portion of the first restricting portion is substantially at the center in the width direction of the case, the first restricting portion is positioned very close to the plurality of terminals so that the plurality of The electrical connection between the terminal and the device-side contact forming member may be stable.

Adaptation 8

The box (20) as described above, wherein the plane (BP) defined by the leading edge (288) is substantially flush with the fourth plane (201).

Adaptation 9

The box (20) as described above includes an adapter (299, 299j, 299k), wherein the contact portions (cp) of the terminals (400) and the first restricting portion (210) are positioned On the adapter and the liquid chamber (200) is adapted and configured to mate with the adapter.

G-8-2. Second change

A cassette (20) adapted to be mounted on a printing device (50), the printing device (50) comprising a plurality of device-side contact forming members (731 to 739), the plurality of devices being connected sideways The contact-forming member is configured to apply an elastic force (Pt) to the case (20). The printing device (50) also includes a lever (80) having an engaging portion (810). The case (20) includes : A first surface (203), a second surface (204), a third surface (202), and a fourth surface (201), wherein the first surface (203) and the second surface (204) are opposite each other and the first surface (203) The three faces (202) and the fourth face (201) face each other; an electric device; a liquid chamber (200) for storing liquid; a liquid supply structure (280) positioned on the fourth face (201) Is configured to supply liquid from the liquid chamber (200) to the printing device (50), and the liquid supply structure (280) has an installation direction (a plane defining a plane (BP) of the casing (20)) SD) leading edge (288); conductive terminal (400), which is located closer to the first surface (203) than the second surface (204) and is coupled to the electrical device, the terminals (400) are configured To contact the contact forming members (731 to 739) at the contact portions (cp) of the terminals (400) when the cartridge (20) is mounted on the printing device (50) and to be formed from the contacts The component receives the elastic force (Pt), the contacts of the terminals (400) (cp) substantially disposed in a contact portion plane (TP) that is neither parallel to nor perpendicular to the plane (BP) defined by the leading edge (288); and a first restriction portion (210), which The first restricting portion (210) is adapted to be engaged with the engaging portion (810) of the lever (80) to restrict the movement of the casing (20) in a direction (RD) opposite to the installation direction (SD). Wherein the first plane (203) crosses one of the third planes (202) and the second crossing is closer to the first cross where the first plane (203) crosses the contact portion plane (TP) At one of (295).

Some of the benefits of the aforementioned changes of the eighth modification will now be explained. When the box is installed in a printing device, the terminals must be accurately positioned and stably fixed to ensure reliable electrical communication between the box and the printing device. Since the engaging portion of the first restricting portion is located closer to one of the first crossings where the first surface crosses the contact portion than the second crossing where the first surface crosses the third surface, Therefore, the positioning action of the first restricting portion occurs near the most needed positioning (ie, the terminal of the terminal bearing structure). Can properly offset the elastic force from the terminal on the device side. Moreover, it is possible to suppress the positional displacement of the terminal that may occur due to vibration during a printing operation. Therefore, the positioning of the terminals is more stable, so the cassette is maintained Stable electrical connection between body-side terminals and equipment-side terminals.

In addition, since the lever is not integrated with the case, the material used to make the case may be different from the material used to make the lever. Moreover, less attention can be paid to flexibility and durability requirements and more attention to other properties such as liquid resistance to select the material of the box.

In addition, because the lever is not on the box, no special attention is required to prevent the creep deformation of the lever when the box is packaged for transportation and distribution. This simplifies packaging requirements and improves user convenience. Since the lever is not an integral part of the case, the case can be made smaller. This further allows for a reduction in the size of the packaging materials (such as paper or boxes) used to package the boxes for transportation or distribution of the boxes, thus advantageously reducing shipping costs and parts costs. Moreover, because the lever is not integrated with the case, the first case-side restricting portion can have a small size and a simple structure, and is similar to the structure described in, for example, US Publication No. 2005/0151811. Ratio has higher stiffness. This leads to a significant reduction in the possibility of plastic deformation of the restriction portion on the side of the first case. In the attached or installed state, the box can be maintained at the correct position in the box mounting structure. This maintains normal or good contact between the box-side terminals and the device-side terminals and reduces the possibility of poor electrical connectivity. . Because the first box-side restricting part can have a small size and simple structure, it is different from the box of US Publication No. 2005/0151811, and no special attention is required in the packaging of the box for transportation and distribution Prevent the creep deformation of the lever. This reduces packaging requirements and also improves user convenience.

The structure that connects the box terminal and the engaging portion of the box to each other may be only a rigid structure (which is not the case of the flexible lever of US Publication No. 2005/0151811). In this case, less vibration is transmitted from the engaging portion to the box terminal, so the electrical communication is more stable.

Since the contact part plane (TP) of the terminal is neither parallel to nor perpendicular to the plane (BP) defined by the leading edge (288), the surface of the terminal of the box can be properly wiped during the insertion of the box into the printing equipment . In addition, this configuration reduces or eliminates the insulation debris (ash) that can be generated when the equipment-side terminals are scraped against the circuit board for a long distance during the installation of the box dust).

Since the device-side terminal applies a spring force including a vector component in a direction in which the box is removed from the printing device against the box terminal, it is not necessary to provide a spring such as the spring 103 described in US Patent No. 6,955,422. In other words, the elastic force from the device-side terminal is used to press the device-side terminal and the box-side terminal together, and the box is also moved in the direction for removal from the printing device when the engagement between the first restricting portion and the lever is released. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide an additional spring as in the case of US Patent No. 6,955,422, which achieves a simpler structure and reduced cost.

Since the first restricting portion is adapted to be engaged with the engaging portion of the lever to restrict the movement of the case in a direction opposite to the installation direction, as a result, when the case is installed in the printing device, the position of the terminal of the case will be determined by the device. The elastic force of the side contact forming member is maintained at an appropriate position with respect to the mounting direction and by the first restricting portion with respect to a direction opposite to the mounting direction. Since the box terminals are "clamped" in this manner, they are firmly fixed to prevent movement in both the mounting direction and the direction opposite to the mounting direction. Therefore, compared with the one-sided limitation of the elastic member 40 and related configurations of US Patent No. 7,008,053, misalignment or disconnection between the box terminal and the device-side contact forming member is less likely to occur.

Adapt 1

The box (20) as described above, wherein the engaging portion of the first restricting portion is located closer to the first point than the midpoint (203P) between the first crossing point (295) and the second crossing point One of the crossings (295).

By positioning the engaging portion of the first restricting portion closer to the contact portion than the midpoint, the above-mentioned benefits can be achieved well.

Adapt 2

The box (20) as described above, wherein the contact portion (cp) plane (TP) is at an angle between 25 degrees and 40 degrees with the plane (BP) defined by the leading edge (288).

As discussed with reference to FIGS. 42A to 45, the plane of the contact portion is defined with respect to the front edge When the plane is at an angle between about 25 and 40 degrees, excessive wiping is prevented and sufficient force can be applied to prevent half insertion.

Adaptation 3

The box body (20) as described above, wherein when the first surface (203) of the box body (20) is viewed downward with the liquid supply structure (280) facing downward, the engaging portion (212) of the first restricting portion (210) ) Is located on the left side of an extension line (439PL) of the right edge (439P) of one of the rightmost terminals (439) of one of the plurality of terminals (431 to 439) and the leftmost of one of the plurality of terminals (431 to 439) One of the left edges (435P) of the terminals (435) is to the right of an extension line (435PL).

When the case is mounted on a printing device, if the case is held too securely, some of the components forming contact with the device side (for example, terminal 734 in FIG. 31) may not be in firm contact. By positioning the engaging portion of the first restriction portion to the left of the rightmost contact portion of the plurality of terminals and to the right of the leftmost contact portion of the plurality of terminals, the case can be sufficiently inclined so that the plurality of terminals and the device The electrical connection between the side contact forming components can be even more stable.

Adapt 4

As described above, the box body (20) further includes a second restriction portion (220) on the second surface (204) of the box body (20), and the second restriction portion (220) is adapted to communicate with A separate part of the printing device (50) is engaged, wherein when the distance is measured in a direction orthogonal to a plane (BP) defined by the leading edge (288), the engaging part (222) of the second restricting part (220) ) And the distance (B) from the plane (BP) defined by the leading edge (288) is greater than the engagement portion (212) of the first restriction portion (210) and the plane (BP) defined by the leading edge (288) Distance (A).

Compared with the case where the engaging portion of the first restricting portion is located farther away from the plane defined by the leading edge than the engaging portion of the second restricting portion, the engaging portion of the second restricting portion is located more than the engaging portion of the first restricting portion. Moving farther away from the plane defined by the leading edge can more effectively reduce the possibility that the first-side restricting portion will become disengaged from the device-side engaging portion.

Adapt 5

The box (20) as described above, wherein when the box (20) is viewed from an angle from which the engaging portion (212) of the first restricting portion (210) is on the right side and the liquid supply structure (280) faces downward, When measuring the distance in a direction orthogonal to the plane (BP) defined by the leading edge (288), the engaging portion (212) of the first restricting portion (210) and the leading edge when the box (20) is installed (288) The distance (A) between the defined planes (BP) is smaller than the distance (C) between a pivot point (800c) of the lever (80) and the plane (BP) defined by the leading edge (288).

When the distance between the engaging portion of the first restricting portion and the plane defined by the leading edge is smaller than the distance between a pivot point of the lever and the plane defined by the leading edge when the box is installed, the lever is used to restrict the box Body movement. This reduces the possibility that the first restricting portion becomes unlocked or disengaged from the engaging portion of the lever, so that a stable electrical connection is formed between the plurality of terminals and the contact forming member and the possibility of a bad connection is reduced. When a force is applied from the contact-forming member to the mounted case, the first restricting portion is movable around a rotation axis of the lever. This reduces the possibility that the engaging portion of the first restriction portion becomes decoupled from the engaging portion of the lever.

Adaptation 6

The box (20) as described above, wherein when the box (20) is viewed from an angle from which the engaging portion (212) of the first restricting portion (210) is on the right side and the liquid supply structure (280) faces downward, When the box body (20) is installed, the engaging portion (212) of the first restricting portion (210) is located to the left of the pivot point (800c) of the lever (80).

When the case is mounted such that when the case is viewed from the side where the engaging portion of the first restricting portion is on the right side and the liquid supply structure faces downward, the engaging portion of the first restricting portion is to the left of a pivot point of the lever, The first restricting portion generates a rotating moment on the lever to rotate the lever about the axis of rotation of the lever in a direction opposite to the unlocking direction. This reduces the possibility that the engaging portion of the first restricting portion is unlocked from the engaging portion of the lever, and further ensures a stable electrical connection between the plurality of terminals and the device-side contact forming member. Even when the box receives force, the first restricting portion will move with the box. This move reduces one of the first restrictions Possibility of unlocking the engaging part from the engaging part of the lever.

Adaptation 7

The box (20) as described above, wherein when the first surface (203) is viewed with the liquid supply structure (280) facing downward, the engaging portion of the first restricting portion (210) when the box (20) is installed At least a part of (212) is located substantially at the center in the width direction of the box (20).

By providing the first restricting portion in a position such that at least a part of the engaging portion of the first restricting portion is substantially at the center in the width direction of the case, the first restricting portion is positioned very close to the plurality of terminals so that the plurality of The electrical connection between the terminal and the device-side contact forming member may be stable.

Adaptation 8

The box (20) as described above, wherein the plane (BP) defined by the leading edge (288) is substantially flush with the fourth plane (201).

Adaptation 9

The box (20) as described above includes an adapter (299, 299j, 299k), wherein the contact portions (cp) of the terminals (400) and the first restricting portion (210) are positioned On the adapter and the liquid chamber (200) is adapted and configured to mate with the adapter.

G-8-3. Third change

A cartridge (20) adapted to be mounted on a printing device (50) having one of the following structures: the printing device (50) includes a plurality of device-side contact forming members (731 to 739), and the plurality of device-side contacts The forming member is configured to apply elastic force (Pt) to the box body (20), and the printing device (50) also includes a lever (80) having an engaging portion (810) and a pivot point, and the box body (20) includes: a first surface (203), a second surface (204), a third surface (202), and a fourth surface (201), wherein the first surface (203) and the second surface (204) are each other Opposite and the third surface (202) and the fourth surface (201) are opposite each other; an electric device; a liquid chamber (200) for storing liquid; a liquid supply structure (280), which is positioned at the fourth At surface (201), configured to supply liquid from the liquid chamber (200) to the printing equipment (50), the liquid supply structure (280) has a leading edge (288) defining a mounting direction (SD) of a plane (BP) of the box body (20); a conductive terminal (400) located closer to the second surface than the second surface (204) At the first side (203) and coupled to the electrical device, the terminals (400) are configured to contact the terminals (400) when the box (20) is mounted on the printing device (50) Part (cp) is in contact with the contact forming members (731 to 739) and receives elastic force (Pt) from the contact forming members, and the contact portions (cp) of the terminals (400) are substantially disposed in neither Parallel to, and not perpendicular to, a contact portion plane (TP) of the plane (BP) defined by the leading edge (288); and a first restriction portion (210) adapted to interact with the lever (80) The engaging portion (810) is engaged to restrict the movement of the case (20) in a direction (RD) opposite to the installation direction (SD), and the engaging portion (212) of the first restricting portion (210) is arranged so that the When the box body (20) is mounted on the printing device (50), the engaging portion (212) of the first restricting portion (210) is at a position below the pivot point (800c) of the lever (80) Is engaged with the lever (80).

Some of the benefits of the aforementioned changes of the eighth modification will now be explained. When the box is installed in a printing device, the terminals must be accurately positioned and stably fixed to ensure reliable electrical communication between the box and the printing device. Since the engaging portion of the first restricting portion is positioned at a position below the pivot point of the lever, the lever is used to restrict the movement of the box. This reduces the possibility that the first restricting portion becomes unlocked or disengaged from the engaging portion of the lever, so that a stable electrical connection is formed between the plurality of terminals and the contact forming member and the possibility of a bad connection is reduced. When a force is applied from the contact-forming member to the mounted case, the first restricting portion is movable around a rotation axis of the lever. This reduces the possibility that the engaging portion of the first restriction portion becomes decoupled from the engaging portion of the lever. Therefore, the positioning of the terminals is more stable, so a stable electrical connection between the box-side terminals and the equipment-side terminals is maintained.

In addition, since the lever is not integrated with the case, the material used to make the case may be different from the material used to make the lever. Moreover, less attention can be paid to flexibility and durability requirements and more attention to other properties such as liquid resistance to select the material of the box.

In addition, because the lever is not on the box, it is packaged in a box for transportation and No special care is required during distribution to prevent creep deformation of the lever. This simplifies packaging requirements and improves user convenience. Since the lever is not an integral part of the case, the case can be made smaller. This further allows for a reduction in the size of the packaging materials (such as paper or boxes) used to package the boxes for transportation or distribution of the boxes, thus advantageously reducing shipping costs and parts costs. Moreover, because the lever is not integrated with the case, the first case-side restricting portion can have a small size and a simple structure, and is similar to the structure described in, for example, US Publication No. 2005/0151811. Ratio has higher stiffness. This leads to a significant reduction in the possibility of plastic deformation of the restriction portion on the side of the first case. In the attached or installed state, the box can be maintained at the correct position in the box mounting structure. This maintains normal or good contact between the box-side terminals and the device-side terminals and reduces the possibility of poor electrical connectivity. . Because the first box-side restricting part can have a small size and simple structure, it is different from the box of US Publication No. 2005/0151811, and no special attention is required in the packaging of the box for transportation and distribution Prevent the creep deformation of the lever. This reduces packaging requirements and also improves user convenience.

The structure that connects the box terminal and the engaging portion of the box to each other may be only a rigid structure (which is not the case of the flexible lever of US Publication No. 2005/0151811). In this case, less vibration is transmitted from the engaging portion to the box terminal, so the electrical communication is more stable.

Since the contact part plane (TP) of the terminal is neither parallel to nor perpendicular to the plane (BP) defined by the leading edge (288), the surface of the terminal of the box can be properly wiped during the insertion of the box into the printing equipment . In addition, this configuration reduces or eliminates insulation debris (dust) that can be generated when the equipment-side terminals are scraped against the circuit board for a long distance during the installation of the box.

Since the device-side terminal applies a spring force including a vector component in a direction in which the box is removed from the printing device against the box terminal, it is not necessary to provide a spring such as the spring 103 described in US Patent No. 6,955,422. In other words, the elastic force from the device-side terminal is used to press the device-side terminal and the box-side terminal together, and it is also releasing the first restriction The engagement between the part and the lever moves the cartridge in a direction for removal from the printing apparatus. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide an additional spring as in the case of US Patent No. 6,955,422, which achieves a simpler structure and reduced cost.

Since the first restricting portion is adapted to be engaged with the engaging portion of the lever to restrict the movement of the case in a direction opposite to the installation direction, as a result, when the case is installed in the printing device, the position of the terminal of the case will be determined by the device. The elastic force of the side contact forming member is maintained at an appropriate position with respect to the mounting direction and by the first restricting portion with respect to a direction opposite to the mounting direction. Since the box terminals are "clamped" in this manner, they are firmly fixed to prevent movement in both the mounting direction and the direction opposite to the mounting direction. Therefore, compared with the one-sided limitation of the elastic member 40 and related configurations of US Patent No. 7,008,053, misalignment or disconnection between the box terminal and the device-side contact forming member is less likely to occur.

Adapt 1

The box (20) as described above, wherein the contact part plane (TP) forms an angle between 25 degrees and 40 degrees with the plane (BP) defined by the leading edge (288).

By positioning the engaging portion of the first restricting portion closer to the contact portion than the midpoint, the above-mentioned benefits can be achieved well.

As discussed with reference to FIGS. 42A to 45, when the contact portion plane forms an angle between about 25 and 40 degrees with respect to the plane defined by the leading edge, excessive wiping is prevented and sufficient force can be applied to prevent half insertion.

Adapt 2

The box body (20) as described above, wherein when the first surface (203) of the box body (20) is viewed downward with the liquid supply structure (280) facing downward, the engaging portion (212) of the first restricting portion (210) ) Is located on the left side of an extension line (439PL) of the right edge (439P) of one of the rightmost terminals (439) of one of the plurality of terminals (431 to 439) and the leftmost of one of the plurality of terminals (431 to 439) One of the left edges (435P) of the terminals (435) is to the right of an extension line (435PL).

When the box is mounted on a printing device, if the box is held too firmly, The contact of some of the device-side contact forming members (for example, terminal 734 in FIG. 31) may not be firm. By positioning the engaging portion of the first restriction portion to the left of the rightmost contact portion of the plurality of terminals and to the right of the leftmost contact portion of the plurality of terminals, the case can be sufficiently inclined so that the plurality of terminals and the device The electrical connection between the side contact forming components can be even more stable.

Adaptation 3

As described above, the box body (20) further includes a second restriction portion (220) on the second surface (204) of the box body (20), and the second restriction portion (220) is adapted to communicate with A separate part of the printing device (50) is engaged, wherein when the distance is measured in a direction orthogonal to a plane (BP) defined by the leading edge (288), the engaging part (222) of the second restricting part (220) ) And the distance (B) from the plane (BP) defined by the leading edge (288) is greater than the engagement portion (212) of the first restriction portion (210) and the plane (BP) defined by the leading edge (288) Distance (A).

Compared with the case where the engaging portion of the first restricting portion is located farther away from the plane defined by the leading edge than the engaging portion of the second restricting portion, the engaging portion of the second restricting portion is located more than the engaging portion of the first restricting portion. Moving farther away from the plane defined by the leading edge can more effectively reduce the possibility that the first-side restricting portion will become disengaged from the device-side engaging portion.

Adapt 4

The box (20) as described above, wherein when the box (20) is viewed from an angle from which the engaging portion (212) of the first restricting portion (210) is on the right side and the liquid supply structure (280) faces downward, When the box body (20) is installed, the engaging portion (212) of the first restricting portion (210) is located to the left of the pivot point (800c) of the lever (80).

When the case is mounted such that when the case is viewed from the side where the engaging portion of the first restricting portion is on the right side and the liquid supply structure faces downward, the engaging portion of the first restricting portion is to the left of a pivot point of the lever, The first restricting portion generates a rotating moment on the lever to rotate the lever about the axis of rotation of the lever in a direction opposite to the unlocking direction. This reduces the first limit The possibility that the engaging portion is unlocked from the engaging portion of the lever, and further ensures a stable electrical connection between the plurality of terminals and the device-side contact forming member. Even when the box receives force, the first restricting portion will move with the box. This movement reduces the possibility that the engaging portion of the first restricting portion is unlocked from the engaging portion of the lever.

Adapt 5

The box (20) as described above, wherein when the first surface (203) is viewed with the liquid supply structure (280) facing downward, the engaging portion of the first restricting portion (210) when the box (20) is installed At least a part of (212) is located substantially at the center in the width direction of the box (20).

By providing the first restricting portion in a position such that at least a part of the engaging portion of the first restricting portion is substantially at the center in the width direction of the case, the first restricting portion is positioned very close to the plurality of terminals so that the plurality of The electrical connection between the terminal and the device-side contact forming member may be stable.

Adaptation 6

The box (20) as described above, wherein the plane (BP) defined by the leading edge (288) is substantially flush with the fourth plane (201).

Adaptation 7

The box (20) as described above includes an adapter (299, 299j, 299k), wherein the contact portions (cp) of the terminals (400) and the first restricting portion (210) are positioned On the adapter and the liquid chamber (200) is adapted and configured to mate with the adapter.

G-8-4. Fourth change

A cartridge (20) adapted to be mounted on a printing device (50), the printing device (50) including a plurality of device-side contact forming members (731 to 739), the plurality of device-side contact forming members being configured In order to apply elastic force (Pt) to the box body (20), the printing device (50) also includes a lever (80) having an engaging portion (810). The box body (20) includes: a front face (203) ), A back (204), a top (202) and a bottom (201), wherein the front (203) and the back (204) are opposite each other and the top (202) and the bottom (201) are opposite each other; an electric device ; A liquid chamber (200) for storing liquid; a liquid supply structure (280) positioned at the bottom (201) and configured to supply liquid from the liquid chamber (200) to the printing device ( 50), the liquid supply structure (280) has a leading edge (288) defining a mounting direction (SD) of a plane (BP) of the box body (20); a conductive terminal (400), which is located more than the rear (204) ) Closer to the front (203) and coupled to the electrical device, the terminals (400) are configured to be on the terminals (400) when the box (20) is mounted on the printing device (50) ) Are in contact with the contact forming members (731 to 739) and receive elastic force (Pt) from the contact forming members, and the contact portions (cp) of the terminals (400) are substantially configured In a contact portion plane (TP) that is neither parallel to nor perpendicular to the plane (BP) defined by the leading edge (288); and a first restriction portion (210) adapted to interact with the lever ( The engagement portion (810) of 80) is engaged to restrict the movement of the case (20) in a direction (RD) opposite to the installation direction (SD). The first restriction portion (210) is provided more than the top portion (202). Close to the contact At one position (TP) bisecting plane.

Some of the benefits of the aforementioned changes of the eighth modification will now be explained. When the box is installed in a printing device, the terminals must be accurately positioned and stably fixed to ensure reliable electrical communication between the box and the printing device. Since the engaging portion of the first restricting portion is located at a position closer to the plane of the contact portion than the top portion, the positioning action of the first restricting portion occurs closer to the most needed positioning (ie, the terminal of the terminal bearing structure). Can properly offset the elastic force from the terminal on the device side. Moreover, it is possible to suppress the positional displacement of the terminal that may occur due to vibration during a printing operation. Therefore, the positioning of the terminals is more stable, so a stable electrical connection between the box-side terminals and the equipment-side terminals is maintained.

In addition, since the lever is not integrated with the case, the material used to make the case may be different from the material used to make the lever. Moreover, less attention can be paid to flexibility and durability requirements and more attention to other properties such as liquid resistance to select the material of the box.

In addition, because the lever is not on the box, no special attention is required to prevent the creep deformation of the lever when the box is packaged for transportation and distribution. This simplifies packaging requirements and improves User convenience. Since the lever is not an integral part of the case, the case can be made smaller. This further allows for a reduction in the size of the packaging materials (such as paper or boxes) used to package the boxes for transportation or distribution of the boxes, thus advantageously reducing shipping costs and parts costs. Moreover, because the lever is not integrated with the case, the first case-side restricting portion can have a small size and a simple structure, and is similar to the structure described in, for example, US Publication No. 2005/0151811. Ratio has higher stiffness. This leads to a significant reduction in the possibility of plastic deformation of the restriction portion on the side of the first case. In the attached or installed state, the box can be maintained at the correct position in the box mounting structure. This maintains normal or good contact between the box-side terminals and the device-side terminals and reduces the possibility of poor electrical connectivity. . Because the first box-side restricting part can have a small size and simple structure, it is different from the box of US Publication No. 2005/0151811, and no special attention is required in the packaging of the box for transportation and distribution Prevent the creep deformation of the lever. This reduces packaging requirements and also improves user convenience.

The structure that connects the box terminal and the engaging portion of the box to each other may be only a rigid structure (which is not the case of the flexible lever of US Publication No. 2005/0151811). In this case, less vibration is transmitted from the engaging portion to the box terminal, so the electrical communication is more stable.

Since the contact part plane (TP) of the terminal is neither parallel to nor perpendicular to the plane (BP) defined by the leading edge (288), the surface of the terminal of the box can be properly wiped during the insertion of the box into the printing equipment . In addition, this configuration reduces or eliminates insulation debris (dust) that can be generated when the equipment-side terminals are scraped against the circuit board for a long distance during the installation of the box.

Since the device-side terminal applies a spring force including a vector component in a direction in which the box is removed from the printing device against the box terminal, it is not necessary to provide a spring such as the spring 103 described in US Patent No. 6,955,422. In other words, the elastic force from the device-side terminal is used to press the device-side terminal and the box-side terminal together, and the box is also moved in the direction for removal from the printing device when the engagement between the first restricting portion and the lever is released. because This eliminates the need to provide an additional spring as in the case of US Patent No. 6,955,422, which results in a simpler structure and reduced cost.

Since the first restricting portion is adapted to be engaged with the engaging portion of the lever to restrict the movement of the case in a direction opposite to the installation direction, as a result, when the case is installed in the printing device, the position of the terminal of the case will be determined by the device. The elastic force of the side contact forming member is maintained at an appropriate position with respect to the mounting direction and by the first restricting portion with respect to a direction opposite to the mounting direction. Since the box terminals are "clamped" in this manner, they are firmly fixed to prevent movement in both the mounting direction and the direction opposite to the mounting direction. Therefore, compared with the one-sided limitation of the elastic member 40 and related configurations of US Patent No. 7,008,053, misalignment or disconnection between the box terminal and the device-side contact forming member is less likely to occur.

Adapt 1

As described above, the box body (20), wherein the engaging portion (212) of the first restricting portion (210) is located at the intersection of the plane (TP) and the top portion (202) which is the same as the front surface (203) The midpoint (203P) between the crossings of (203) is closer to one of the contact portions (cp).

By positioning the engaging portion of the first restricting portion closer to the contact portion than the midpoint, the above-mentioned benefits can be achieved well.

Adapt 2

The box (20) as described above, wherein the contact part plane (TP) forms an angle between 25 degrees and 40 degrees with the plane (BP) defined by the leading edge (288).

As discussed with reference to FIGS. 42A to 45, when the contact portion plane forms an angle between about 25 and 40 degrees with respect to the plane defined by the leading edge, excessive wiping is prevented and sufficient force can be applied to prevent half insertion.

Adaptation 3

The box body (20) as described above, wherein when the front surface (203) of the box body (20) is viewed downward with the liquid supply structure (280) facing downward, the engaging portion (212) of the first restricting portion (210) One of the plurality of terminals (431 to 439) is located to the left of one of the right side edges (439P) of one of the rightmost terminals (439) and one of the extension lines (439PL) and one of the plurality of terminals (431 to 439). (435) One of the left edges (435P) is to the right of one of the extension lines (435PL).

When the case is mounted on a printing device, if the case is held too securely, some of the components forming contact with the device side (for example, terminal 734 in FIG. 31) may not be in firm contact. By positioning the engaging portion of the first restriction portion to the left of the rightmost contact portion of the plurality of terminals and to the right of the leftmost contact portion of the plurality of terminals, the case can be sufficiently inclined so that the plurality of terminals and the device The electrical connection between the side contact forming components can be even more stable.

Adapt 4

The case (20) as described above, wherein the engaging portion is adapted to engage with a rotatable lever having a pivot point above the engaging portion (212) of the first restricting portion (210).

When the rotatable lever has a pivot point above the engaging portion of the first restricting portion, the lever is used to restrict the movement of the box. This reduces the possibility that the first restricting portion becomes unlocked or disengaged from the engaging portion of the lever, so that a stable electrical connection is formed between the plurality of terminals and the contact forming member and the possibility of a bad connection is reduced. When a force is applied from the contact-forming member to the mounted case, the first restricting portion is movable around a rotation axis of the lever. This reduces the possibility that the engaging portion of the first restriction portion becomes decoupled from the engaging portion of the lever.

Adapt 5

The box (20) as described above, further comprising a second restricting portion (220) on the rear surface (204) of the box (20), the second restricting portion (220) adapted to interact with the printing equipment (50) a respective part of the meshing, wherein when the distance is measured in a direction orthogonal to the plane (BP) defined by the leading edge (288), the meshing part (222) of the second restricting part (220) and The distance (B) between the planes (BP) defined by the leading edge (288) is larger than the engaging portion of the first restricting portion (210) The distance (A) between the point (212) and the plane (BP) defined by the leading edge (288).

Compared with the case where the engaging portion of the first restricting portion is located farther away from the plane defined by the leading edge than the engaging portion of the second restricting portion, the engaging portion of the second restricting portion is located more than the engaging portion of the first restricting portion. Moving farther away from the plane defined by the leading edge can more effectively reduce the possibility that the first-side restricting portion will become disengaged from the device-side engaging portion.

Adaptation 6

The case (20) as described above, wherein the second restricting portion (220) is adapted to serve as a pivot point when the case (20) is rotated to be disassembled from one of the holders of the printing device (50) .

Adaptation 7

The box (20) as described above, wherein when the box (20) is viewed from an angle from which the engaging portion (212) of the first restricting portion (210) is on the right side and the liquid supply structure (280) faces downward, When measuring the distance in a direction orthogonal to the plane (BP) defined by the leading edge (288), the engaging portion (212) of the first restricting portion (210) and the leading edge when the box (20) is installed (288) The distance (A) between the defined planes (BP) is smaller than the distance (C) between a pivot point (800c) of the lever (80) and the plane (BP) defined by the leading edge (288).

When the distance between the engaging portion of the first restricting portion and the plane defined by the leading edge is smaller than the distance between a pivot point of the lever and the plane defined by the leading edge when the box is installed, the lever is used to restrict the box Body movement. This reduces the possibility that the first restricting portion becomes unlocked or disengaged from the engaging portion of the lever, so that a stable electrical connection is formed between the plurality of terminals and the contact forming member and the possibility of a bad connection is reduced. When a force is applied from the contact-forming member to the mounted case, the first restricting portion is movable around a rotation axis of the lever. This reduces the possibility that the engaging portion of the first restriction portion becomes decoupled from the engaging portion of the lever.

Adaptation 8

The casing (20) as described above, wherein the casing (20) is viewed at an angle from which the engaging portion (212) of the first restricting portion (210) is on the right side and the liquid supply structure (280) faces downward. At this time, when the box body (20) is installed, the engaging portion (212) of the first restricting portion (210) is on the left side of the pivot point (800c) of the lever (80).

When the case is mounted such that when the case is viewed from the side where the engaging portion of the first restricting portion is on the right side and the liquid supply structure faces downward, the engaging portion of the first restricting portion is to the left of a pivot point of the lever, The first restricting portion generates a rotating moment on the lever to rotate the lever about the axis of rotation of the lever in a direction opposite to the unlocking direction. This reduces the possibility that the engaging portion of the first restricting portion is unlocked from the engaging portion of the lever, and further ensures a stable electrical connection between the plurality of terminals and the device-side contact forming member. Even when the box receives force, the first restricting portion will move with the box. This movement reduces the possibility that the engaging portion of the first restricting portion is unlocked from the engaging portion of the lever.

Adaptation 9

The casing (20) as described above, wherein when the front surface (203) is viewed downward with the liquid supply structure (280) facing, the engaging portion (212) of the first restricting portion (210) is mounted on the casing (20) At least a part of it is located at the substantially center in the width direction of the box body (20).

By providing the first restricting portion in a position such that at least a part of the engaging portion of the first restricting portion is substantially at the center in the width direction of the case, the first restricting portion is positioned very close to the plurality of terminals so that the plurality of The electrical connection between the terminal and the device-side contact forming member may be stable.

Adaptation 10

The box (20) as described above, wherein the plane (BP) defined by the leading edge (288) is substantially flush with the bottom (201).

Adapt 11

The box (20) as described above includes an adapter (299, 299j, 299k), wherein the contact portions (cp) of the terminals (400) and the first restricting portion (210) are positioned On the adapter and the liquid chamber (200) is adapted and configured to mate with the adapter.

Adapt 12

A use of the box body (20) as described above, wherein the engaging portion of the box body (20) is engaged with a movable lever (80) of a printing device (50) in one of the following ways: The lever (80) has One pivot point above the engaging portion.

Adaptation 13

A combination of a box body (20) and a printing device (50), the combination includes: a box body (20) as described above; and a printing device (50), which includes an elastic force (Pt) A plurality of device-side contact forming members (731 to 739) applied to the case (20) and a lever (80) having an engagement portion (810), the engagement portion (810) is adapted to be engaged with the case ( The engaging portion (212) of the first restricting portion (210) of 20) is engaged to restrict the movement of the box body (20) in a direction opposite to the installation direction (SD).

Adaptation 14

The combination as described above, wherein the lever (80) has two ends and a pivot point in the middle of the two ends, and the pivot point (800c) of the lever (80) is provided in the case (20) ) Above the engaging portion (212) of the first restricting portion (210).

When the rotatable lever has a pivot point above the engaging portion of the first restricting portion, the lever is used to restrict the movement of the box. This reduces the possibility that the first restricting portion becomes unlocked or disengaged from the engaging portion of the lever, so that a stable electrical connection is formed between the plurality of terminals and the contact forming member and the possibility of a bad connection is reduced. When a force is applied from the contact-forming member to the mounted case, the first restricting portion is movable around a rotation axis of the lever. This reduces the possibility that the engaging portion of the first restriction portion becomes decoupled from the engaging portion of the lever.

Adaptation 15

The combination as described above, wherein the pivot point (800c) of the lever (80) is provided to the right of the engaging portion (212) of the first restricting portion (210) of the case (20).

When the pivot point of the lever is provided to the right of the engaging portion of the first restricting portion of the case, the first restricting portion generates a rotating moment on the lever to wind the bar in the opposite direction of the unlocking direction. The rotation axis of the lever rotates the lever. This reduces the possibility that the engaging portion of the first restricting portion is unlocked from the engaging portion of the lever, and further ensures a stable electrical connection between the plurality of terminals and the device-side contact forming member. Even when the box receives force, the first restricting portion will move with the box. This movement reduces the possibility that the engaging portion of the first restricting portion is unlocked from the engaging portion of the lever.

G-8-5. Fifth change

A liquid supply system (20i, 20j, 20k) adapted to supply liquid to a printing device (50), the printing device (50) including a plurality of device-side contact forming members (731 to 739), the liquid supply system (20i, 20j, 20k) includes: an electric device; a liquid source (200i, 200j, 200T); a liquid supply structure (280), which is adapted and configured to transfer liquid from the liquid source (200i, 200j, 200T) is supplied to the printing equipment (50), the liquid supply structure (280) has a leading edge (288) defining an installation direction (SD) of a plane (BP), an adapter (299, 299j, 299k), It has: conductive terminals (400) coupled to the electrical device, the terminals (400) being configured to be on the terminals when the supply system (20i, 20j, 20k) supplies liquid to the printing device (50) The contact portions (cp) of (400) are in contact with the contact forming members (731 to 739) and receive the elastic force (Pt) from the contact forming members. The contact portions (cp) of the terminals (400) are substantially configured. In a contact portion plane (TP) which is neither parallel to nor perpendicular to a plane (BP) defined by the leading edge (288); and a first restriction portion (210), Provided on the front face (203) of one of the adapters and adapted to engage with the engaging portion (810) of the lever (80) to restrict the adapter in a direction (RD) opposite to the installation direction (SD) Moving, the first restricting portion (210) is positioned adjacent to the contact portion plane (TP).

Some of the benefits of the above changes of the ninth modification will now be explained. When the adapter is installed in a printing device, the terminals must be accurately positioned and stably fixed to ensure reliable electrical communication between the adapter and the printing device. Since the engaging portion of the first restricting portion is positioned adjacent to the plane of the contact portion, the positioning action of the first restricting portion occurs near Where it is most needed to be positioned (ie, the terminal of the terminal bearing structure). Can properly offset the elastic force from the terminal on the device side. Moreover, it is possible to suppress the positional displacement of the terminal that may occur due to vibration during a printing operation. Therefore, the positioning of the terminals is more stable, so a stable electrical connection between the adapter-side terminal and the device-side terminal is maintained.

In addition, since the lever is not integrated with the adapter, the material used to make the adapter may be different from the material used to make the lever. Moreover, less attention can be paid to flexibility and durability requirements and more attention to other properties such as liquid resistance to select the material of the adapter.

In addition, because the lever is not on the adapter, no special care is needed to prevent the lever from deforming when the adapter is packaged for transportation and distribution. This simplifies packaging requirements and improves user convenience. Because the lever is not an integral part of the adapter, the adapter can be made smaller. This further allows a reduction in the size of the packaging materials (such as paper or boxes) used to package the adapter for transportation or distribution of the adapter, thus advantageously reducing transportation costs and parts costs. Moreover, since the lever is not integrated with the adapter, the first adapter-side restricting element can have a small size and a simple structure, and is (for example) described in US Publication No. 2005/0151811. Compared with structure, it has higher rigidity. This leads to a significant reduction in the possibility of plastic deformation of the first adapter-side restricting element. In the attached or installed state, the adapter can be maintained at the correct position in the adapter installation structure. This maintains normal or good contact between the adapter-side terminals and the equipment-side terminals and reduces poor electrical connectivity. Possibility. Because the first adapter-side restricting element can have a small size and a simple structure, it is different from the box of US Publication No. 2005/0151811, and is not required in the packaging of the adapter for transportation and distribution Special attention is paid to preventing the creep deformation of the lever. This reduces packaging requirements and also improves user convenience.

The structure that connects the adapter terminal and the engaging portion of the adapter to each other may be a rigid structure only (which is not the case of the flexible lever of US Publication No. 2005/0151811). In this case, less vibration is transmitted from the engaging portion to the adapter terminal, so the electrical communication is more stable.

Since the contact portion plane (TP) of the terminal is neither parallel to nor perpendicular to the plane (BP) defined by the leading edge (288), the adapter terminal can be properly wiped during the insertion of the adapter into the printing equipment The surface. In addition, this configuration reduces or eliminates insulation debris (dust) that can be generated if the equipment-side terminals are scraped against the circuit board for a long distance during the installation of the adapter.

Since the device-side terminal exerts an elastic force including a vector component in a direction in which the adapter is removed from the printing device against the adapter terminal, it is not necessary to provide a spring such as the spring 103 described in US Patent No. 6,955,422. In other words, the elastic force from the device-side terminal is used to press the device-side terminal and the adapter-side terminal together, and also when the engagement between the first restriction portion and the lever is released, the mating is moved in the direction for removal from the printing device. Device. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide an additional spring as in the case of US Patent No. 6,955,422, which achieves a simpler structure and reduced cost.

Since the first restricting portion is adapted to mesh with the engaging portion of the lever to restrict the movement of the adapter in a direction opposite to the installation direction, as a result, when the adapter is installed in a printing device, the position of the adapter terminal will be The elastic force of the device-side contact-forming member is maintained at an appropriate position with respect to the mounting direction by the device-side contact and with the direction opposite to the mounting direction by the first restricting portion. Since the adapter terminal is "clamped" in this manner, it is firmly secured against movement in both the mounting direction and the direction opposite to the mounting direction. Therefore, compared with the one-sided limitation of the elastic member 40 and related configurations of US Patent No. 7,008,053, misalignment or disconnection between the adapter terminal and the device-side contact-forming component is less likely to occur.

Adapt 1

The liquid supply system (20i, 20j, 20k) as described above, wherein the contact portion plane (TP) is at an angle between 25 degrees and 40 degrees with the plane (BP) defined by the leading edge (288).

As discussed with reference to FIGS. 42A to 45, when the contact portion plane forms an angle between about 25 and 40 degrees with respect to the plane defined by the leading edge, excessive wiping is prevented and sufficient force can be applied to prevent half insertion.

Adapt 2

The liquid supply system (20i, 20j, 20k) as described above, wherein when the front face of the adapter is viewed with the liquid supply structure (280) facing downward, the engaging portion (212) of the first restricting portion (210) is located in a plurality Of the terminals (431 to 439), one of the rightmost terminals (439), one of the right edges (439P), the left side of one of the extension lines (439PL), and one of the plurality of terminals (431 to 439), the leftmost terminal (435 ) To the right of one of the left edges (435P) of one of the extension lines (435PL).

When the adapter is mounted on a printing device, if the adapter is held too firmly, some of the components (for example, terminal 734 in FIG. 31) that comes into contact with the device side may not be securely contacted . By positioning the engaging portion of the first restriction portion to the left of the rightmost contact portion of the plurality of terminals and to the right of the leftmost contact portion of the plurality of terminals, the adapter can be sufficiently inclined so that the plurality of terminals and The electrical connection between the device-side contact-forming components can be even more stable.

Adaptation 3

The liquid supply system (20i, 20j, 20k) as described above, further comprising a second restriction portion (220) on the rear of one of the adapters (204), the second restriction portion (220) being adapted To engage with a separate portion of a printing device (50), where the engaging portion of the second restricting portion (220) when measuring a distance in a direction orthogonal to a plane (BP) defined by the leading edge (288) The distance (B) between (222) and the plane (BP) defined by the leading edge (288) is greater than the engaging portion (212) of the first restricting portion (210) and the plane (BP) defined by the leading edge (288) Distance (A).

Compared with the case where the engaging portion of the first restricting portion is located farther away from the plane defined by the leading edge than the engaging portion of the second restricting portion, the engaging portion of the second restricting portion is located more than the engaging portion of the first restricting portion. Moving farther away from the plane defined by the leading edge can more effectively reduce the possibility that the first-side restricting portion will become disengaged from the device-side engaging portion.

Adapt 4

The liquid supply system (20i, 20j, 20k) as described above, wherein the adapter is viewed from an angle from which the engaging portion (212) of the first restricting portion (210) is on the right side and the liquid supply structure (280) faces downward When measuring the distance in a direction orthogonal to the plane (BP) defined by the leading edge (288), the engaging portion (212) of the first restricting portion (210) and the front portion when the adapter is installed The distance (A) between the plane (BP) defined by the edge (288) is less than the distance (C) between one of the pivot points (800c) of the lever (80) and the plane (BP) defined by the leading edge (288) .

When the distance between the engaging portion of the first restricting portion and the plane defined by the leading edge is smaller than the distance between a pivot point of the lever and the plane defined by the leading edge when the adapter is installed, the lever is used to restrict Adapter movement. This reduces the possibility that the first restricting portion becomes unlocked or disengaged from the engaging portion of the lever, so that a stable electrical connection is formed between the plurality of terminals and the contact forming member and the possibility of a bad connection is reduced. When a force self-contact-forming member is applied to the mounted adapter, the first restricting portion is movable about a rotation axis of the lever. This reduces the possibility that the engaging portion of the first restriction portion becomes decoupled from the engaging portion of the lever.

Adapt 5

The liquid supply system (20i, 20j, 20k) as described above, wherein the adapter is viewed from an angle from which the engaging portion (212) of the first restricting portion (210) is on the right side and the liquid supply structure (280) faces downward When the adapter is installed, the engaging portion (212) of the first restricting portion (210) is located to the left of the pivot point (800c) of the lever (80).

When the adapter is mounted so that the adapter portion is to the left of one of the pivot points when the adapter is viewed from the side where the engagement portion of the first restriction portion is on the right side and the liquid supply structure faces downward. At this time, the first restricting portion generates a rotating moment on the lever to rotate the lever about the axis of rotation of the lever in a direction opposite to the unlocking direction. This reduces the possibility that the engaging portion of the first restricting portion is unlocked from the engaging portion of the lever, and further ensures a stable electrical connection between the plurality of terminals and the device-side contact forming member. Even when the adapter receives force, the first limiting portion will move with the adapter. This move reduces the first limit The possibility that part of the engaging part is unlocked from the engaging part of the lever.

Adaptation 6

The liquid supply system (20i, 20j, 20k) as described above, wherein when viewing the front of the adapter with the liquid supply structure (280) facing downward, the first restriction when the adapter is installed At least a part of the engaging portion (212) of the portion (210) is located substantially at the widthwise center of the adapter.

By providing the first restricting portion in a position such that at least a part of the engaging portion of the first restricting portion is located substantially at the center in the width direction of the adapter, the first restricting portion is positioned very close to the plurality of terminals so that the plurality The electrical connection between the terminals and the device-side contact forming member may be stable.

Adaptation 7

The liquid supply system (20i, 20j) as described above, further comprising a container assembly (200i, 200j) having a liquid source therein and adapted to be paired with the adapter.

Adaptation 8

The liquid supply system (20j) as described above, wherein the liquid supply structure (280) is provided on the container assembly (200j).

Adaptation 9

The liquid supply system (20k) as described above further includes: a storage tank (200T) having a liquid source therein; an auxiliary adapter (200S) having a liquid supply structure (280); and a tube ( 200L), which connects the storage tank and the auxiliary adapter (200S).

It should also be understood that without departing from the spirit of the invention, the features described herein may be part of a box itself, as a combination of a box and a printing device (or in other words, when a box is installed). Partly and / or as part of a system adapted to supply ink or other printing material to a printing device.

The items set forth in the respective aspects according to any part of the present invention may be added to any of the various variations described above.

Those skilled in the art will recognize that the present invention has many applications and can be implemented in many ways, and therefore is not limited by the above embodiments and examples. Any number of the features of the different embodiments described herein may be combined into a single embodiment, and alternative embodiments having fewer or more than all the features described herein are possible. Functionality may also be distributed, in whole or in part, across multiple components in a manner that is currently known or will become known.

Those skilled in the art will appreciate that changes can be made to the embodiments described above without departing from its broad inventive concepts. Therefore, it should be understood that the present invention is not limited to the specific embodiments disclosed, but is intended to cover modifications within the spirit and scope of the present invention as defined by the scope of the accompanying patent application. Although the basic features of the invention have been shown and described as being applicable to its exemplary embodiments, it will be understood that the form and details of the disclosed invention may be made by those skilled in the art without departing from the spirit of the invention Omissions and replacements and changes. In addition, the scope of the present invention encompasses changes and modifications to the components described herein, as will be understood by those skilled in the art, to future developments. Therefore, it is intended to be limited only as indicated by the scope of the patentable scope appended hereto. It should also be understood that the scope of the following patent applications is intended to cover all the general and specific features of the invention disclosed herein, and all statements (only language issues) within the scope of the invention may be deemed to fall into it.

Claims (65)

A cassette is detachably attached to a printing apparatus, the printing apparatus includes: a cassette mounting structure configured to have: (i) a device-side bottom wall member; (ii) a first device A side wall member provided to intersect the device side bottom wall member; and (iii) a second device side wall member provided to intersect the device side bottom wall member and oppose the first device side side wall member; A printing material supply tube structured to have a base end provided on the bottom wall part of the apparatus and a peripheral end connected to the box, and configured to print one of the boxes received in the box Material is supplied to a printing head; a plurality of device-side terminals are provided in a device-side corner section where the device-side bottom wall member intersects with the first device-side side wall member; and a lever which is rotatable in a rotatable manner It is arranged on the side wall part of the first device for attaching and detaching the box with respect to the printing device, wherein a Z axis represents an axis parallel to a central axis C of the printing material supply pipe, and an X axis Indicates that the printed material is The tubes and the equipment-side terminals are arranged along it and orthogonal to one axis of the Z axis, and a Y axis represents an axis orthogonal to both the Z axis and the X axis, and a + Z axis direction represents along the The Z axis is a direction from the base end to the peripheral end of the printing material supply tube, a -Z axis direction indicates an opposite direction of the + Z axis direction, and a + X axis direction indicates the direction from the X axis The direction of the supply pipe of the printed material to one of the terminals on the side of the equipment, a -X axis direction represents a reverse direction of the + X axis direction, a + Y axis direction represents a direction along the Y axis to one end, and a- The Y-axis direction indicates a direction along the Y-axis toward the other end, and in the attached state where the case is attached to the case mounting structure, the device-side terminals are in contact with the case to include the case. One of the + Z-axis direction components exerts a force on the case, and the lever has an operating member at the + Z-axis direction end and a -Z-axis direction end at the first device-side limiting element. A device-side restricting element can lock the case and thus restrict the movement of the case in the + Z axis direction, and the lever can rotate around the operating part A specific position with the first device-side restricting element is rotated as a rotation axis, wherein the X axis, the Y axis, and the Z axis with respect to the case in the attached state correspond to the One of the boxes is an X-axis, a Y-axis, and a Z-axis. The box includes: a first surface on the -Z axis direction side and a second surface on the + Z axis direction side as the Z axis. Two faces opposite to each other in the axial direction; a third face on the + X-axis direction side and a fourth face on the -X-axis direction side as opposite to each other in the X-axis direction and to the first face and the Two faces where the second face intersects; a corner section configured to connect the first face and the third face; an inclined surface provided to form a portion of the corner section and along the axis including the + X axis One of the directional component and the -Z axis direction component is inclined in a specific direction; a printing material supply structure is provided on the first surface to be connected with the printing material supply tube; a plurality of box-side terminals corresponding to these The respective device-side terminals are provided and located on the inclined surface to receive a line including the + Z axis from the device-side terminals. A force in a specific direction in one of the directional components; and a first box-side restriction portion configured to be locked by the first device-side restriction element and thereby restrict movement of the case in the + Z axis direction, wherein The first box-side restricting portion is disposed at a specific position on the third surface near an intersecting portion where the third surface intersects the inclined surface. The cartridge of claim 1, further comprising: a circuit board configured to have the cartridge-side terminals disposed on a surface and a memory unit disposed on a back surface, wherein the inclined surface It is formed by the surface of the circuit board, and the first box-side restricting portion is located near a board end on the + Z axis direction side of the circuit board. For example, the box of claim 1 or 2, wherein the first box-side restricting portion is disposed at a position that intersects a plane that passes through the center of a width of the box or the length in the Y-axis direction and is parallel to The Z-axis and the X-axis. For example, the case of claim 1 or 2, wherein the case-side terminals include: a first terminal including a first outer portion located at the most + Y-axis direction end; and a second terminal including a A second outer portion at the end in the most -Y-axis direction, wherein at least part of the first box-side restricting portion is located between the first outer portion and the second outer portion in the Y-axis direction. As in the case of claim 4, wherein the first case-side restricting portion is located on the inner side of the range between the first outer portion and the second outer portion instead of the outer side in the Y-axis direction. The case of claim 1 or 2, further comprising: a second case-side restricting portion configured to be locked by the second-equipment-side restricting element provided on the second-equipment-side sidewall member and thereby restrict The movement of the box body along the + Z axis direction, and the second box-side restriction portion is disposed on the fourth surface. As in the case of claim 6, wherein the second case-side restricting portion is inserted into a protruding portion of the second device-side restricting element formed as a recess or a through hole. As in the case of claim 1 or 2, wherein the first case-side restricting portion is located on the -X axis direction side of the rotation axis of the lever. As in the case of claim 8, wherein the first case-side restricting portion has: a first abutting portion which abuts a first portion of the first device-side restricting element to restrict the case along the + Z axis direction Movement; and a second abutting portion, which abuts a second portion of the first device-side restricting element to restrict movement of the box in the + X axis direction. If the cartridge of claim 1 or 2 further comprises: a protrusion configured to abut the operation of the lever during disassembly of the cartridge attached to the cartridge mounting structure from the cartridge mounting structure The component also receives a force including the + Z-axis direction component, and the protrusion is disposed on the + Z-axis direction side of the first box-side restricting portion on the third surface. As in the case of claim 1 or 2, wherein the corner section has a step extending from the first surface in the + Z axis direction, the step is located on the -X axis side and the -Z axis of the inclined surface On the direction side, and the step has a third box-side restricting element in contact with a third device-side restricting element provided on the box mounting structure to restrict the movement of the box in the Y-axis direction. The cartridge of claim 11, wherein the third cartridge-side restricting element includes a pair of protruding parts configured to receive the third device-side restricting element protruding from the bottom wall part of the device side toward the + Z axis direction. , And the pair of protruding members protrude from the step along the + X-axis direction. As the case of claim 11, wherein when the case is viewed from the first side in the + Z axis direction, a portion of the third case-side restricting element overlaps the inclined surface. The cartridge of claim 1 or 2, wherein the printing material supply structure is disposed at a specific position closer to the fourth side than the third side to the fourth side. For example, the box of claim 1 or 2, wherein the first box-side restricting portion is a protruding portion. If the case of claim 1 or 2, wherein the case-side terminals include a case-side ground terminal that contacts one of the equipment-side terminals of the equipment-side ground terminal, the equipment-side ground terminal is connected to a ground wire, And the box-side ground terminal is provided at the center of the width of the box or the length in the Y-axis direction and is configured to be in any other box during the process of attaching the box to the box mounting structure Before the side terminal comes into contact with a corresponding device-side terminal, it is in contact with the device-side ground terminal. For example, in the case of claim 16, the length in the Z-axis direction of one of the case-side ground terminals is longer than the length in the Z-axis direction of the other case-side terminal. A cartridge is detachably attached to a printing device, the printing device includes: a cartridge mounting structure configured to allow the cartridge to be attached and detached; a printing material supply tube, which is structured A base end provided on a bottom of the box mounting structure and a peripheral end connected to the box, and configured to supply a printing material contained in the box to a printing head; a plurality of A device-side terminal provided to contact the box body; and a lever provided to attach and detach the box body, wherein a Z-axis represents a axis parallel to a central axis C of the printing material supply pipe One axis, one X axis represents the printed material supply tube and the equipment-side terminals along which it is arranged and is orthogonal to one axis of the Z axis, and one Y axis represents one axis orthogonal to the Z axis and the X axis Among them, a + Z axis direction indicates a direction from the base end to the peripheral end of the printing material supply pipe along the Z axis, a -Z axis direction indicates a reverse direction of the + Z axis direction, and a + X Axis direction indicates along the X axis from the printing material supply tube to the equipment-side terminals One direction, one -X axis direction means one opposite direction of the + X axis direction, one + Y axis direction means one direction along one end of the Y axis, and one -Y axis direction means another direction along the Y axis. One direction at one end, in which the device-side terminals are in contact with the case to attach the case to the case in an attached state where the case is attached to the case mounting structure The box applies a force, and the lever may have an operating member at the + Z-axis direction end and a -Z-axis direction end at the first device-side restricting element that locks the box and Therefore, the movement of the box in the + Z axis direction is restricted, and the lever can be rotated as a rotation axis around a specific position between the operation member and the first device-side restriction element, wherein the lever is rotated relative to the position in the attached state. The X-axis, the Y-axis, and the Z-axis of the box respectively correspond to an X-axis, a Y-axis, and a Z-axis of the box. The box includes a printing material supply structure, which is located in the box. The -Z axis end is connected with the printing material supply pipe; a circuit board is located on the printing material A surface on the + X-axis direction side of the structure and having a surface inclined in a specific direction including the + X-axis direction component and the -Z-axis direction component; a plurality of box-side terminals corresponding to the respective devices Side terminals are provided and located on the surface of the circuit board to receive a force from the device side terminals in a specific direction including the + Z-axis direction component; and a first box-side limiting portion, The state is locked by the first device-side restricting element and thus restricts the movement of the box in the + Z axis direction, and the first box-side restricting portion is located on the + X-axis direction side of the printing material supply structure, The first box-side restricting portion is disposed at a specific position near a board end, and the board end is located on the + Z axis direction side of the surface of the circuit board. A printing material supply system includes: a printing device; and the box according to any one of claims 1 to 18, the printing device includes: a box mounting structure configured to have: (i) a Equipment-side bottom wall component; (ii) a first equipment-side sidewall component provided to intersect the equipment-side bottom wall component; and (iii) a second equipment-side sidewall component provided to intersect the equipment-side bottom wall The components intersect and are opposite to the first equipment side sidewall component; a printed material supply tube structured to have a base end disposed on the equipment side bottom wall component and a peripheral end connected to the case, and Configured to supply one of the printing materials contained in the case to a print head; a plurality of device-side terminals provided at a device-side corner region where the device-side bottom wall member intersects the first device-side sidewall member And a lever, which is rotatably provided on the side wall part of the first device for attaching and detaching the case to the printing device, wherein a Z axis represents parallel to the printing material In one of the supply pipes One axis of the mandrel C, an X axis indicates that the printed material supply tube and the equipment-side terminals are arranged along it and is orthogonal to one of the Z axes, and one Y axis indicates orthogonal to the Z axis and the X axis One of the two axes, one of the + Z directions indicates a direction from the base end to the peripheral end of the printing material supply pipe along the Z axis, and one -Z direction indicates an opposite direction of the + Z axis direction A + X axis direction indicates one of the directions from the printing material supply tube to the equipment-side terminals along the X axis, a -X axis direction indicates an opposite direction to the + X axis direction, and a + Y axis direction indicates One direction along one end of the Y axis and one direction along the -Y axis indicates one direction along the Y axis toward the other end, in the attached state where the box is attached to the box mounting structure, The device-side terminals are in contact with the case to apply a force to the case in a specific direction including one of the + Z-axis direction components, and the lever may have an operating member at the + Z-axis direction end and a -Z One of the first device-side restricting elements at the axial direction end, the first device-side restricting element can lock the box and thus restrict the box along + Z-axis direction movement of the lever member about the operation between a specific position as a rotation shaft member rotates with the first side of the restriction device. A cassette is detachably attached to a printing apparatus, the printing apparatus includes: a cassette mounting structure configured to have: (i) a device-side bottom wall member; (ii) a first device A side wall member provided to intersect the device side bottom wall member; and (iii) a second device side wall member provided to intersect the device side bottom wall member and oppose the first device side side wall member; A printing material supply tube structured to have a base end provided on the bottom wall part of the apparatus and a peripheral end connected to the box, and configured to print one of the boxes received in the box Material is supplied to a printing head; a plurality of device-side terminals are provided in a device-side corner section where the device-side bottom wall member intersects with the first device-side side wall member; and a lever which is rotatable in a rotatable manner It is arranged on the side wall part of the first device for attaching and detaching the box with respect to the printing device, wherein a Z axis represents an axis parallel to a central axis C of the printing material supply pipe, and an X axis Indicates that the printed material is The tubes and the equipment-side terminals are arranged along it and orthogonal to one axis of the Z axis, and a Y axis represents an axis orthogonal to both the Z axis and the X axis, and a + Z axis direction represents along the The Z axis is a direction from the base end to the peripheral end of the printing material supply tube, a -Z axis direction indicates an opposite direction of the + Z axis direction, and a + X axis direction indicates the direction from the X axis The direction of the supply pipe of the printed material to one of the terminals on the side of the equipment, a -X axis direction represents a reverse direction of the + X axis direction, a + Y axis direction represents a direction along the Y axis to one end, and a- The Y-axis direction indicates a direction along the Y-axis toward the other end, and in the attached state where the case is attached to the case mounting structure, the device-side terminals are in contact with the case to include the case. One of the + Z-axis direction components applies a force to the case, and the lever may have an operating member at the + Z-axis direction end and a -Z-axis direction end at the first device-side restricting element, the The first device-side restricting element can lock the case and thus restrict the movement of the case in the + Z axis direction, and the lever can rotate around the operating portion A specific position between the piece and the first device-side restricting element is rotated as a rotation axis, wherein the X axis, the Y axis, and the Z axis with respect to the case in the attached state correspond to One of the boxes is an X-axis, a Y-axis, and a Z-axis. The box includes a first surface on the −Z axis side and a second surface on the + Z axis side. Two faces facing each other in the Z-axis direction; a third face located on the + X-axis direction side and a fourth face located on the -X-axis direction side as opposite to each other and the first surface in the X-axis direction And two faces intersecting with the second face; a corner section configured to connect the first face and the third face; and an inclined surface set to form a part of the corner section and along the + One of the X-axis direction component and the -Z-axis direction component is inclined in a specific direction; a printing material supply structure is provided on the first surface to be connected with the printing material supply tube; a plurality of box-side terminals corresponding to The respective device-side terminals are disposed on the inclined surface to receive an edge from the device-side terminals. A force in a specific direction in the + Z-axis direction component; and a first box-side restricting portion configured to be locked by the first device-side restricting element and thus restrict the movement of the box in the + Z-axis direction Wherein the first box-side limiting portion is disposed on the third surface, and the box-side terminals include: a first terminal including a first outer portion located at an end in the most + Y-axis direction; and A second terminal including a second outer portion at the end in the -Y-axis direction, wherein the first box-side restricting portion is located between the first outer portion and the second outer portion in the Y-axis direction. A range is inside rather than outside. The cartridge of claim 20, wherein the first cartridge-side restricting portion is disposed at a specific position near an intersection portion where the third surface intersects the inclined surface. If the case of claim 20 or 21 further includes: a circuit board configured to have the case-side terminals provided on a surface and a memory unit provided on a back surface, wherein the The inclined surface is formed by the surface of the circuit board, and the first box-side restricting portion is located near a board end on the + Z axis direction side of the circuit board. For example, the box of claim 20 or 21, wherein the first box-side restricting portion is disposed at a position that intersects a plane that passes through the center of a width of the box or the length in the Y-axis direction and is parallel to The Z-axis and the X-axis. If the case of claim 20 or 21, further comprising: a second case-side restriction portion configured to be locked by a second equipment-side restriction element provided on the second equipment-side side wall member and thus The movement of the box body in the + Z axis direction is restricted, and the second box-side restriction portion is disposed on the fourth surface. The cartridge of claim 24, wherein the second cartridge-side restricting portion is inserted into a protruding portion of the second device-side restricting element formed as a recess or a through hole. As in the case of claim 20 or 21, wherein the first case-side restricting portion is located on the -X axis direction side of the rotation axis of the lever. For example, the box of claim 20 or 21, wherein the first box-side restricting portion has: a first abutting portion, which abuts a first portion of the first device-side restricting element to restrict the box along the + Z axis Movement in the direction; and a second abutting portion, which abuts a second portion of the first device-side restricting element to restrict the movement of the box in the + X axis direction. If the case of claim 20 or 21, further comprising: a protrusion configured to abut the operation of the lever during disassembly of the case attached to the case mounting structure from the case mounting structure The component also receives a force including the + Z-axis direction component, and the protrusion is disposed on the + Z-axis direction side of the first box-side restricting portion on the third surface. If the box of claim 20 or 21, wherein the corner section has a step extending from the first surface in the + Z axis direction, the step is located on the -X axis direction side and the -Z axis of the inclined surface On the direction side, and the step has a third box-side restricting element in contact with a third device-side restricting element provided on the box mounting structure to restrict the movement of the box in the Y-axis direction. The cartridge of claim 29, wherein the third cartridge-side restricting element includes a pair of protruding parts configured to receive the third device-side restricting element protruding from the device-side bottom wall member in the + Z axis direction. , And the pair of protruding members protrude from the step along the + X-axis direction. The case of claim 29, wherein when the case is viewed from the first side in the + Z axis direction, a portion of the third case-side restricting element overlaps the inclined surface. The cartridge of claim 20 or 21, wherein the printing material supply structure is disposed at a specific position closer to the fourth side than the third side to the fourth side. For example, the box of claim 20 or 21, wherein the first box-side restricting portion is a protruding portion. If the case of claim 20 or 21, wherein the case-side terminals include a case-side ground terminal that is in contact with an equipment-side ground terminal of one of the equipment-side terminals, the equipment-side ground terminal is connected to a ground wire, And the box-side ground terminal is provided at the center of the width of the box or the length in the Y-axis direction and is configured to be in any other box during the process of attaching the box to the box mounting structure Before the side terminal comes into contact with a corresponding device-side terminal, it is in contact with the device-side ground terminal. As in the case of claim 34, the length of the Z-axis direction of one of the case-side ground terminals is longer than the length of the Z-axis direction of the other case-side terminal. A cartridge body is detachably attached to a printing device, the printing device includes: a cartridge mounting structure configured to allow the cartridge body to be attached and detached; a printing material supply tube, which is structured It has a base end provided on a bottom of the box mounting structure and a peripheral end connected to the box, and is configured to supply a printing material contained in the box to a printing head; A plurality of device-side terminals arranged to contact the box body; and a lever provided to attach and detach the box body, wherein a Z axis represents a central axis C parallel to a printing material supply tube One axis, one X axis represents the printed material supply tube and the equipment-side terminals are arranged along it and is orthogonal to one axis of the Z axis, and one Y axis represents one of the two axes orthogonal to the Z axis and the X axis. One axis, where a + Z axis direction indicates a direction from the base end to the peripheral end of the printing material supply tube along the Z axis, a -Z axis direction indicates a reverse direction of the + Z axis direction, and a + The X-axis direction indicates from the printing material supply pipe to the side of the equipment along the X-axis One of the directions, and one -X axis direction indicates one of the opposite directions of the + X axis direction, in which the device-side terminals and the box are in an attached state where the box is attached to the box mounting structure Contact to apply a force to the case in a specific direction containing one of the + Z-axis direction components, and the lever has an operating member at the + Z-axis direction end and a first device side at the -Z-axis direction end A restricting element, the first device-side restricting element can lock the case and thus restrict the movement of the case in the + Z axis direction, and the lever can be used around a specific position between the operating member and the first device-side restricting element as a Rotate by a rotation axis, wherein the X axis, the Y axis, and the Z axis with respect to the case in the attached state correspond to an X axis, a Y axis, and a Z axis of the case, respectively, and the The box body includes: a printing material supply structure located at the -Z axis end of the box body to be connected with the printing material supply pipe; a plurality of box side terminals provided on the + X axis of the printing material supply structure Set on the direction side and correspond to these respective device-side terminals and located along the + X An axial direction component and one of the -Z axis direction components inclined on a specific direction to receive a force from the device-side terminals in a specific direction including the + Z axis direction component; and a first box A side restricting portion configured to be locked by the first device-side restricting element and thus restrict the movement of the case in the + Z axis direction, and the first case-side restricting portion is located in the printing material supply structure. On the + X-axis direction side and on the -Z-axis direction side of the rotation axis of the lever, the box-side terminals include a first terminal including a first outer portion located at the most + Y-axis direction end. Part; and a second terminal including a second outer part located at the end in the -Y-axis direction, wherein the first box-side restricting part is located in the Y-axis direction between the first outer part and the first A range between the two outer parts is inside rather than outside. A printing material supply system includes: a printing device; and the box according to any one of claims 20 to 36, the printing device includes: a box mounting structure configured to have: (i) a Equipment-side bottom wall component; (ii) a first equipment-side sidewall component provided to intersect the equipment-side bottom wall component; and (iii) a second equipment-side sidewall component provided to intersect the equipment-side bottom wall The components intersect and are opposite to the first equipment side sidewall component; a printed material supply tube structured to have a base end disposed on the equipment side bottom wall component and a peripheral end connected to the case, and Configured to supply one of the printing materials contained in the case to a print head; a plurality of device-side terminals provided at a device-side corner region where the device-side bottom wall member intersects the first device-side sidewall member And a lever, which is rotatably provided on the side wall part of the first device for attaching and detaching the case to the printing device, wherein a Z axis represents parallel to the printing material One of the supply pipes One axis of the mandrel C, an X axis indicates that the printed material supply tube and the equipment-side terminals are arranged along it and is orthogonal to one of the Z axes, and one Y axis indicates orthogonal to the Z axis and the X axis One of the two axes, one of the + Z directions indicates a direction from the base end to the peripheral end of the printing material supply pipe along the Z axis, and one -Z direction indicates an opposite direction of the + Z axis direction A + X axis direction indicates one of the directions from the printing material supply tube to the equipment-side terminals along the X axis, a -X axis direction indicates an opposite direction to the + X axis direction, and a + Y axis direction indicates One direction along one end of the Y axis and one direction along the -Y axis indicates one direction along the Y axis toward the other end, in the attached state where the box is attached to the box mounting structure, The device-side terminals are in contact with the case to apply a force to the case in a specific direction including one of the + Z-axis direction components, and the lever may have an operating member at the + Z-axis direction end and a -Z One of the first device-side restricting elements at the axial direction end, the first device-side restricting element can lock the box and thus restrict the box along + Z-axis direction movement of the lever member about the operation between a specific position as a rotation shaft member rotates with the first side of the restriction device. A box body adapted to be mounted on a printing device having one of the following structures, the printing device including a plurality of device-side contact forming members configured to apply elastic force to the box body, the printing device also including a meshing portion A lever, the box body includes: a first surface, a second surface, a third surface, and a fourth surface, wherein the first surface and the second surface are opposed to each other and the third surface and the fourth surface are opposed to each other An electrical device; a liquid chamber for storing liquid; a liquid supply structure located on the fourth side and configured to supply liquid from the liquid chamber to the printing equipment, the liquid supply structure having a A front edge of one of the planes of the box in a mounting direction; a conductive terminal located closer to the first surface than the second surface and coupled to the electrical device, the terminals being configured to mount the box on the The printed device is in contact with the contact forming members at the contact portions of the terminals and receives the elastic force from the contact forming members. The contact portions of the terminals are substantially arranged neither parallel to nor Perpendicular to a plane of a contact portion of the plane defined by the leading edge; and a first restricting portion adapted to engage the engaging portion of the lever to restrict the box from moving in a direction opposite to the mounting direction , The engaging portion of the first restricting portion is located closer to one of the contact portions than the intersection of the third surface and the first surface intersection. As in the case of claim 38, wherein the engaging portion of the first restricting portion is located at an intersection where the first surface intersects the plane where the contact portion intersects and where the third surface intersects the first surface where the first surface intersects. The midpoint of the interval is closer to one of the contact portions. As in the case of claim 38 or 39, wherein the plane of the contact portion and the plane defined by the leading edge form an included angle between 25 and 40 degrees. The case of claim 38 or 39, wherein when the first surface of the case is viewed with the liquid supply structure facing downward, the engaging portion of the first restricting portion is located at one of the plurality of terminals. A left side of an extension line of a right edge of one of the right terminals and a right side of an extension line of a left edge of one of the leftmost terminals of the plurality of terminals. If the case of claim 38 or 39 further comprises a second restricting portion on the second side of the case, the second restricting portion is adapted to engage with a respective portion of the printing device, wherein When measuring the distance in a direction orthogonal to the plane defined by the leading edge, the distance between the engaging portion of the second restricting portion and the plane defined by the leading edge is greater than the engaging of the first restricting portion The distance between the part and the plane defined by the leading edge. As in the case of claim 38 or 39, when the case is viewed from an angle from which the engaging portion of the first restricting portion is on the right side and the liquid supply structure faces downward, the When measuring the distance in the direction of the plane defined, the distance between the engaging portion of the first restricting portion and the plane defined by the leading edge is less than a pivot of the lever when the box is installed. The distance between the pivot point and the plane defined by the leading edge. As in the case of claim 43, wherein when the case is viewed from the angle at which the engaging portion of the first restricting portion is on the right side and the liquid supply structure faces downward, in a state where the case is installed, the The engaging portion of the first restricting portion is to the left of the pivot point of the lever. For example, the case of claim 38 or 39, wherein when the first surface of the case main body is viewed with the liquid supply structure facing downward, the engagement of the first restricting portion in the state where the case is installed At least a part of the portion is located substantially at the center in the width direction of the box. As in the case of claim 38 or 39, the plane defined by the leading edge is substantially flush with the fourth plane. If the box of claim 38 or 39 includes an adapter, the contact portions of the terminals and the first restricted portion are located on the adapter and the liquid chamber is adapted and configured to communicate with the Adapters are paired. A box body adapted to be mounted on a printing device, the printing device including a plurality of device-side contact forming members configured to apply elastic force to the box body, the printing device also including a lever having an engaging portion, The box includes: a first surface, a second surface, a third surface, and a fourth surface, wherein the first surface and the second surface are opposed to each other and the third surface and the fourth surface are opposed to each other; an electrical device A liquid chamber for storing liquid; a liquid supply structure located on the fourth side and configured to supply liquid from the liquid chamber to the printing equipment, the liquid supply structure having one of the boxes defining the box One of the planes is a leading edge in the mounting direction; a conductive terminal is located closer to the first surface than the second surface and is coupled to the electrical device, and the terminals are configured to install the box on the printing device At the contact portions of the terminals, contact with the contact forming members and receive the elastic force from the contact forming members, the contact portions of the terminals are substantially arranged neither parallel to nor perpendicular to the front edge And a first restricting portion adapted to mesh with the engaging portion of the lever to restrict the box from moving in a direction opposite to the mounting direction, the first restricting portion being provided A position closer to a first intersection where the first surface intersects the plane of the contact portion than a second intersection where the first surface intersects the third surface. The cartridge of claim 48, wherein the engaging portion of the first restricting portion is located closer to one of the first intersections than a midpoint between the first intersection and the second intersection. For example, the box of claim 48 or 49, wherein the contact portion plane forms an angle between 25 degrees and 40 degrees with the plane defined by the leading edge. For example, the box of claim 48 or 49, wherein when the first surface of the box is viewed with the liquid supply structure facing downward, the engaging portion of the first restricting portion is located at one of the plurality of terminals. A left side of an extension line of a right edge of one of the right terminals and a right side of an extension line of a left edge of one of the leftmost terminals of the plurality of terminals. If the case of claim 48 or 49 further comprises a second restricting portion on the second side of the case, the second restricting portion is adapted to engage with a respective portion of the printing device, wherein When measuring the distance in a direction orthogonal to the plane defined by the leading edge, the distance between the engaging portion of the second restricting portion and the plane defined by the leading edge is greater than that of the first restricting portion. The distance between the engaging portion and the plane defined by the leading edge. As in the case of claim 48 or 49, when the case is viewed from an angle from which the engaging portion of the first restricting portion is on the right side and the liquid supply structure faces downward, the When measuring the distance in the direction of the plane defined, the distance between the engaging portion of the first restricting portion and the plane defined by the leading edge is less than a pivot of the lever when the box is installed. The distance between the pivot point and the plane defined by the leading edge. As in the case of claim 53, wherein when the case is viewed from the angle at which the engaging portion of the first restricting portion is on the right side and the liquid supply structure faces downward, in a state where the case is installed, the The engaging portion of the first restricting portion is to the left of the pivot point of the lever. For example, the box of claim 48 or 49, wherein when the first surface of the box body is viewed with the liquid supply structure facing downward, the engagement of the first restricting portion in the state where the box is installed At least a part of the portion is located substantially at the center in the width direction of the box. In the case of claim 48 or 49, the plane defined by the leading edge is substantially flush with the fourth plane. If the box of claim 48 or 49 includes an adapter, the contact portions of the terminals and the first restricted portion are located on the adapter, and the liquid chamber is adapted and configured to communicate with This adapter is paired. A box body adapted to be mounted on a printing device having one of the following structures, the printing device including a plurality of device-side contact forming members configured to apply an elastic force to the box body, the printing device also including a meshing portion And a lever with a pivot point, the box body includes: a first surface, a second surface, a third surface, and a fourth surface, wherein the first surface and the second surface are opposite each other and the third surface and the The fourth side is opposite to each other; an electrical device; a liquid chamber for storing liquid; a liquid supply structure located on the fourth side and configured to supply liquid from the liquid chamber to the printing equipment, the liquid The supply structure has a leading edge defining an installation direction of a plane of the box; a conductive terminal located closer to the first surface than the second surface and coupled to the electrical device, the terminals are configured to When the box is installed on the printing equipment, the contact parts of the terminals make contact with the contact forming parts and receive the elastic force from the contact forming parts. The contact parts of the terminals are substantially arranged in neither. Travels in a plane that is not perpendicular to a contact portion of the plane defined by the leading edge; and a first restricting portion adapted to engage with the engaging portion of the lever to restrict the box along a mounting direction Moving in the opposite direction, the engaging portion of the first restricting portion is arranged such that when the cartridge is mounted on the printing device, the engaging portion of the first restricting portion is one of the points below the pivot point of the lever Engage with the lever at the position. As in the case of claim 58, wherein the plane of the contact portion and the plane defined by the leading edge form an included angle between 25 and 40 degrees. For example, the cartridge of claim 58 or 59, wherein when the first surface of the cartridge is viewed with the liquid supply structure facing downward, the engaging portion of the first restricting portion is located at one of the plurality of terminals. A left side of an extension line of a right edge of one of the right terminals and a right side of an extension line of a left edge of one of the leftmost terminals of the plurality of terminals. If the cartridge of claim 58 or 59 further comprises a second restricting portion on the second side of the cartridge, the second restricting portion is adapted to engage a respective portion of the printing device, wherein When measuring the distance in a direction orthogonal to the plane defined by the leading edge, the distance between the engaging portion of the second restricting portion and the plane defined by the leading edge is greater than that of the first restricting portion. The distance between the engaging portion and the plane defined by the leading edge. As in the case of claim 58 or 59, when the case is viewed from the angle at which the engaging portion of the first restricting portion is on the right side and the liquid supply structure faces downward, the case is installed , The engaging portion of the first restricting portion is to the left of the pivot point of the lever. For example, if the box of item 58 or 59 is requested, when the first surface of the box body is viewed with the liquid supply structure facing downward, the first restricted portion of the At least a part of the engaging portion is located substantially at the center in the width direction of the box. In the case of claim 58 or 59, the plane defined by the leading edge is substantially flush with the fourth plane. If the box of claim 58 or 59 includes an adapter, the contact portions of the terminals and the first restricted portion are located on the adapter and the liquid chamber is adapted and configured to communicate with the Adapters are paired.